SJ-GENUIE-SERIES Compressed 2 PDF

MITSUBISHI
SELFJECTOR
GENIUS -SERIES
Instruction Manual
Operation Manual 1
for English
MITSUBISHI KAKOKI KAISHA Ltd.

IMPORTANCE
The manual is edited for treating mineral oils

such as for purifying fuel oil or lubricating oil.
SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

! WARNING
The instruction manual is a guidebook for using the automatic discharge type oil
purifier, MITSUBISHI SELFJECTOR GENIUS SERIES (hereinafter referred to as
SELFJECTOR).
SELFJECTOR is a fast rotating centrifugal machine. Before using it, sufficiently be
versed in details of the manual.
Handle it safely and so as to fully exhibit the function of SELFJECTOR.
The composition of instruction manual for SELFJECTOR is as follows.

The present manual is Part 2 "Operation manual1".
Use each manual according to the particular purpose to sufficiently

understand the information.

①: Design Engineer ②: Installer ③: Engine Engineer ④: Operator
Intended
Part
Manual Description Reader

①②③④
1 Outline of fitting-out Aboard Information for transportation, handling and storage of the
machine
O O
Instructions for installation and dimensions
System diagram and connection diagram
2 Operation Manual 1 Precautions for safety
Configuration and construction of SELFJECTOR
O
Motor, starter, automatic control panel
Multi-Monitor
Functions of components
O
Operation setting items and adjustment procedures
How to start and stop
4 Operation Manual 3A Precautions for safety
Function, operation and maintenance information on O
automatic control panel GBC-1 & GBC-2
Operation Manual 3B Precautions for safety
automatic control panel GSH-1
5 Maintenance Manual Precautions for safety
Disassembly and reassembly procedures
O
Maintenance and inspection procedures
Troubleshooting and corrective action
NOTE
The Part 4 manuals (Operation Manuals 3A & 3B) deal with the following types of the automatic control
systems. When you purchase the SELFJECTOR controlled by one of these control systems, the
associated operation manual of Part 4 will be supplied.
Automatic control systems: GBC-1, GBC-2, GSH-1

Contents (1 / 3)
1 Precautions in safety ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Symbols related to safety ................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Labels for safety .............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Safety precautions........................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Definition of terms ........................................................................................................................... 1-5
2 Configuration of oil purifying system............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Gear pump ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Oil heater......................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 3-way cylinder valve ........................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.4 Multi- Monitor (MM) ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.1 Leakage Monitor Function (LM).................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.2 Discharge Detector Function (DD)................................................................................................ 2-2
2.4.3 Water Detector Function (WD) ..................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5 Starter.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.6 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.7 Alarm panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.8 Kinds (specifications) of oil purifying system ................................................................................... 2-3
2.9 Component devices of different versions......................................................................................... 2-4
2.10 Feature of Automatic types............................................................................................................ 2-4
3 STRUCTURE of SELFJRCTOR ........................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 General............................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.2 Drive unit ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Vertical shaft section .................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2 Horizontal shaft section ................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.3 Brake ............................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.4 Friction clutch ............................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Bowl................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3.1 Structure of bowl .......................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.2 Discharge mechanism .................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.4 Water supplying device ................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.5 Centripetal pump ............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.6 Purifier operation and clarifier operation.......................................................................................... 3-8
3.6.1 Purifier operation .......................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.6.2 Clarifier operation ......................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.7 Parallel operation and series operation ......................................................................................... 3-10
3.7.1 Parallel operation........................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.7.2 Series operation ......................................................................................................................... 3-12

Contents (2 / 3)
4 Motor, starter and control panel ..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Motor ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Precautions in handling ................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.2 Motor characteristics .................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Motor structure ............................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.4 Rated current intensity.................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Starter.............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Starter structure............................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.3 Overload relay (thermal relay) ...................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.4 Connection of Starter.................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.2 Control panel (model GBC-1) ....................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.3 Control panel (model GBC-2) ....................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.4 Control panel （model GSH-1）................................................................................................ 4-11
4.3.5 Alarm panel （GAP-11）........................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4 Control Unit（GBC-1, GBC-2） .................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.1 Control Unit ................................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.2 Terminal Unit .............................................................................................................................. 4-17
5 Programmable logic controller（PLC） ......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Programmable Controller ................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.2 Programmable Controller Configuration .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 CPU Board ................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Operation Display Panel............................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.3 Expansion Board (Option for Indication of Water Content)........................................................... 5-2
5.3 Functions of Individual Parts of Programmable Controller............................................................... 5-2
5.3.1 CPU Board ................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2 Functions of Individual Parts of CPU Board ................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.3 Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs................................................................................ 5-4
5.4 Operation Display Panel.................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.4.1 Functions of Individual Sections of Operation Display Panel........................................................ 5-6
5.4.2 Expansion Board (Option) ............................................................................................................ 5-8

Contents (3 / 3)
6 Multi-Monitor..................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Multi-Monitor.................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Kind of Multi-Monitor..................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Explanation of internal switches on Multi-Monitor......................................................................... 6-3
6.1.4 Identification and Location of Multi-Monitor Sensors .................................................................... 6-5
6.1.5 Routine running ............................................................................................................................ 6-5
6.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)....................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.2 Operating principle ....................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.3 Connecting with control panel ...................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.4 LED display .................................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.2.5 Routine running ............................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.2.6 Items to adjust .............................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.2.7 Factory settings (main value) ..................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3 Discharge Detector Function (DD)................................................................................................. 6-11
6.3.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.2 Operating principle (Alarm function) ........................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.3 Connecting with control panel .................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.4 LED displays .............................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.3.5 Routine running .......................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.6 Items to adjust ............................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.3.7 Precautions in handling .............................................................................................................. 6-13
6.4 Water Detector Function (WD) ...................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.2 Pressure sensor type water detector (GSH-1/MM-3).................................................................. 6-14
6.4.3 Electrostatic capacity type water detector (GSH-1/MM-2) .......................................................... 6-18
6.5 Partial discharge detection function (GSH-1) ................................................................................ 6-19
6.5.1 Operating principle ..................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.5.2 Items to adjust ............................................................................................................................ 6-20
6.6 Display Function ............................................................................................................................ 6-21
6.6.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.6.2 Configuration of display .............................................................................................................. 6-21
6.6.3 Factory settings .......................................................................................................................... 6-23

1 Precautions in safety
For correct use, carefully read the "Precautions in safety" beforehand.
Precautions in safety given in the instruction manual are intended for safely and correctly using the
product and avoiding danger or damage to user. Carefully read the precautions and do not operate,
maintain or handle SELFJECTOR before you are fully versed in them.
1.1 Symbols related to safety

In the manual, precautions are headed by the following marks. Be sure to observe them because they
are important for ensuring the safety.
! WARNING: indicates a potentially hazardous situation which ,if not heeded, could result
in death or serious injury.
! CAUTION: indicates a hazardous situation which ,if not heeded ,may result in minor or
moderate injury or damage to the purifier or facilities.
NOTE: indicate precautionary instructions that given contain what must be done
without fail and what should be kept in mind as a guide in operating
SELFJECTOR and doing related work.

1-1
1.2 Labels for safety
There are 3 different labels for safety.
The one shown in Pic. 1 is put in the spare part box. After fitting-out aboard, the person in charge of
installation is requested to attach it on an easily visible place near SELFJECTOR.
Pic. 2,Pic. 3 are factory attached direct on SELFJECTOR. Do not smear them by painting but keep
them
visible at all times.
Safety labels are available any time. Request them as required.
Pic. 1
Pic. 2
Pic. 3

1-2
1.3 Safety precautions
! WARNING
The bowl of SELFJECTOR produces a large centrifugal force when it rotates. Wrong handling is very
dangerous. Pay utmost attention according to the manual for operation, disassembly, reassembly,
maintenance, checkup, etc. Use of non-genuine parts might damage SELFJECTOR or impair human
safety. Be sure to employ genuine parts.
Perfectly assemble.
Many points of SELFJECTOR are connected by screws. When assembling, make sure tightening is
complete. Running with poor tightening is very dangerous. Doubly make sure of secure tightening
particularly of:
(A) Bowl nut

(B) Disk nut
(C) Cap nut of Vertical shaft
(D) Set bolt of Frame cover
(E) Lock nut (hexagon) of Inlet pipe
Be sure that tally marks of the bowl and other so marked parts are aligned.
If the tally mark is excessively mis-aligned when the Bowl nut is tightened, contact our company or
service agency.
Immediately stop if vibration is excessive.

Vibration of SELFJECTOR is caused by unbalance, ship oscillation,
SELFJECTOR installation, etc. If the vibration is excessive, immediately
stop SELFJECTOR without discharging sludge.
Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective action to ensure
safety before restarting SELFJECTOR.
To be more specific, if the vibration at the point A of Fig. 1-1 exceeds
100 μm (peak to peak) at rated speed, stop SELFJECTOR.
Even if readings are below 100 μm, continuous cruising ship vibrations
4-5 times higher than registered when external vibrating forces are small,
such as when the main engine is not in operation, could adversely affect
Fig. 1-1
the durability of SELFJECTOR. In such case, stop SELFJECTOR
immediately. Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective
action to ensure safety before restarting SELFJECTOR as described
above.

1-3
! WARNING
Make sure of complete stoppage before loosening each section.

Make sure the bowl has complete stopped rotating before loosening or disassembling each section.
Whether completely stopped or not can be checked at the motor fan or Gear pump and Horizontal shaft
connecting section (Safety joint).
Take care in handling the parts.

SELFJECTOR is a precision machine. Handle it attentively away from impact and high temperature.
Particularly never heat the bowl parts (Bowl body, Bowl hood, etc.) by open flame nor weld them.
Beware of corrosion and erosion.

Periodically check whether any damage is produced by corrosion or erosion.
For details, contact our company or service agency.
Others
1. Before disassembling, turn off the starter.
2. Before treating a treating liquid other than specified initially, contact our company or service
agency.
3. The bowl is factory balanced. Never interchange bowl parts [Disc (1)] even within the same model.
For ambiguous points in the instruction manual, contact our company or

service agency.

1-4
1.4 Definition of terms
Clarifier operation (clarifying operation):
Density (ρ): Mass per unit volume. Operation of separating into 2 phases or liquid
and solid or, here, into oil and solids.
Specific gravity (γ): Ratio of mass to mass of (See "Clarifier operation".)
water of the same volume. Varies with
temperature. Parallel operation:
Operation with oil fed proportionally to several
Oil feed rate: Volume per unit time of untreated purifiers arranged in parallel.
liquid upstream the purifier expressed in terms of (See "Parallel operation".)
L/h or m3/h.
Series operation:
Actual capacity: Purifier treating capacity based Operation by several purifiers arranged in series.
on SM Standard (eliminating sludge with 1.8 of (See "Series operation".)
specific gravity and 2μm of diameter or more).
(See "Feed rate" above.) Total discharge type
Purifier designed to totally discharge all contained
Feed liquid: Untreated oil to feed to purifier. in the bowl.
Light liquid: Oil treated by purifier or purified oil. Partial discharge type
Purifier designed to partially discharge water and
Heavy liquid: Separated moisture and heavy solids only in the bowl. This type has the total
components in oil or simply "water". discharge function as well.
Sludge: Solids accumulated in bowl in narrow

sense. Mixture of solids, water and oil discharged Abbreviations and units
from bowl in wide sense.
L: Liter: Unit of volume.
Interface: Boundary surface between heavy and H: Hour(s): Unit of time.
light liquids in bowl. min-1: Number of revolutions per minute.
Hz: Number of frequency.
Purifier operation (purifying operation): (cycles per second)
Operation of separating into 3 phases or liquid, φ: Unit of diameter in mm.
liquid and solid or, here, into oil, water and solids. mm2/S: unit of kinetic viscosity of oil. (= cSt)
(See "Purifier operation".) ISO: Standards established by International
Standardization Organization.
VG: Indication of viscosity of lubricating oil in
accordance with ISO.

1-5
2 Configuration of oil purifying system
Fig. 2-1 shows a typical purifying system configuration with the automatic GSH-1 (HIDENS)
specification of SELFJECTOR.
Electric
Automatic Power source
Starter
Control panel
SV4
5
S
3 P SV3 SV2 SV1 SV9
R4 S S S S CV1 4
WD
9
1
C
7 10
LM
6 12
E MM OIL HEATER
13
B 2
M
A DD 8
11
P
C
MKK SUPPLY Note) Automatic GBC-1 and GBC-2

specifications are not provided with Water
D Detector (WD) and solenoid valve (SV9).
F Also, Discharge Detector (DD) is optional
for these specifications.
Fig. 2-1
1 SELFJECTOR A Dirty oil inlet

2 Gear pump B Purified oil outlet
3 Solenoid valves unit for operating water C Compressed air inlet
4 3-way cylinder valve (Feed valve) D Sludge & Water outlet
5 3-way solenoid valve E Water inlet
6 Multi-Monitor F Drain
7 Leakage Monitor function (LM) G Circulation
8 Discharge detector function (DD) P Pressure gauge
9 Water detector function (WD) C Compound gauge
10 Oil heater M Motor
11 Oil strainer
12 Flow control valve
13 Pressure control valve (Needle valve)
SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

2-1 Operation Manual1
2.1 Gear pump
The gear pump feeds feed oil to the purifier. Mounted on the horizontal shaft of the purifier via a safety
joint, it is driven by the motor for the purifier.
The gear pump can be selected to match a particular treating capacity.
Instead of the gear pump, a separate pump may be used.
2.2 Oil heater

Installed midway between the gear pump and oil purifier, the oil heater warms feed oil fed by the gear
pump to an optimum treating temperature. The heater is classified into steam and electrical types. The
steam type is provided with a temperature control valve and the electrical type with a thermostat to
control the temperature.
Before oil is treated by the oil purifier, it must be heated up to a certain temperature according to the
particular oil viscosity and nature.
2.3 3-way cylinder valve

The 3-way cylinder valve is a pneumatically operated selector valve and feeds feed oil to the purifier.
When starting, stopped or discharging sludge, it is changed to return the oil via the bypass piping to the
tank.
2.4 Multi- Monitor (MM)

The Multi-Monitor forms an integrated detection system with a Leakage Monitor, a Discharge Detector
and a Water Detector. It has displays to indicate the operational status data of SJ-G series
SELFJECTOR such as flow rate, temperature, pressure and speed. This instrument contains a serial
board (RS485) that enables communication with the control panel.
2.4.1 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)

The Leakage Monitor detects a leakage of treated oil from the bowl's sludge outlet or heavy liquid
output by means of a pressure sensor and delivers an alarm signal to the automatic control panel via
the Multi-Monitor. The pressure sensor is located on the light liquid outlet-side bracket of the
SELFJECTOR and normally maintained under a certain level of pressure by means of a pressure
control valve. When a leakage occurs, an ensuing pressure drop is detected by the pressure sensor
and an alarm signal is sent to the automatic control panel.
2.4.2 Discharge Detector Function (DD)

The Discharge Detector monitors the horizontal shaft speed by means of a proximity sensor and
determines whether or not sludge discharge has properly taken place by means of an input data
comparison circuit. When abnormal discharge is detected, an alarm signal is issued to the automatic
control panel via the Multi-Monitor. In addition to this alarm output function, the Discharge Detector of
the partial discharge type purifier has a display function to tell whether or not the sludge discharge is
optimal for partial discharge adjustment.

2.4.3 Water Detector Function (WD)
The Water Detector is available in a pressure type and an electrostatic capacity type (option). The
pressure type is designed to monitor the level of water accumulated in the bowl by means of a pressure
sensor provided in the circulation line that returns some of purified oil to the feed liquid inlet. This way of
water detection is called "G-HIDENS system" to differentiate from the detection system with the
electrostatic capacity type Water Detector. The electrostatic capacity type, which is installed in the
purified oil piping of the purifier, is designed to work on the principle that capacitance (dielectric
constant) rises as oil increases in water content.
When the water content of purified oil exceeds an alarm trigger level, the Water Detector issues an
output signal to the automatic control panel for sludge discharge via the Multi-Monitor.
2.5 Starter
The purifier is started by the starter. It is stopped by a signal from the control panel when an automatic
stop alarm has been generated.
2.6 Control panel

The control panel automatically controls the cycle of purifying the feed liquid by purifier and discharging
the sludge. Upon receipt of output signals from various detectors via the Multi-Monitor, the control
panel stops the oil feed, then the purifier after sludge is discharged.
2.7 Alarm panel

The alarm panel changes over the 3-way cylinder valve through switching. When a Multi-Monitor
output signal is received during running, the feeding is stopped.
2.8 Kinds (specifications) of oil purifying system

The purifying system including the oil purifier comes in 5 different types including automatic and manual
types.
Automatic types
GBC-1
(Total discharge type / Automatic control panel with CPU controller panel / 1 unit)
GBC-2
(Total discharge type / Automatic control panel with CPU controller panel / 2 units)
GSH-1
(HIDENS SYSTEM configuration / Total and Partial discharge / Automatic control panel with PLC)
Manual types
GAP-11 Manual discharge / Alarm panel provided
Manual Manual discharge / Alarm panel not provided

2.9 Component devices of different versions
Component devices of automatic and manual types are as follows.
GBC-1 GBC-2 GSH-1 GAP-11 Manual

SJ : Control panel 1:1 2:1 1:1 1:0 1:0
Control panel PLC ○
CPU ○ ○
Alarm panel ○
Operating water Automatic ○ ○ ○
solenoid valve unit Manual ○ ○
Feed valve・3-way solenoid valve ○ ○ ○ ○
Leakage Monitor (LM) ○ ○ ○ ○
Discharge Detector (DD) △ △ ○
Water Detector (WD) ○
NOTE : Options are marked(△)
2.10 Feature of Automatic types

The feature in which the different automatic types shown below.
SELFJECTOR are given different suffix of machine each Automatic type. However the machine
structure are same.
Automatic Feature Suffix of

Machine type
Types
GBC-1 Provided with a 3-way solenoid valve unit for total discharge. G
GBC-2 The sludge discharge process makes a total discharge.
GSH-1 Provided with a 4-way solenoid valve unit for both total GH
discharge and partial discharge.
The sludge discharge process makes a total discharge,
whereas water is discharged in a partial discharge.
In some cases, water is discharged in a total discharge with
sludge, depending on water detection time.
For detailed information on the HIDENS system operation,
refer to Section 3.6.2 Clarifier operation and the separate
"Operation Manual 3C".

3 STRUCTURE of SELFJECTOR
3.1 General
Fig. 3-1 outlines the structure of SELFJECTOR.
Trap Bowl
The power is transmitted from the motor through the
friction clutch to the horizontal shaft and is further Vertical
increased in speed and transmitted to the vertical shaft shaft
through the spiral gear mounted on the horizontal shaft Frame
and pinion on the vertical shaft.
The vertical shaft is supported by upper and lower Motor
bearings.
The bowl mounted on the top of the vertical shaft rotates at
the speed of the vertical shaft.
To supply feed liquid to SELFJECTOR, the suction pump Gear pump
(gear pump) is connected to the horizontal shaft through Horizontal shaft
Friction
the safety joint. To deliver light liquid, the centripetal clutch　 Spiral gear
pump (impeller) is built in the top of bowl.
In addition, heavy liquid is forced out by a similar Fig. 3-1
centripetal pump.
3.2 Drive unit

3.2.1 Vertical shaft section
Vertical shaft
The revolution speed of the horizontal shaft is increased by
the vertical shaft pinion gear and the vertical shaft rotates the Upper bearing parts
bowl mounted on its top. The vertical shaft and bowl are Flat spring
supported by upper springs and leaf springs radially
Upper spring
incorporated at 6 points on the upper bearing section and
lower springs in the lower bearing section so that they can
stably rotate.
Pinion gear
Lower bearing parts
Lower spring
Fig. 3-2

3.2.2 Horizontal shaft section
Spiral gear
Between the motor and horizontal shaft, the
friction clutch is provided. Friction clutch Gear pump
The horizontal shaft is supported by 2 ball Safety joint
bearings built in the bearing housing (3) and
bearing housing (4). Between them, the spiral
gear is mounted. The bearing housings (3) and
(4) are provided with oil seals to avoid gear oil
leakage.
The horizontal shaft is directly coupled with the Oil seal
gear pump by the safety joint. Oil seal Bearing housing (3)
Bearing housing (4)
Fig. 3-3
3.2.3 Brake
By springs, the brake linings are pressed against the outer surface Brake lining
of friction pulley to perform braking.

Friction pulley
Use the brake only when quick stop is absolutely required in
emergency, for repair or checkup. For normal stoppage and not in
Horizontal shaft
emergency, refrain from braking and allow the rotation to stop
OFF
coasting.
ON
Fig. 3-4
3.2.4 Friction clutch
A friction clutch is used for gentle starting and acceleration, thereby
preventing the motor from being overloaded. Friction pulley
The motor shaft has a friction boss provided with a friction clutch and
the horizontal shaft has a friction pulley. After starting, the motor Friction boss
instantly turns at critical speed, the friction clutch lining is pressed
against the internal surface of the friction pulley via centrifugal force and
the power is transmitted to the friction pulley (horizontal shaft side) as
the friction pulley and lining slip with each other.
Normally, the bowl of small-size SELFJECTOR (SJ10G - SJ30G)
reaches its rated speed of rotation in less than 5 minutes, and
middle-size SELFJECTOR (SJ50G - SJ70G) and large-size Friction clutch
SELFJECTOR in less than 10 minutes.
Fig. 3-5

3.3 Bowl
3.3.1 Structure of bowl
The bowl vessel mainly consists of body, hood and nut. The bowl incorporates separation chamber
composed of disc (1) and top disc and distributor, which distributes feed liquid from the bowl inlet to the
separation chamber uniformly.
There is a main cylinder, which slides vertically by water pressure to discharge sludge separated and
accumulated on the inner wall of bowl during operation.
At 2 points on the outer periphery of bowl, there are pilot valve assemblies for controlling the main
cylinder slide.
When feed liquid introduced through the feed liquid inlet through the distributor to the separation
chamber passes through the gap between discs (1), solids and water are separated and purified oil is
continually delivered outside by the centripetal pump (light liquid impeller) located on the top of bowl.
Separated water is continuously discharged outside through the heavy liquid impeller.
Gravity disc
For purifier operation, the interface for separating light liquid and heavy liquid in the bowl must be held
to within a certain range. On SELFJECTOR, gravity discs with different inner diameters are used
according to the gravity of oil to be treated, thereby changing the interface position.
Select an optimum gravity disc according to "Gravity disc selecting procedure" in Operation manual 2.
※：For the HIDENS specification, being for clarifier operation, requires no change of gravity discs.
Dirty oil inlet
Purified oil outlet

Separated water outlet
Gravity disc
Heavy liquid chamber
Distributor
Light liquid chamber
Disc (1)
Bowl hood
Top disc Bowl nut
Bowl body
Sludge
Main cylinder
Pilot valve
Assembly
Water supplying device
Fig. 3-6

3.3.2 Discharge mechanism
Total discharge is as follows.
Main cylinder ⅰ Purifying operation process

Main seal ring
A centrifugal force acting on the pilot valve seals the
valve seat and the water pressure chamber for closing
bowl is filled with operating water. The operating water
pressure pushes up the main cylinder to seal the main
seal ring for purifying operation.
Operating water for closing bowl is intermittently
introduced into the bowl closing water pressure chamber
for a given period of time during purifier operation. In the
Valve sheet
water pressure chamber, the centrifugally generated
pressure of water that turns with the bowl is balanced with
Pilot valve
the supplied water pressure told the water surface at a
Water pressure chamber
for closing bowl certain level.
Fig. 3-7
ⅱ Opening bowl process

Operating water for opening bowl is fed for a certain time to
the water pressure chamber for opening bowl. It partly
goes out through the drain nozzle. More operating water
for opening bowl is supplied and fills up the water pressure
chamber for opening bowl. As its pressure slides the pilot
valve toward the shaft center, the seal of valve seat breaks
Water pressure chamber and operating water for closing bowl flows out from the
for operating bowl
bowl.
Operating water for
operating bowl
Fig. 3-8

ⅲ Sludge discharging process
When operating water for closing bowl goes out, there is
no more force of pushing up the main cylinder that, then,
is pushed down by the pressure in the bowl. The seal of
main seal ring breaks and sludge is instantly discharged
outside the bowl.
Operating water for

operating bowl
Fig. 3-9
ⅳ Closing bowl process

After the sludge discharge, operating water for closing
bowl is fed to the water pressure chamber for closing
bowl and, when it is filled up, the main cylinder is pushed
up to seal the main seal ring.
Operating water for

closing bowl
Fig. 3-10
NOTE
In the HIDENS system specification, partial discharge is effected to let out water accumulated in
the bowl, which is basically the same as the total discharge mode, except that the main cylinder
opening duration is shorter.

3.4 Water supplying device
The water supplying device is provided under the bowl to supply operating water for controlling the
discharge of sludge from the bowl to each water pressure chamber (for opening bowl, for closing bowl).
Operating water for opening bowl is fed from section An in

Fig. 3-11 and enters the water pressure chamber for opening bowl.
Operating water for closing bowl is fed from section B and enters the water pressure chamber for
closing bowl.
Operating water for closing bowl is intermittently fed for a certain time during the purifying running.
Because operating water in the water pressure chamber for closing bowl rotates together with the bowl,
the pressure generated its centrifugal force and the pressure of operating water for closing bowl balance
and the water level stabilizes at a certain position.
NOTE
Operating water for closing bowl : Water for pushing up the main cylinder and closing
the sludge outlet.
Operating water for opening bowl : Water for lowering the main cylinder and
discharging sludge.
Water pressure
chamber for closing bowl
Water supplying device
Water pressure
chamber for opening bowl
Bowl
Vertical
shaft
B A
Fig. 3-11

3.5 Centripetal pump
Two spiral impellers are built in the bowl top to force out light and heavy liquids from the machine. The
impeller consists of a disc of a certain thickness provided in its interior with spiral grooves. It is dipped in
oil that rotates together with the bowl and oil is let out according to the grooves resorting to its own
rotation.
Fig. 3-12

3.6 Purifier operation and clarifier operation
3.6.1 Purifier operation
The purifier operation refers to a separation into 3 phases or oil, water and sludge. It is most
commonly employed.
1. The high limit of specific gravity of oil to treat is 0.991 (at 15℃) practically.
2. For normal operation, the interface must be set to within a specified range by changing the
diameter of gravity disc.
3. Before introducing oil, water sealing is required so that oil fill not flow out through the heavy liquid
outlet.
4. The purifier has a heavy liquid outlet for continually discharging separated water.
Fig. 3-13 is the cross sectional view of the bowl of SELFJECTOR (SJ-G series) under purifier operation.
Feed liquid is introduced from the feed liquid inlet into the separation zone by way of the distributor.
While separated heavy liquid (water) and solids go to the outer periphery of the bowl, light liquid moves
inside through between the discs and is forced out by the light liquid impeller. Heavy liquid passes
outside the top disc and flows over the gravity disc to be discharged by the heavy liquid impeller.
Sealing water inlet

Feed liquid(dirty oil) inlet
Light liquid(purified oil) outlet
Heavy liquid(water) outlet
Gravity disc Light liquid chamber
Distributor Disc
Top disc
Interface
Discharge hole
Fig. 3-13

3.6.2 Clarifier operation
The clarifier operation refers to a separation into 2 phases or oil and (water + sludge).
1. If the specific gravity of oil to be treated exceeds 0.991 (at 15℃) , clarifier operation with the G-
HIDENS series machine is recommended.
2. The G-HIDENS series machines ensure stable clarifier operation for fuel oils up to 1.01 (at 15℃) in
gravity.
3. Irrespective of gravity, the G-HIDENS series machines accept oils for treatment without adjustment
with the gravity disc.
4. The G-HIDENS series machines require no water sealing.
5. In the setup for clarifier operation, there is no heavy liquid outlet for letting separated water out of
the machine so that separated water cannot be continuously discharged.
The G-HIDENS system is designed to detect the accumulation of separated water at a predetermined
level by means of a presser sensor installed in the circulation line and discharge it out of the bowl. It
combines the feature of the clarifier which is leakage-free operation and that of the purifier which is the
capability of water separation.
Fig. 3-14 shows the cross sectional view of the bowl of a typical G-HIDENS system SELFJECTOR
(SJ-GH series) in clarifier operation.
Feed liquid is introduced from the feed liquid inlet into the separation zone by way of the distributor.
While separated heavy liquid (water) and solids go to the outer periphery in the bowl, light liquid moves
inside through between the discs and is discharged by means of the light liquid impeller. Some of light
liquid passes outside the top disc and is returned to the feed liquid port via circulation line by means of
the heavy liquid impeller. To make this take place, pressure (0.1 MPa) is built in the circulation line
through back pressure valve. Upon arrival of accumulated water in the bowl at the top disc outside level,
the circulation of light liquid is stopped with an ensuing drop in circulation line pressure. This pressure
drop (the sign of maximum water accumulation in the bowl) is detected by a pressure sensor, a sensor
output is transmitted to the Multi-Monitor and accumulated water is released from the bowl as a result.
While water is normally discharged in the partial discharge mode, total discharge with sludge can take
place, depending on the time spent for water detection.
　Circulation
(some of purified oil is circulated) ×　Circulation stop
Back pressure valve

Open 0.1 Close 0.1
0 0.2 0 0.2

Pressure sensor
Circulation line Light liquid chamber
Gravity disc Disc

Separated water arrives
Distributor Top disc
at top disc outside level
Discharge
hole
Fig. 3-14

3.7 Parallel operation and series operation
So long as the feed rate is within the actual capacity, 1 stage of purification suffices basically.
When, however, treating oil for which catalyst mixture, excessive sludge, etc. are expected, raising the
purifying effect is required utilizing spare machine(s).
In this case, the purifiers are subjected to either:

Parallel (parallel purifying) operation
Series (series purifying) operation.
When operating several machines as shown above, the parallel operation is preferable to, for its better
separating effect than, the series operation.

3.7.1 Parallel operation
For parallel operation, 2 or more SELFJECTORs are arranged in parallel.

Fig. 3-15 exemplifies piping for parallel operation.
NOTE
In the case of parallel operation with two units of SELFJECTOR, the two machines share oil feed
to the whole system half and half between them. Select the sizes of piping, with flow velocity
and pipe resistance taken into account, so that pipes one size larger in bore diameter are used
upstream of the inlet line branching point and downstream of the return and outlet line meeting
point, for example.
Fig. 3-15

3.7.2 Series operation
! CAUTION
In case of a series operation by 2 SELFJECTORs, detach the gear pump furnished with the
latter stage SELFJECTOR from the safety joint because it is not used.
Do not use the oil heater for the latter stage.
For a series operation, the former stage is for purifier operation and the latter stage is for clarifier
operation usually.
In case of a series operation by 2 machines, a general practice is purifier operation for the former
stage and clarifier operation for the latter stage.
The feed rate must be the same as for a single operation.
Fig. 3-16 exemplifies piping for a series operation.
NOTE
In the series operation, when the first-stage SELFJECTOR enters into the discharge process, oil
feed to the second-stage SELFJECTOR does not take place (as is the case with stop by an alarm
signal) in the meantime. The second-stage SELFJECTOR, therefore, requires an interlock
system to prevent the Multi-Monitor from issuing a false Leak Monitor output signal. (For general
description and working principle of the Leak Monitor, refer to Section 6.2.)
Feed liquid tank Purified oil outlet
Feed liquid tank
OILHEATER
Feed liquid tank
Fig. 3-16

4 Motor, starter and control panel
4.1 Motor
The following concerns specifications of class B insulated three-phase squirrel cage type induction
motor. If the motor output requirement is less than 3.7 kW, the specifications will be those of class E
insulated three-phase squirrel cage type induction motor.
4.1.1 Precautions in handling
! CAUTION:
Operation in explosive atmosphere is not allowed. Otherwise, injury, fire,

etc. might be caused.
Turn off power before operation. Otherwise, electric shock, etc. might
occur.
Connect the power cable according to the connection diagram.
Do not force to bend or pull the power cable or leads.
Do not introduce fingers or objects into openings of the motor.
While running, do not touch the motor which may be considerably hot.
4.1.2 Motor characteristics

4.1.2.1 Starting characteristics
The motor power is transmitted via the friction clutch to the horizontal shaft so as to mitigate the starting
load. When the motor is started, it immediately reaches near the rated speed, gradually accelerating
the bowl via friction clutch. During this while, the rated motor power is exceeded and, therefore, a
motor enduring an overload is used as given in Table 4 -1.
Table 4 -1
Overload Duration
25% overload 30 min
50% 〃 15 〃
75% 〃 5 〃
100% 〃 1 〃

4.1.2.2 Starting characteristics curves
Fig. 4-1 exemplifies starting characteristics curves.
Revolution
Electric
current
speed
(min -1) (A)

Characteristic curve at start-up
8000---40 SJ50G(7.5KW 4P 440V 60Hz)
7000---35 Revolution speed of bowl
6000---30
5000---25
4000---20
3000---15 Rated electric current(12.7A)

Electric current
2000---10
Stop of feeding
Completion of
Revolution
Start of
feeding
Discharge
start-up
1000----5 speed of motor
0 5 10 15 20 Time (min)
Fig. 4-1

4.1.2.3 Output and speed of revolution
If the speed of revolution drops, the treating capacity of SELFJECTOR lowers. If the speed is higher
than rated, the safety is compromised. Table 4 -2 gives motor output and speed for different models.
Table 4 -2
Designation *1 Rated output (kW) Poles Rotation speed（min-1）
G GH 50Hz 60Hz
SJ10G / GH 3.7 5.5
SJ20G / GH
5.5 7.5
SJ30G / GH
SJ50G / GH 7.5
Approx. Approx.
SJ60G / GH 11 4
11 1500 1800
SJ70G / GH
SJ100G / GH
15
SJ120G / GH 18.5
SJ150G / GH 18.5
NOTE1 : G type is standard machine, GH type is G-HIDENS machine.
4.1.2.4 Other specifications of motor

Continuous rating
Insulation: Class E(3.7kW), Class B(5.5kW over)
Ambient the: 50℃ max.
Allowable voltage fluctuation: 10% of rated voltage
4.1.3 Motor structure View of Load Side

Counter Load Side Load Side Direct of Rotation
4.1.3.1 Type
Flange-mounted horizontal shaft totally enclosed fan-cooled
type (indoor type)
Turning direction: Counterclockwise as viewed of load (CCW)
4.1.3.2 Structure of wire lead-in

When used on ships, the structure must conform to JIS F8801
"Marine watertight cable glands (for box)" (water-proof glands). Fig. 4-2
4.1.4 Rated current intensity

Table 4 -3 gives rated current intensities of standard motors in case of 60Hz.
Table 4 -3 （Unit：A）
Rating 3.7kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW
Voltage 440V 6.48 9.25 12.7 18.5 25.0 31.0
220V 12.9 18.5 25.3 37.0 49.0 61.0

4.2 Starter
On the starter panel, there are "push-button" for starting the purifier motor, "indicator lamp" and
"ammeter". It incorporates "overload relay (thermal relay)".
! CAUTION
Do not put combustible things nearby. Otherwise, a fire might occur.

Before proceeding to wiring, make sure power is turned off.
Only a specialized electrician is allowed to conduct wiring.
Using grounding terminals in the starter panel and out, ground the starter
to the hull to make it electrically effective. (Be sure to ground.)
Make sure the rated voltage and frequency of the starter panel match the
source voltage and frequency.
4.2.2 Starter structure

Made of steel sheet, drip-proof, wall-mounted type
External wire introduction: Coaming
4.2.3 Overload relay (thermal relay)

Resetting : Manual
Operation characteristics : Time limit characteristics
Current setting : See Table 4 -3
Ｓ　Ｎ　Ｐ
Ａ２
ＭＣＢ
Ｎ　Ｐ
Fig. 4-3

4.2.4 Connection of Starter
Reference to Fig. 4-4 (Internal connection in the SELFJACTOR ‘s starter at AC440V.)
ＭＣＢ
８８
ＲＵ
ＰＯＷＥＲ５１
ＳＯＵＲＣＥ ※１
ＳＡ　　　　　　Ｖ
ＴＷ
ＢＥＬＯＷ　ＡＭＭＥＴＥＲ
ＣＩＲＣＵＩＴ　ＩＳ　ＡＰＰＬＩＥＤ
ＯＶＥＲ　１１ＫＷ　ＭＯＴＯＲＦ１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｆ２　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
（３０）（３１）
２４Ｖ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
０Ｖ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
１００Ｖ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ａ
（３２）（３３）（３４）
Ｊ１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｊ２　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｆ３　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｆ４　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
（３５）
ＡＣ２４Ｖ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｆ５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｊ７　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
ＷＬ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
８８Ｘ
ＧＬ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
※２
３－８８　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
５１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｊ３　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　３－５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｊ４　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｊ５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
８８　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｍ１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｍ５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
（３６）（３７）（３８）Ｘ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
８８　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
８８Ｘ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｊ６　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
（３９）
８８　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
ａ　
ｂ　ＪＰ１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
ｃ　
ＪＰ２　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
８８Ｘ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
　３－５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　ＮＯＴＩＣＥ：Ｐｌｕｇ　ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎ
８８Ｘ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
：Ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ　ｆｏｒ　ｉｎｔｅｒｎａｌ　
ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎ
：Ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ　ｆｏｒ　ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ　
ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎ
ＰＲ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
ＰＣ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
ＰＡ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｍ１１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｍ１２　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｍ６　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
Ｍ１０　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
※２
Ｔｏ　Ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　Ｐａｎｅｌ　ｏｒ　Ａｌａｒｍ　Ｐａｎel
（Ｉｎ　ｃａｓｅ　ｏｆ　ｍａｎｕａｌ　ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ．ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎ
ｉｓ　ｎｏｔ　ｒｅｑｕｉｒｅｄ．）
Ｔｏ　Ｃｕｓｔｏｍｅｒ’ｓ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　Ｃｏｎｓｏｌｅ
Fig. 4-4
NOTE: 1) Terminal No. PR,PC and PA are connected to control panel.

2) Terminal No. M11,M12,M1,M5,M6 and M10 are connected to control panel or alarm
panel. (In case of manual type, Not need connection.)

4.3 Control panel
The control panel repeatedly and automatically performs SELFJECTOR operating steps shown in Table
4 -4.
It also receives alarm signals from detectors and, after due processing according to particular alarms,
stops the purifier.
The control panel comes in different types given in Table 4 -4.
Close bowl
Sealing water
Alarm
Purifying operation To stop the purifier
Replacement water
Discharge sludge Table 4 -4
Control type
GBC-1 CPU For 1 purifier
Fig. 4-5 GBC-2 For 2 purifiers
PLC For 1 purifier
(programmable HIDENS configuration
GSH-1A
logic controller) (total and partial
discharge)
! CAUTION
Do not put combustible things nearby. Otherwise, a fire might occur.

Before proceeding to wiring, make sure power is turned off.
Only a specialized electrician is allowed to conduct wiring.
Connect the ground terminal of the control panel to an electrically effective
point on the hull. (Perform grounding.)
Make sure the rated voltage and frequency of the control panel match the
source voltage and frequency.

4.3.2 Control panel (model GBC-1)
The front panel configuration and the functions of the control elements of the automatic panel are
described below.
1
5
10 2
6 3 4 7 9
電源
CONT.
SOURCE
切入
OFF ON
Fig. 4-6
(1) "CONT. SOURCE LAMP"

The green pilot lamp (LED) lights when the power is supplied to the automatic control panel.
(2) "POWER SWITCH"

The power switch for the automatic control panel
(3) "AUTO. START"

The automatic running start switch. The green pilot lamp (LED) stays ON during automatic
running.

(4) "AUTO. STOP"
When this button is pressed during automatic running, the SELFJECTOR automatically shuts
down after completion of the process to discharge sludge.
(5) "ALARM"
When any alarm occurs during operation, the red pilot lamp (LED) comes on. The type of alarm
that has occurred can be identified by LEDs on the control unit in the panel.
(6) "ALARM RESET"

When an alarm occurs, the pilot lamp is lighted and kept ON. To put out the pilot lamp, press
this button.
(7) "DISCHG. TEST"

When this button is pressed during automatic running, sludge is forced out.
(8) "EMERG. STOP"

When this button is pressed, all the valves close and the SELFJECTOR shuts down immediately.
No sludge discharge takes place.
(9) "MM FUNC."

This switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the control panel to the
Multi-Monitor.
When the "MM ON" green pilot lamp (LED) is off, feeding signal is not outputted from the control
panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding. Whenever it pushes this
button, the "MM ON" green pilot lamp (LED) repeats lighting and putting out lights.
(10) "GRAPHIC PANEL"

On the graphic panel, the running status of SELFJECTOR, operational status of operating water
solenoid valves (SV1 ~ 3) and 3-way solenoid valve (SV4) and alarm signals can be identified
through corresponding LEDs.
SV1～4 ：Green
Alarm（LEAK、NO-DIS）：Red

4.3.3 Control panel (model GBC-2)
described below.
1 Operation Panel for No.1 SELFJECTOR

Operation Panel for No.2 SELFJECTOR
8
10
6 5 3 4 7 9 2
電源
No.1 SELFJECTOR CONT.
No.2 SELFJECTOR SOURCE
Monitor indication LED 切入

OFF ON
Fig. 4-7

The green pilot lamp (LED) lights when the power is supplied to the automatic control panel.
(2) "POWER SWITCH"

(3) "AUTO. START"

The automatic running start switch. The green pilot lamp (LED) stays ON during automatic
running.

(4) "AUTO. STOP"
When this button is pressed during automatic running, the SELFJECTOR automatically shuts
down after completion of the process to discharge sludge.
(5) "ALARM"
When any alarm occurs during operation, the red pilot lamp (LED) comes on. The type of alarm
that has occurred can be identified by LEDs on the control unit in the panel.
(6) "ALARM RESET"

When an alarm occurs, the pilot lamp is lighted and kept ON. To put out the pilot lamp, press
this button.
Pressing this button selects monitor between No.1 SELFJECTOR and No.2 SELFJECTOR
displayed on the graphic panel.
(7) "DISCHG. TEST"

(8) "EMERG. STOP"

(9) "MM FUNC."

This switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the control panel to the
Multi-Monitor.
When the "MM ON" green pilot lamp (LED) is off, feeding signal is not outputted from the control
panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding. Whenever it pushes this
button, the "MM ON" green pilot lamp (LED) repeats lighting and putting out lights.
(10) "GRAPHIC PANEL"

On the graphic panel, the running status of SELFJECTOR, operational status of operating water
solenoid valves (SV1 ~ 3) and 3-way solenoid valve (SV4) and alarm signals can be identified
through corresponding LEDs.
SELFJECTOR monitor select：Green

SV1～4 ：Green
Alarm（LEAK、NO-DIS）：Red

4.3.4 Control panel （model GSH-1）
The front panel configuration and functions of the automatic control panel are shown below.
8 3
2
切入
OFF ON
MM機能スイッチ警報リセット自動運転制御電源

MM FUNCTION ALARM RESET AUTO. CONT.
SWITCH RUNNING SOURCE
切入
OFF ON
7 非常停止排出テスト
自動停止制御電源
EMERG. DISCHG.
AUTO. CONT.
STOP TEST
STOP SOURCE
6 4
Fig. 4-8

Lights when power is supplied to the automatic control panel.
(2) "POWER SWITCH"

Turns on/off the power for the automatic control panel.

(3) "AUTO. RUNNING"
The pushbutton is a switch for starting automatic operation. The built-in pilot lamp will stay ON
during automatic operation.
(4) "AUTO. STOP"

When this pushbutton is pressed during automatic operation, the SELFJECTOR will stop
automatically after discharging sludge.
(5) "ALARM RESET"

When any alarm occurs during operation, the built-in pilot lamp will come on. The type of alarm
that has occurred can be known from the data display on the front panel.
When the pushbutton is pressed, the sustained alarm will be reset.
(6) "DISCHG. TEST"

When this pushbutton is pressed during automatic operation, the SELFJECTOR is forced to
discharge sludge.
(7) "EMERG. STOP"

When this pushbutton is pressed, all the valves will immediately close, and the SELFJECTOR will
stop.
(8) "MM FUNCTION SWITCH"

This selector switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the control panel to the
Multi-Monitor.
When the "MM FUNCTION SWITCH" is off position, feeding signal is not outputted from the
control panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding.
(9) "OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL"

The operation display panel displays input and output data, ON/OFF status of input and output
signals and kinds of alarm signals. Also, it is possible to enter and alter various set values on the
graphic panel.

4.3.5 Alarm panel （GAP-11）
3
1
5
4
2
6 異常流出通液電源
OIL FEEDING SOURCE
LEAKAGE
切入 8
OFF ON
7
通液停止通液電源
STOP FEEDING SOURCE
FEEDING
切入
OFF ON
MM 機能警報
スイッチリセット
MM FUNCTION ALARM
SWITCH RESET
Fig. 4-9

(1) "SOURCE LAMP"
Lights when the alarm panel is turned on.
(2) "POWER SWITCH"

Power switch for the alarm panel.
(3) "FEEDING LAMP"

Pressing the "FEEDING" button while running lights the indicator lamp.
(4) "FEEDING"
Pressing the button while running changes over the 3-way cylinder valve to feed liquid to
SELFJECTOR.
(5) "OIL LEAKAGE LAMP"

When the Multi-Monitor has its Leakage Monitor actuated by a leakage detected during running, the
indicator lamp is lit.
(6) "STOP FEEDING"

Pressing the button while running changes over the 3-way cylinder valve to allow feed liquid to
bypass SELFJECTOR.
(7) "ALARM RESET"

When the Multi-Monitor has its Leakage Monitor actuated during running, the alarm circuit is caused
to hold with the OIL LEAKAGE lamp lit.

This selector switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the alarm panel to the
Multi-Monitor.
When the "MM FUNCTION SWITCH" is off position, feeding signal is not outputted from the alarm
panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding.

4.4 Control Unit（GBC-1, GBC-2）
GBC-1 and GBC-2 incorporate Control Unit which performs a sequence control. Logics required for
purifier operation are factory inputted but some timers must be set to match your particular:
SELFJECTOR designation
Feed liquid type
For timer setting, refer to "Setting the control panel timers" in Operation manual 2.
Here, the description outline of Control Unit and Terminal Unit.

4.4.1 Control Unit
The control unit is a controller with a built-in logic for automatic operation of the SELFJECTOR. The
control unit also contains the timer function.
NO.1 NO.2
Alarm Indicating Alarm
警報
LEDs 表示LED
Indicating
ALARM ALARM LEDs
NO.1 OPTION NO.1 NO.1 OPTION NO.1 NO.2 OPTION
LEAK NDIS HTMP LTMP VIBR LEAK NDIS HTMP LTMP VIBR
NO.2
Optional
SET.MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 Optional Function オプション
SET.MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 No.1 SEL. Function
機能選択
Selector Switches
MODE
MIN. MIN. スイッチ
Selector
MODE
SEC. SEC.
Switches
MON.MODE MON.MODE No.2 SEL.
789 45 6 45 6 789
Timer indication/ 45 6 45 6
23456
AB E
タイマ
Timer
23
23
2 3456
AB DE
78
78
CD
23
23
78
78
C
9 01 9 01
Setting Parts
F01
表示設定部
F01 9 01 9 01
T.SEL 101(102) 100(101) MW T.SEL 101(102) 100(101) MW Indication/

T.SET T.SET
Setting Parts
CN4 CN4 CN5

NO.1 Connector Terminal NO.2 Connector Terminal
Connector Terminal
CN1
CN1
Power Terminal
Power
Terminal
GBC-1 GBC-2
Fig. 4-10 Fig. 4-11
Name Symbol
Timer Indication / LEDs and switchs which indicate the elapsed or set
Setting Parts time of the timer.
Alarm Indication ALARM When an alarm occurs in the SELFJECTORs, the
LEDs associated LED comes on.
Optional Function NO. 1 OPTION When the optional detector is to be used, set the
Selector Switches (No.2 OPTION) switch to ON to enable the optional function.
Power Terminal CN1 5V and 24V power supplies are connected.
Connector CH4(CN5) Connected to the terminal unit.
Terminal

4.4.2 Terminal Unit
The terminal unit inputs and outputs signals from/to external devices. GBC-1 one unit provided, in case
of GBC-2. Two units, one for the No. 1 machine, and one for the No. 2 machine, are provided. The
terminal unit is connected to the control unit through a connector.
Power Fuse Auxiliary Relay Switch Connector Input Indication
SV2 VS DD LT 7SJ
SV1 LM MTR HT C-OP LM-I
SV4 VSR DISP LT-B ALM

SV3 FED MSTP HT-B AL-C S-OP
External Line Terminal Output Indication
Fig. 4-12
Name Function
Input Indication LEDs Indicate the input status of signals. They come on when the corresponding front panel
pushbuttons are turned ON or when ON signals are issued from the corresponding detectors.
Output Indication LEDs Indicate the output status of signals. They come on when “ON” signals are output to the
lamps on the front panel of the control unit, when “Open” signals are output to the solenoid
valves, and when command signals are output to the detectors, respectively.
Auxiliary Relays Cause the lamps on the front panel of the control unit to illuminate, the solenoid valves to
open, or output signals to the individual detectors to be issued. The auxiliary relays are of
the socket type. When any of the auxiliary relays fails, it can be replaced independently.
Fuse Blows when an over-current flows to open or close the solenoid valve.
Power Terminal The power supply for opening the solenoid valve and the power supplies for the individual
detectors are connected
Connector Terminal Connected to the control unit.
External Line Terminal Used to connect external lines.
Switches (SSW1, Used for switchover of starter stop output and alarm cancel signal output contacts Break and
SSW2) Make. *1. Do not change the settings done at the time of shipment from the factory.
Upper side of switch: Break Contact Lower side of switch: Make Contact
*1. For switchover of contacts Break and Make, the internal wiring in the control panel and emergency
switch contacts must also be changed. Therefore, you cannot change over contacts Break and
Make after shipment from the factory.

5 Programmable logic controller（PLC）
5.1 Programmable Controller
The automatic GSH-1 configuration incorporates a programmable logic controller (PLC) for
sequence control.
The programmable controller contains the logic for automatic operation of the purifier.
It is a flexible controller whose programs can be rewritten from an external tool.
The programmable controller contains the functions for inputting and outputting signals from/to the
external devices, and the timer functions.
5.2 Programmable Controller Configuration

The programmable controller consists of the following devices. (For details, refer to Section
5.3 .)
The CPU board and expansion board are mounted in the automatic control panel, whereas the
operation display panel is mounted on the front of the automatic control panel.
5.2.1 CPU Board

The CPU board is a device which outputs and inputs signals to and from external devices.
The following signals are connected to the CPU board.
[Input Signals]
From Multi-Monitor
o Oil leakage signal (LM)
o No-discharge signal (DD)
o Water detection signal (WD)
From automatic control panel
o ON signal of each pushbutton on front of control panel
[Output Signals]
o Discharge signal, feeding signal, etc. to Multi-Monitor
o OPEN/CLOSE signals to solenoid valves
o ON signal to front panel pilot lamps
o STOP signal to motor starter, alarm signal to console, etc.
5.2.2 Operation Display Panel

The operation display panel is a device for changing the timer and counter settings of the
programmable controller and indicating SELFJECTOR alarms. It is connected to the CPU
board by a communications cable.
The timers and counters must be set to different values, depending on:
o Model number of SELFJECTOR,

o Type of feed oil,
o Operating water pressure and sealing water pressure.
It is therefore necessary that the settings are changed to match the operating condition.

5.2.3 Expansion Board (Option for Indication of Water Content)
The expansion board is a device for displaying the water content value measured by the
electrostatic capacity type water detector (option) on the operation display panel.
Normally the board is not mounted.
5.3 Functions of Individual Parts of Programmable Controller

5.3.1 CPU Board
Screw x 4 Connector terminal

ビス×4 コネクタ端子
入力表示LED
ツールポート
Tool port Input display LED
CN1
CN2
I1
I4
I5
I6
I7
I0
I2
I3
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
RUN
TERM Operating
CN3 動作状態LEDstatus LED
PWR
RUN
CPU
Communications
port 通信ポート
出力表示LED
Output display LED
Connector
コネクタ端子 terminal
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
Q16
Q17
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Mode selector
モード切替え
switch
CN4
(Normal スイッチ
position:
CPU board
ＣＰＵ基板
TERM) （通常：TERM側）
拡張基板
Expansion board
（オプション）
(Option)
Fig. 5-1 Outside View of CPU Board

5.3.2 Functions of Individual Parts of CPU Board
Name Symbol Description

Operating Status LED PWR Comes on when the power supply is turned on.
RUN Stays ON during operation.
When it is OFF, temporarily set the mode switch (SW1) to RUN,
and then to TERM again to light the LED.
CPU Comes on when an error occurs in the CPU.
Input Display LED I0-I17 The LEDs indicate the input status of signals.
When a pushbutton on the front panel is set to ON or the
Multi-Monitor is caused to be ON signals, the associated LED
lights.
Output Display LED Q0-Q17 The LEDs indicate the output status of signals.
When a pilot lamp on the front panel is lit, or a solenoid valve is
opened or closed, or a detector signal is output, the associated
LED lights.
Mode Switch SW1 Normally set to TERM.
When the switch is set to RUN, the timer settings cannot be
changed.
Tool Port CN3 The operation display panel is connected to the port.
To rewrite the program, connect a dedicated tool to the port.
Communications Port CN2 Not used
Connector Terminal CN1 The flat cable for input signals is connected to the terminal.
CN2 The flat cable for output signals is connected to the terminal.
NOTE： To replace the CPU board, disconnect the connector and loosen the four screws to
remove the board.

5.3.3 Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs
For the input and output display LED Nos. and functions, refer to the following table.
Table 5-1 Detailed Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs
Name LED No. Description

Input Display LED I0 Lights when Leakage signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.
I1 Lights when No-discharge signal is inputted the Multi-Monitor.
I2 Lights when Water Detection signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7 Stays ON during operation of motor of SELFJECTOR.
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
Output Display LED Q0 Lights when bowl opening water solenoid valve (SV1) is energized.
Q1 Lights when bowl closing water solenoid valve (SV2) is energized.
Q2 Lights when sealing water/replacement water solenoid valve (SV3) is
energized.
Q3 Lights when feed valve solenoid valve (SV4) is energized.
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7 Stays ON during automatic operation.
Q10 Q10 / Lights when alarm occurs.
Q11
Q12 Lights when stop signal outputs to starter. *1
Q13 Lights when alarm cancel signal outputs to starter. *1
Q14 Lights when collective alarm signal outputs to console. *2
Q15 Stays ON during feeding process (for Leakage Monitor Function (LM) of
the Multi-Monitor interlocking).
Q16 Stays ON during discharging process (for Discharge Detector Function
(DD) of the Multi-Monitor interlocking).
Q17

NOTE
*1....The starter refers to the separately installed motor starter of the SELFJECTOR.
*2....The console refers to the remote control console.
5.4 Operation Display Panel
Data Display Section

アドレス表示部 (Upper/Lower Stage)
データ表示部（上段／下段）
Address Display Section
SET MAIN
ADDRESS DATA
MAIN
MON OPT
TIM
CNT
REG IN (REG) TIM CNT
MON OUT
- +
ALM M
MITUBISHI KAKOKI KAISHA,LTD.

CLR ENT
モード表示部操作キー
Mode Display Section Control Keys
Fig. 5-2 Outside View of Operation Display Panel

5.4.1 Functions of Individual Sections of Operation Display Panel

Address Display Section ADDRESS Displays the number of the timers/counters or input/output
signals whose data is displayed in the data display section.
Data Display Section DATA Displays the data (timer setting time/time elapsed, etc.) for
the item indicated on the address display section or mode
display section.
Mode Display Section MAIN Lights when an ordinary operation data (main screen) is
displayed. When the MAIN is ON, the upper stage of the
data display section indicates the elapsed time of the
discharge interval timer (CO15). (Unit: Minutes)
The lower stage indicates a water content value. (Option)
TIM Lights when the set time/elapsed time of the timer are
displayed or the setting is changed. When the TIM is ON,
the set time is displayed in the upper stage of the data
display section, and the elapsed time displayed in the lower
stage.
CNT Lights when the set time/elapsed time of the timer (counter)
is displayed or the setting is changed. When the CNT is
ON, the set time is displayed in the upper stage of the data
display section.
The lower stage displays the elapsed time.
REG Lights when the internal memory data of the programmable
controller is displayed. (Normally not used)
MON Lights when input/output signals are monitored. When the
MON is ON, the ON/OFF status of the input/output signal is
displayed in the data display section.
IN Lights when an input signal is monitored.
OUT Lights when an output signal is monitored.
Lights when an internal signal is monitored. (Normally not
M
used)
ALM Lights when an alarm is displayed.
When the ALM is ON, the alarm number is displayed in the
data display section.

Input Key SET Use this key when there is a need for changing a setting.
MAIN Use this key to have ordinary operation data displayed on the
screen (to display the “main screen”).
MON Use this key when input/output signals are to be monitored
on the screen.
OPT Press OPT then ENT to display the number of the alarm that
occurred last.
← (REG) In the timer/counter setting change mode, use this key to
move the cursor to the left digit.
→TIN CNT Use this key to display the set time/elapsed time of the timer
and counter.
In the timer/counter setting change mode, use the key to
move the cursor to the right digit.
－ Use this key to decrement a setting or an address (number)
by 1.
＋ Use this key to increment a setting or an address (number)
by 1.
CLR Use this key to clear a changed setting.
ENT Use this key to enter a changed setting.

5.4.2 Expansion Board (Option)
入力表示LED
Input display
I20
I21
I22
I23
I24
I25
I26
I27
Q20
Q21
Q22
Q23
Q24
Q25
出力表示LED Q26
Output display Q27
拡張基板 board
Expansion
(Option)
端子台
Terminals
Fig. 5-3 Skiagram of Expansion Board
The expansion board is used for analog inputting of a Water Detector (WD) reading. It is
provided only for a control panel with an optional water display.
The board has signal input and output functions, but the functions are not normally used.

6 Multi-Monitor
6.1 Multi-Monitor
6.1.1 General
The Multi-Monitor forms an integrated detection system with various detectors and data displays.
LED display functions (Flow rate, Temperature, Pressure, Revolution number)
Leakage Monitor function (LM)
Discharge Detector function (DD)
Water Detector function (WD)
Yellow LED Green LED Red LED

Blinking or turn-on Blinking when Turn on when
when light liquid normal revolution abnormal revolution
outlet press. is normal
Indicate flow rate
Indicate treating temp. Revolution signal

Indicate light liquid (proximity switch)
outlet press.
Indicate heavy liquid Oil inlet press. signal
outlet press. (press. sensor)
Indicate horizontal shaft
revolution number Temp. signal
(temp. sensor)
Power (DC24V)
Automatic control panel
Feeding signal
GBC-1, GBC-2, GSH-1 Oil outlet press. signal
Discharging signal
(press. sensor)
or Leakage signal
Alarm panel ( No-Dis. signal) Circulation line press. signal
GAP-11 (Highly water signal) (press. sensor)
(for GSH-1)
Fig. 6-1 Block Diagram of Multi-Monitor

6.1.2 Kind of Multi-Monitor
The Multi-Monitor is available in three types (refer to Table 6-1) for selection according to the type of
automatic system.
Table 6-1
Functions MM-1 MM-2 MM-3

Applied automatic control device GBC-1、GBC-2 GBC-1、GBC-2 GSH-1
Alarm panel : GAP-11 (with DD)
Leakage Monitor Function (LM) ○ ○ ○
Indication of inlet temperature ○ ○ ○
Indication of flow rate ○ ○ ○
Indication of outlet pressure ○ ○ ○
Discharge Detector Function (DD) ― ○ ○
Indication of revolution number ― ○ ○
Water Detector Function (WD) ― ― ○
Communication (RS485) ― ○ ○
Trouble display LED (red)
Rotation display LED (green)

Pressure adjustment LED (yellow)
Pressure adjustment LED (yellow)
Fig. 6-2 Sketch Drawing of MM-1 Fig. 6-3 Sketch Drawing of MM-2, MM-3

6.1.3 Explanation of internal switches on Multi-Monitor
Fig. 6-4 shows an internal view of the Multi-Monitor.
⑪ ⑨ ⑧ ⑦
⑩ 22
⑲
⑮
⑯
⑰
⑱
21 ③
⑬
⑳
OFF ON
⑭
④
⑤
23 ⑫
ON ON
⑥
① OFF OFF ②
Fig. 6-4 Internal Drawing of Multi-Monitor (MM-2, MM-3)
NOTE
In case of the Multi-Monitor-1 (MM-1), switches from number 3 to 12 and 22 are not attached to the
Multi-Monitor. The terminal block (No.23) consists of the board number 1 to 17.

Table 6-2 Designation of Internal Switches on Multi-Monitor
No. Designation No. Designation
1 Power switch 13 Temperature indication adjustment VR
2 LM alarm output switch 14 Flow rate indication adjustment VR
3 DD alarm output switch 15 Function setting switch

SW1: Select of setting item
4 Water detection output switch 16 Function setting switch

SW2: Forward item
5 Temperature alarm output switch 17 Function setting switch

SW3: Backward item
6 Rotation output switch 18 Function setting switch

SW4: Enter
7 1: 50Hz / 60 Hz selector switch 19 Pressure display lock switch

2: Partial ON/OFF selector switch
8 Discharge measurement switch 20 Input signal confirmation LED (Green)
9 Datum sensitivity VR 21 Output signal confirmation LED (Red)
10 Center voltage of discharge quantity setting 22 Partial discharge quantity confirmation LED
switch
11 Discharge quantity setting switch 23 Terminal block
12 Water detection selector dial - -

0:No water detection / 1: Water detection

6.1.4 Identification and Location of Multi-Monitor Sensors
Fig.6-5 shows the identification and location of the Multi-Monitor sensors.
Pressure sensor
for oil outlet
For GSH-1 only
(Yellow)
Pressure sensor
for circulation line
Main parts of (Blue)
Multi-Monitor
Pressure sensor
for oil inlet
(Green)
Temperature sensor
(Black)
Ｒevolution sensor
(Proximity switch)
(GSH-1 and Option)
(White)
Fig. 6-5 Identification and Location of Multi-Monitor Sensors
6.1.5 Routine running

Turn off power of Multi-Monitor before SELFJECTOR is left unused for a long time.
After turning on power of Multi-Monitor again, perform at least 10 minutes warm-up so as to stabilize
the internal circuit.
! CAUTION
The Multi-Monitor is a precision instrument. Handle it with utmost attention so as not to give
shock, etc.
Use the Multi-Monitor at ambient temperatures between 0 and 60℃.

6.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)
Pressure adjustment LED (yellow）
6.2.1 General
The Leakage Monitor Function of the Multi-Monitor is a protective
device that detects:
Leakage of treated oil to feed liquid outlet
Leakage of treated oil from bowl's sludge outlet because bowl is
not properly closed
attributable to any reason and notifies it to SELFJECTOR control
panel via the Multi-Monitor to minimize the loss of treated oil.
Multi-Monitor（ＭＭ）
6.2.2 Operating principle

The pressure sensor installed on the light liquid outlet connecting
piping of SELFJECTOR monitors the pressure at all times and if, for
any reason, the pressure has dropped when the flow has decreased
from a normal rate, deems treated oil is out-flowed and outputs an
Cable gland
error signal. Use of a precision pressure sensor allows to detect a
large leakage flowing to the heavy liquid side as well as a slight Fig. 6-6
leakage due to poor bowl opening.
In the normal running, pressure control valve that is arranged on the treated oil outlet piping adjusted so
as to apply a certain pressure. If, on account of accidental leakage of purifier, the pressure has dropped
below an alarm trigger or lower limit level, an alarm is outputted.
Within delay timer setting Within hold timer setting

（Alarm cancel）（Alarm cancel） Hold timer up Hold timer up
Allowable variation Leakage
range ±15%
Actual back pressure

Set back
pressure
△P
Pressure
Alarm trigger level

Lower limit
Pressure change Pressure drop

due to pulsation due to leakage
Drop below lower level
No alarm
Alarm
issued Alarm
issued
Start of feeding
Time
Fig. 6-7
NOTE1
To prevent a false alarm, when actual back pressure, light liquid outlet pressure, falls below the alarm
trigger or lower limit level, the Leakage Monitor will not issue a "Leakage" signal until after a certain period
of time. The alarm trigger pressure is averaged by the CPU in the Multi-Monitor to follow with actual back
pressure that is fluctuated by pressure pulsation at the light liquid outlet.

Delay Timer
After starting the feed, the light liquid pressure rises gradually. To prevent an alarm from being delivered
during the period where the pressure achieve set pressure, a delay timer is provided.
Hold Timer
As soon as the pressure has dropped below the alarm pressure while feeding, the timer for feeding starts
counting and, if the time is up, delivers an alarm. If the preset pressure level is recovered while counting, the
timer resets itself.
NOTE
Be sure to adjust and set the light liquid side delivery pressure.
（Standard value : 0.15 MPa {1.5 kgf/cm2}）
Since its operating principle is such that this instrument needs a steady pressure independent of
the piping pressure loss downstream from SELFJECTOR for proper detection, adjust the pressure
control valve to maintain the instrument under a necessary level of back pressure during the
operation.
When a light liquid delivery pressure beyond the standard level is required, refer to "Leakage
Monitor (LM) " in the Operation Manual 2.
6.2.3 Connecting with control panel

To avoid erratic alarms, "feeding" signal is inputted from the automatic control panel or alarm panel so that no
alarm could be outputted unless when "feeding".
NOTE
For a manual type, the feeding signal contact is normally closed to simulate feeding. To avoid a
false alarm during sludge discharge, therefore, turn off the "MM Function Switch" on the starter
panel before sludge discharge, then turn it on again after feeding is started.
Feeding
Control Panel
ＧＢＣ-1，ＧＢＣ-2
Alarm ＧＳＨ-1
Multi-Monitor（ＭＭ）ＧＡＰ-11
Fig. 6-8

6.2.4 LED display
1. "Pressure adjustment"（yellow）
The pressure adjustment LED (yellow) flashes when light liquid pressure varies by ±15% or less from the
Multi-Monitor setting and stays illuminated while the variation is less than ±3%.
Adjust the back pressure regulating valve so as to just light the LED when feeding.
(Set the back pressure to the standard setting for light liquid pressure is 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2)).
2. "Leakage display"（red）
When a leakage is detected, the Error LED (red) on the Multi-Monitor panel and Leakage signal output LED
(red) above the boards in the Multi-Monitor are illuminated and an alarm is issued to the control panel at the
same time. The oil purifier is stopped as a result after sludge is discharged.
Specifically, the Leakage LED is lit when:

Pressure fails to reach a constant level before the delay timer is up.
Pressure falls below the alarm trigger or lower limit level and fails to return to a constant level before the
hold timer is up.
For self-diagnosis, in the case of an abnormality with the light liquid sensor described below, the "Light Liquid
Sensor Abnormal" LED (red) in the Multi-Monitor is illuminated, with "Error" and the corresponding error
identification number displayed in the upper and lower seven segment displays, respectively, and an alarm is
issued to the control panel at the same time. The oil purifier is stopped as a result after sludge is discharged.
An extraordinarily high voltage (equivalent to 0.45 MPa {4.5 kgf/cm2}) is detected at the pressure sensor.
Pressure adjustment LED (yellow）
Auxiliary display LED
Flow rate
Confirmation LED ×10
for input signal (green) Temperature
Light liquid pressure
Feeding Rotation
Discharging Revolution number
Circulation flow pressure
Error
Power switch LM alarm output s witch
OFF ON OFF ON
Confirmation LED for output signal (red)
Revolution No-discharge Abnormal temp. Sensor2 error

●Eｒｒｏr LED (red) lighting Leakage Water detection Sensor1 error Sensor3 error
Fig. 6-9
Fig. 6-10
NOTE
When the self-diagnosis function is actuated, the Multi-Monitor holds "Error" and error identification
number in display, which cannot be cleared until power is turned off.
After the cause is identified and eliminated, reset by turning power off, then on.

6.2.5 Routine running ＬＭ alarm output switch
Normally, keep the LM alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor
in the ON position.
OFF ON
ＬＭ alarm OFF ＬＭ alarm ON
Fig. 6-11
NOTE1
The △P(pressure drop) value in regard to the Leakage Monitor function varies in response to the
changing level of actual back pressure. Therefore, it needs no adjustment even if light liquid side
pressure differs from its initial set value unless the deviation exceeds 0.2 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2).
NOTE2
On the method of the back pressure regulating valve, make adjustments correctly in accordance
with appropriate procedures described in " Leakage Monitor Function (LM) " in the Operation
Manual 2.
Wrong setting or adjustment may cause a false leakage alarm.
6.2.6 Items to adjust

Normally, the back pressure regulating valve requires no adjustments after set up at once, except in the
following cases. For the adjusting method, refer to "Leakage Monitor Function (LM)" in the Operation Manual
2.
Adjustment Procedure
Change treating size of Adjust the light liquid pressure to a desired level by
SELFJECTOR pressure control valve.
Change light liquid pressure Change light liquid pressure setting memorized in
the Multi-Monitor.

! CAUTION
When adjusting light liquid outlet side pressure and flow rate or changing values (light liquid pressure,
△P(pressure drop), minimum light liquid pressure level, etc.) preset in the Multi-Monitor, be sure to
refer to section 4. "Multi-Monitor" and section 5. "Operation" in the Operation Manual 2 and follow the
procedures described there. Failure to follow given instructions could result in a false alarm or cause
damage to the machine.
6.2.7 Factory settings (main value)

Delay timer : 40 sec
Hold timer : 15 sec
Set pressure (Set press.) : 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2)
Pressure drop (Δp) : 0.02 MPa (0.2 kgf/cm2)

6.3 Discharge Detector Function (DD)
6.3.1 General
The Discharge Detector Function (DD) of the
Trouble display LED （red）
Multi-Monitor is a protective device that monitors sludge
Rotation display LED （green）
discharge from the SELFJECTOR and sends an alarm
signal to the automatic control panel when it detects an
abnormal discharge.
6.3.2 Operating principle (Alarm function)

The Discharge Detect relies on the rotation speed
change of the horizontal shaft to do the action; when the Multi-Monitor（ＭＭ）
rotation speed falls to a preset level due to sudden loss

of energy by sludge discharge, the Discharge Detector
detects it by means of a proximity switch installed on the
horizontal shaft to determine that sludge discharge has
taken place. Cable gland
Also, the Multi-Monitor tells that the purifier is in
Proximity switch
operation for safety and precaution through the rotation
display LED (green).
In addition, as a self-diagnosis function, the trouble
display LED (red), also on top of the Multi-Monitor, is lit Fig. 6-12
to indicate a troubled purifier when the detector output is
equivalent to 2500 rpm or more or when rotation pulses
skip.
6.3.3 Connecting with control panel

To prevent a false alarm, the Multi-Monitor is fed with "discharging" signal from the automatic control panel
during sludge discharge and issues an alarm signal only during feeding.
Discharging
Control Panel
ＧＢＣ-1，ＧＢＣ-2
Alarm ＧＳＨ-1
Fig. 6-13

6.3.4 LED displays
1. "Rotation display"（green）
Indicates the purifier is rotating and externally notifies safety alarm/caution.
Rotating : Flashing
Standstill: Lighting
2. "Trouble display"（red）
As a self-diagnostic function, the LED lights any of the following cases.
ⅰThe output corresponds to 2500 rpm of speed or higher
(A circuit failure is suspected.)
ⅱThe proximity switch input signal is unstable
(The proximity switch may be out of position.)
Correct its position. This LED goes out as soon as its input signal has been stabilized.
NOTE
The trouble display LED (red) may be transiently illuminated when the purifier is in or out of
operation, which is no indication of the detector being in trouble.
3. "No-Discharge display"（red）
In the state of a "discharging" signal being fed from the automatic control panel, if there is not a predetermined
amount of speed drop in the oil purifier, the Error LED (red) on the Multi-Monitor panel and "No -Discharge"
signal output LED (red) above the boards in the Multi-Monitor are illuminated. At the same time, an alarm is
delivered to the Multi-Monitor and the oil purifier is stopped as a result.

Rotation display LED (green)
Flow rate
Feeding Rotation
Revolution number
Discharging
Error
Power switch
DD alarm output switch
Revolution output switch

OFF ON
OFF ON
Confirmation LED for output signal (red)
Revolution No-discharge Abnormal temp. Sensor2 error

Leakage Water detection Sensor1 error Sensor3 error
●Eｒｒｏr LED (red) lighting
Proximity switch
Fig. 6-14 Fig. 6-15

6.3.5 Routine running
Normally, keep the DD alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor in the ON position.

Normally, the Discharge Detector requires no adjustments. For further information, refer to "Discharge
Detector Function (DD)" in the Operation Manual 2.
! CAUTION
This is a precision instrument. Handle it with utmost attention so as not to give shock, etc.
Securely tighten screws to mount the proximity switch
(to torque 60 kg・cm max.)
Keep the turning shaft stopped when mounting the proximity switch.
Do not use other proximity switches than furnished with the instrument

6.4 Water Detector Function (WD)
6.4.1 General
The Water Detector Function (WD) of the Multi-Monitor is a device to prevent separated water from leaking
into light liquid (purified oil). It is available in two types, i.e., pressure sensor type water detector (GSH-1) and
electrostatic capacity type water detector (option).
Photo 6-1 Pressure sensor type water detection system

( G-HIDENS system )
6.4.2 Pressure sensor type water detector (GSH-1/MM-3)

6.4.2.1 Operating principle
The Water Detection system provided with a pressure sensor, which is called G-HIDENS system, is controlled
on the automatic control panel (GSH-1) via the Multi-Monitor (MM-3).
The G-HIDENS system constantly monitors separated water being accumulated in the bowl by means of a
pressure sensor installed in the circulation line and causes separated water to be discharged before it leaks
into light liquid (purified oil).
In the clarifier operation, some of light liquid (purified oil) is returned to the feed liquid inlet via circulation line.
The circulation line, which is provided with a back pressure valve, pressure sensor and pressure gauge, is
maintained under a required level of back pressure by means of the back pressure valve, with the shut-off
valve in the heavy liquid outlet line fully closed.
Upon arrival of separated water in the bowl at the top disc outside level, the circulation of light liquid is stopped
with an instantaneous drop in circulation line pressure. Detecting this pressure change, the pressure sensor
sends a signal to the control panel via the Multi-Monitor to tell that the predetermined quantity of separated
water has been accumulated in the bowl and separated water is discharged, normally in the partial discharge
mode. In some cases, total charge with sludge takes place, depending on time spent before detection of
pressure drop.

Circulation × Circulation stop
(some of purified oil is circulated)
Back pressure valve
Open 0.1 Close 0.1
0 0.2 0 0.2
Pressure sensor Heavy liquid chamber

Circulation line Light liquid chamber
Gravity disc Disc

Separated water arrives
Distributor Top disc at top disc outside level
Discharge
hole
Fig. 6-16
6.4.2.2 Connecting with control panel

To prevent a false alarm, the Multi-Monitor is fed with "feeding" signal from the automatic control panel and
issues an alarm signal only during feeding.
Feeding
Control Panel
Alarm ＧＳＨ-1
Fig. 6-17

6.4.2.3 LED displays
"Water detection display"（red）
In the state of being fed with "feeding" signal from the automatic control panel, when the pressure sensor in
the G-HIDENS system circulation line detects the arrival of separated water at the predetermine level in the
bowl, the Error LED (red) on the Multi-Monitor panel and the confirmation LED for output signal "Water
Detection" LED (red) above internal boards in the Multi-Monitor are illuminated. At the same time, a signal is
delivered to the control panel and the oil purifier is stopped after sludge discharge.
Also, for self-diagnosis, when an extraordinarily high voltage (equivalent to 0.45MPa {4.5 kgf/cm2}) is detected
at the pressure sensor, the "Water Sensor Abnormal" output LED (red) in the Multi-Monitor is illuminated, with
"Error" and the corresponding error identification number indicated in the upper and lower seven segment
displays, respectively. At the same time, an alarm is issued to the control panel and the oil purifier is stopped
as a result after sludge discharge.
NOTE
To prevent a false alarm due to pressure fluctuation or pulsation at the start of oil feed or during
normal running, the Delay Timer and Hold Timer are provided. Either timer is actuated when
pressure falls below the preset level during running. If pressure fails to return to normal after the
timer is up, the detector recognizes it as a "Water Detected" status and sends an alarm signal to the
control panel.
Flow rate
Feeding Rotation
Revolution number
Discharging
Error
Power switch Water Detection

output switch
OFF ON
OFF ON
No Water / Heavy liquid
Detector Function
Confirmation LED for Water Detector Function
output signal (red) Heavy liquid Detector Function
(for optional use)
●Eｒｒｏr LED (red) lighting Revolution No-discharge Abnormal temp. Sensor2 error
Leakage Water detection Sensor1 error Sensor3 error
Proximity switch
Fig. 6-18 Fig. 6-19
NOTE
When the self-diagnosis function is actuated, the Multi-Monitor holds "Error" and the error
identification number in display, which cannot be cleared until power is turned off. After the cause
is identified and eliminated, reset by turning power off, then on.

6.4.2.4 Routine running
For clarifier operation that needs the Water Detector Function, select "Water Detector Function" on the Water
Detector Function selector dial in the Multi-Monitor. (See Fig. 6-19) For purifier operation that needs no Water
Detector Function, select "No Water / Heavy liquid Detector Function" on the same dial.
No Water/Heavy liquid Water Detector Function Heavy liquid

Detector Function Detector Function
(For optional use)
With the Water Detection output switch (See Fig. 6-19) in the ON position, the Water Detector monitors
water being accumulated in the bowl. When it detects the arrival of water at predetermined level, it sends
an output signal to the control panel and causing water to be discharged.
Normally, clarifier operation is performed with the Water Detection output switch placed in the ON
position.
Water Detection output switch Water Detection output switch

「ＯＦＦ」position 「ＯＮ」position
NOTE
When clarifier operation is switched to the purifier operation, the Water Detector Function selector
dial in the Multi-Monitor setting must be from " Water Detector Function " to " No Water / Heavy
liquid Detector Function " but the position of the Water Detection output switch needs not be
changed to OFF.
6.4.2.5 Items to adjust

Normally, the Water Detector requires no adjustments. For further information, refer to "Water Detector
Function (WD)" in the Operation Manual 2.

6.4.3 Electrostatic capacity type water detector (GSH-1/MM-2)
The electrostatic capacity type water detector relies on difference in dielectric constant between water and oil
to determine the capacitance of oil, thereby detecting the water content of oil.
This detector is installed in the light liquid outlet piping of the SELFJECTOR and controlled on the automatic
control panel (GSH-1).
In the clarifier operation, the detector monitors the water content of light liquid. When a rise of approximately
0.5% occurs in the water content, the detector recognizes it as "water in the bowl having arrived at
predetermined level" and issues an output signal to the control panel. Water is discharged as a result.
6.4.3.1 Connecting with control panel

To prevent a false alarm, the electrostatic capacity type Water Detector is fed with "feeding" signal from the
automatic control panel and issues an alarm signal only during feeding. This detector exchanges signals with
the control panel, not via the Multi-Monitor but directly.
Feeding
Capacitance Control Panel

type
Water Detector Alarm ＧＳＨ-1
Fig. 6-20

6.5 Partial discharge detection function (GSH-1)
The automatic GSH-1 system combined with Multi-Monitor MM-3 has a Partial Discharge Detection Function
that, in addition to sludge discharge monitoring, indicates whether or not sludge discharge is optimal for partial
discharge adjustment.
6.5.1 Operating principle

When the Partial Discharge Detection Function of the Multi-Monitor monitoring the horizontal shaft rotation
speed of the SELFJECTOR detects a rotation speed drop (peak hold) during sludge discharge, it compares
the data with the optimal discharge value preset for each SJ-G model to determine if the quantity of discharge
effected is optimal. And the Multi-monitor indicates the result of comparison through confirmation LEDs
(Over, Just, Under) for partial discharge. (See Fig. 6-22)
Datum sensitivity VR Discharge measurement switch
Dischargr quantity
setting switch
Partial discharge confirmation LED
OVER （LED red）
Center voltage of discharge JUST （LED green）
quantity setting switch
UNDER （LED red）
MEASURING （LED green）
1. 50Hz / 60Hz selector switch

Power switch 2. Partial ON / OFF selector switch

OFF ON
OFF ON
Fig. 6-21
Control / LED Function
Power switch ON/OFF control of Multi-Monitor power
DD alarm output switch ON/OFF control of discharge alarm output

Used to select SELFJECTOR power source frequency
50Hz / 60Hz selector switch
(50Hz or 60Hz).
Used for constant monitoring of sludge discharge to
Partial ON / OFF switch determine optimal or otherwise. The status of sludge
discharge is indicated through partial discharge LEDs.
Measures quantity of sludge discharged only once to
determine if discharge is optimal. Pressing this button
Discharge measurement switch
switch illuminates green LED in it and starts measurement
of sludge discharge (if partial ON/OFF switch is OFF).
Partial OVER (red) Lit when discharge is more than preset.
discharge JUST（green） Lit when discharge is optimal as preset.
confirmation UNDER（red） Lit when discharge is less than preset.
LED MEASURING (green) Lit when discharge measurement switch is pressed.

6.5.2.1 50Hz / 60Hz selector switch
Remove the front cover of the Multi-Monitor and set the switch (See Fig.6-22) to the power frequency of the
SELFJECTOR (50 Hz or 60 Hz).
Setting to 60 Hz Setting to 50 Hz
NOTE
The switch in wrong position prevents the Partial Discharge Detector from measuring the quantity
of sludge being discharged accurately. Be sure that the switch in the right position before discharge
measurement.
6.5.2.2 Measure of the amount of discharge

There are two purposes for which sludge discharge measurement is performed.
1. Monitoring during normal running

Set the partial ON/OFF switch (See Fig. 6-22) to ON. The detector becomes ready to constantly monitor
partial discharge for "No-Discharge" status. Normally, the SELFJECTOR is run with this switch in the ON
position.
2. Partial discharge adjustment / confirmation
Set the partial ON/OFF switch to OFF, then press the discharge measurement switch (See Fig. 6-22).
Measurement is immediately effected - only once.
Partial ON / OFF switch Partial ON / OFF switch

「ＯＮ」position 「ＯＦＦ」position
NOTE
With the partial ON/OFF switch in the ON position, the discharge measurement switch is
inoperative.

6.6 Display Function
6.6.1 General
The Multi-Monitor is provided with two 4-digit seven segment displays (upper and lower) that indicate
SELFJECTOR sensor output data (flow rate, temperature, pressure, rotation number, etc.) and error. Settings
can be altered by use of four function setting switches (SW1 - 4) and altered data are stored in the internal
memory of the Multi-Monitor.
The expansion of
a part of the display
Seven segment displays

Upper
Lower
Fig. 6-22
6.6.2 Configuration of display

In normal operation, the flow rate is incrementally indicated in the upper seven segment display at every 5
seconds. In the lower display, the feed liquid temperature and light liquid pressure are indicated in the
same way.
Using the function setting switches (SW1 - 4), the feed liquid temperature, light liquid pressure and speed
(MM-2 and MM3 only), and circulation line pressure (MM-3 only) can be fixedly indicated in the lower
seven segment display.
In the case of an error, "Error" and the corresponding error identification number appear in the upper and
lower seven segment displays, respectively. (See Table 6-3.)
At the time of setting change, the setting number and set value are indicated in the upper and lower seven
segment displays, respectively.

Function setting switches
SW1：Select of setting item
SW2：Forward item
SW3：Backward item
SW4：Enter
Fig. 6-23
Table 6-3
Normal running Error display Change the setting items

Upper Flow rate Error display Setting number
Lower Inlet temperature Identification number Set value
（ Revolution number ）
（ Circulation line
pressure ）
NOTE
(Speed): Multi-Monitor with Discharge Detector Function
(Circulation line pressure): Multi-Monitor with Water Detector Function (G-HIDENS system specification)
Identificatio Contents of error

n number
1 Light liquid pressure sensor abnormal
2 Water detection pressure sensor abnormal

6.6.3 Factory settings
Memory preset Selection range of

No Setting items MM-1 MM-2 MM-3
item number setting
1 ― Power switch ON / OFF OFF OFF OFF
2 ― LM alarm output switch ON / OFF OFF OFF OFF
3 ― DD alarm output switch ON / OFF ― OFF OFF
4 ― Water Detection output switch ON / OFF ― ― OFF
Partial discharge detection

5 ― ON / OFF ― OFF OFF
function
6 ― Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60Hz
7 1 Kinds of oil FO / LO FO FO FO
10G,20G,30G,
8 2 SELFJECTOR-G model 50G,60G,70G, 10G 10G 10G
100G,120G,150G
10G,20G,30G,
9 3 Gear pump model 10G 10G 10G
50G,70G,100G
Minimum light liquid pressure
10 4 0.03～0.30 0.12 0.12 0.12
(MPa)
LM trigger pressure (△P)
11 5 0.010～0.050 0.02 0.02 0.02
(MPa)
Delay timer
12 6 5～120 40 40 40
(sec)
Hold timer
13 7 5～120 15 15 15
(sec)
Minimum WD pressure
14 10 0.010～0.10 ― ― 0.03
(MPa)
WD trigger pressure (△W)
15 12 0.010～0.10 ― ― 0.05
(MPa)
16 13 0.03～0.30 0.15 0.15 0.15
(MPa)
NOTE
Shown above are shop-set default values.
At test operation, it is necessary to adjust the settings according to the specification/model of
SELFJECTOR.
For set values, refer to "Multi-Monitor" in the Operation Manual 2.

MITSUBISHI
SELFJECTOR
GENIUS -SERIES
Instruction Manual
Operation Manual 2
for English

IMPORTANCE


! WARNING
SELFJECTOR).

The present manual is Part 3 "Operation manual2".


Intended
Part

①②③④
1 Outline of fitting-out aboard Information for transportation, handling and storage of the
machine
O O
O
Multi-Monitor
O
O
NOTE
The Part 4 manuals (Operation Manuals 3A & 3B) deal with the following types of the automatic control

Contents (1 / 3)
1 Precautions in safety ............................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Symbols related to safety .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Labels for safety........................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Safety precautions .................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Definition of terms ..................................................................................................................... 1-5
2 Component Functions of the Purifying System.................................................. 2-1

2.1 Automatic control panel............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Multi-Monitor (MM) .................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.1 Display Function........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM) ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.3 Discharge Detector (DD) ........................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.4 Water Detector Function (WD) .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3 Gear pump ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.4 Safety joint ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.5 Plug (sludge outlet) ................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.6 Operating water solenoid valves unit......................................................................................... 2-6
2.7 3-way Cylinder Valve................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.8 3-way Solenoid Valve................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.9 Oil Heater .................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.10 Oil strainer................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.11 Flow control valve ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.12 Pressure Control Valve (needle valve) ...................................................................................... 2-6
3 Setup Items and Recommended Values for Operation ...................................... 3-1

3.1 Feed Rate ................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Treating Temperature................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.3 Gravity Disc............................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Supplied gravity discs................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.2 Gravity disc selection procedure ............................................................................................... 3-6
3.4 Lubrication Oil ......................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.4.1 Oil quantity .............................................................................................................................. 3-36
3.4.2 Optimum viscosity ................................................................................................................... 3-37
3.4.3 Recommended brands ............................................................................................................ 3-38
3.5 Sludge Discharge Interval ....................................................................................................... 3-39
3.5.1 Discharge Interval (Total discharge)........................................................................................ 3-39
3.5.2 Discharge Interval (HIDENS specification).............................................................................. 3-40

Contents (2 / 3)
3.6 Operating Water ...................................................................................................................... 3-42

3.6.1 Operating water quality ........................................................................................................... 3-43
3.6.2 Setting pressure of operating water ........................................................................................ 3-43
3.6.3 Operating water for opening bowl............................................................................................ 3-45
3.6.4 Operating water for closing bowl ............................................................................................. 3-45
3.6.5 Quantity of sealing water/regulating water and replacement water, washing water ................ 3-46
3.6.6 Quantities of washing water .................................................................................................... 3-47
3.7 Partial Discharge Setting/Adjustment (GSH-1)........................................................................ 3-48
3.7.1 Setting/adjustment of partial discharge ................................................................................... 3-48
3.7.2 Measure of the amount of partial discharge ............................................................................ 3-49
3.8 Timer Setup on the Automatic Control Panel .......................................................................... 3-52
3.8.1 GBC-1, GBC-2 timer settings(guideline) ................................................................................. 3-52
3.8.2 GSH-1 type timer settings (guideline)...................................................................................... 3-54
3.8.3 Setup method.......................................................................................................................... 3-56
3.9 Timer setting for Electrostatic Capacity Type Water Detector ................................................. 3-62
4 Multi-Monitor.......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Multi-Monitor ............................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Kinds of switches and Setting parameters ................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.2 Accessing Memory Preset Items and Changing Memory Settings............................................ 4-3
4.1.3 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 4-5
4.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM) ................................................................................................ 4-7
4.2.1 Setting Up the Leakage Monitor Function ................................................................................. 4-7
4.2.2 Principal Preset Items ............................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.3 Light Liquid Outlet Pressure Adjustment ................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.4 Checking Timer Setting after Start of Feeding ........................................................................ 4-10
4.2.5 Pressure Adjustment after Feeding ......................................................................................... 4-10
4.3 Discharge Detector Function (DD) .......................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 Setting Up the Discharge Detector Function ........................................................................... 4-11
4.3.2 Adjusting the Proximity Switch Position .................................................................................. 4-12
4.3.3 Checking Proximity Switch Position ........................................................................................ 4-14
4.4 Water Detector Function (WD) ................................................................................................ 4-15
4.4.1 Setting Up the Water Detector Function.................................................................................. 4-15
4.4.2 Principal Preset Items ............................................................................................................. 4-17
4.4.3 Adjusting Circulation Line Back Pressure Valve...................................................................... 4-17
4.4.4 Setting Up the Electrostatic Capacity Type Water Detector .................................................... 4-19

Contents (3 / 3)
5 Operation ............................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Inspections Prior to Running ..................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Pipe connections....................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Electrical wiring ......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 Flushing..................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.4 Inspections prior to running (confirmation) ................................................................................ 5-2
5.2 Start-Up..................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Precautions on start-up ............................................................................................................. 5-4
5.3 Stop........................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1 Precautions on stop .................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.4 Automatic Specification (GBC-1, GBC-2).................................................................................. 5-5
5.4.1 Start-up ..................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.2 Stop........................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5 Automatic Specification (GSH-1)............................................................................................... 5-9
5.5.1 Start-up ................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.5.2 Stop......................................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.6 Manual Specification (GAP-11) ............................................................................................... 5-14
5.6.1 Start-up ................................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.6.2 Stop......................................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.7 Manual Specification ............................................................................................................... 5-21
5.7.1 Start-up ................................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.7.2 Stop......................................................................................................................................... 5-26
6 Suspension ............................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 Preparations for Suspension ..................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Maintenance during Suspension ............................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Purifier main body and mechanical components....................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Electrical component ................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.3 Resuming Operation ................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.4 Other ......................................................................................................................................... 6-2



1-1
The one shown in Pic. 3 is put in the spare part box. After fitting-out aboard, the person in charge of
Pic. 1,Pic. 2 are factory attached direct on SELFJECTOR. Do not smear them by painting but keep
them
Pic. 3
Pic. 1 Pic. 2

1-2
! WARNING
Perfectly assemble.
particularly of:
(A) Bowl nut

(B) Disk nut
service agency.

SELFJECTOR installation, etc. If the vibration is excessive, immediately
stop SELFJECTOR without discharging sludge.
Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective action to ensure
safety before restarting SELFJECTOR.
Even if readings are below 100 μm, continuous cruising ship vibrations
4-5 times higher than registered when external vibrating forces are small,
such as when the main engine is not in operation, could adversely affect
Fig. 1-1
the durability of SELFJECTOR. In such case, stop SELFJECTOR
immediately. Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective
action to ensure safety before restarting SELFJECTOR as described
above.

1-3
! WARNING



Others
agency.
3. The bowl is factory balanced. Never interchange bowl parts Disc (1) even within the same model.
For ambiguous points in the instruction manual, contact our company or

service agency.

1-4
Density (ρ): Mass per unit volume. Clarifier operation (clarifying operation):
Operation of separating into 2 phases or liquid
Specific gravity (γ): Ratio of mass to mass of and solid or, here, into oil and solids.
water of the same volume. Varies with (See "Clarifier operation".)
temperature.
Parallel operation:
Oil feed rate: Volume per unit time of untreated Operation with oil fed proportionally to several
liquid upstream the purifier expressed in terms of purifiers arranged in parallel.
L/h or m3/h. (See "Parallel operation".)
Actual capacity: Purifier treating capacity based Series operation:

on SM Standard (eliminating sludge with 1.8 of Operation by several purifiers arranged in series.
specific gravity and 2μm of diameter or more). (See "Series operation".)
(See "Feed rate" above.)
Total discharge type
Feed liquid: Untreated oil to feed to purifier. Purifier designed to totally discharge all
contained in the bowl.
Light liquid: Oil treated by purifier or purified oil.
Partial discharge type
Heavy liquid: Separated moisture and heavy Purifier designed to partially discharge water and
components in oil or simply "water". solids only in the bowl. This type has the total
discharge function as well.
Sludge: Solids accumulated in bowl in narrow
sense. Mixture of solids, water and oil discharged Abbreviations and units
from bowl in wide sense.
L: Liter: Unit of volume.
Interface: Boundary surface between heavy and h: Hour(s): Unit of time.
light liquids in bowl. min-1: Number of revolutions per minute.
Hz: Number of frequency.
Purifier operation (purifying operation): (cycles per second)
Operation of separating into 3 phases or liquid, φ: Unit of diameter in mm.
liquid and solid or, here, into oil, water and solids. mm2/S: unit of kinetic viscosity of oil. (= cSt)
(See "Purifier operation".) ISO: Standards established by International
Standardization Organization.
SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual 1-5 Operation Manual2

2 Component Functions of the Purifying System
2.1 Automatic control panel
Automatic start : (AUTO. START)
Each automatic control panel has an "AUTO START" push button. Pressing this push button after the
purifier has reached its rated speed starts the predetermined sequence of automatic running. (Refer to
Fig. 2-1)
Automatic stop : (AUTO. STOP)
Each automatic control panel has an "AUTO STOP" push button is incorporated in each of the
automatic control panels. Pressing this push button during running switches the feed valve to the
bypass line. The sequence of water replacement and sludge discharge follows, then the automatic
running circuit is cut off and the oil purifier motor is stopped. (Refer to Fig. 2-1)
Emergency stop : (EMERG. STOP)
Each automatic control panel has an "EMERG. STOP" push button. Pressing this push button during
running cuts off the automatic running circuit immediately and switches the feed valve to the bypass line,
then the oil purifier motor is stopped without sludge discharging. (Refer to Fig. 2-1)
Discharge test : (DISCHG. TEST)
Each automatic control panel has a "DISCHG. TEST" push button. When the oil purifier is in automatic
running and in the feeding, pressing this push button forces the discharge interval timer to be timed up,
sludge is discharged. (Refer to Fig. 2-1)
1:Cont. source lamp 7:Alarm reset button

2:Power switch 8:MM function switch
3:Auto start button 9:Graphic panel
4:Auto stop button (GBC-1, GBC-2)
5:Emergency stop button 10:Operation display panel
6:Discharge test button (GSH-1)
Fig. 2-1

2.2 Multi-Monitor (MM)
The Multi-Monitor forms an integrated detection system with the following digital displays and detectors.
The Multi-Monitor is available in three types (MM-1, MM-2 and MM-3) for selective use according to the
automatic system configuration.
Digital displays Function (Flow rate, temperature, pressure, rotation number*1 and other LED)
: MM-1, MM-2, MM-3
Leakage Monitor Function (LM) : MM-1, MM-2 and MM3
Discharge Detector Function (DD) : MM-2, MM-3
Water Detector Function (WD) : MM-3
NOTE1: MM-1 has no rotation number display function.
Yellow LED Green LED Red LED

Blinking or turn-on Blinking when Turn on when
when light liquid normal revolution abnormal revolution
outlet press. is normal
Indicate flow rate
Indicate treating temp. Revolution signal

(proximity switch)
Indicate light liquid
outlet press.
Indicate light liquid Oil inlet press. signal

outlet press. (press. sensor)
Indicate horizontal shaft
revolution number Temp. signal
(temp. sensor)
Power (DC24V)
Automatic control panel
Feeding signal
GBC-1, GBC-2, GSH-1 Oil outlet press. signal
Discharging signal (press. sensor)
or Leakage signal
Alarm panel (No-Dis. signal) Circulation line press. signal
GAP-11 (Highly water signal) (press. sensor)
(for GSH-1)

2.2.1 Display Function
Data necessary for daily monitoring of operational status are digitally indicated through seven
segment LEDs.
Indicated data pertain to flow rate, temperature, pressure, rotation number, circulation line pressure
(G-HIDENS spec.), though those vary with different models of the Multi-Monitor.
NOTE
Since the flow rate displayed on Multi-Monitor(MM) is the value which converted pressure into
flow rate , please use it as a guideline.
When you always use a gear pump under 30% or less of its rated capacity, we recommend using
the small orifice (option) under 1 rank.
2.2.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)

The Leakage Monitor is a protective device that detects the treated oil leaking from the sludge
outlet or heavy liquid outlet of the SELFJECTOR by means of a pressure sensor, thereby
minimizing the loss of treated oil.
The pressure sensor is installed on the SELFJECTOR bracket (at the light liquid outlet) and
constantly monitors pressure during feeding. When a pressure drop occurs due to a leakage, the
pressure sensor detects it and the pressure sensor output is sent as a "Leakage" signal to the
automatic control panel via the Multi-Monitor.
2.2.3 Discharge Detector (DD)

The Discharge Detector is a protective device that monitors sludge discharge from the
SELFJECTOR and detects a discharge failure as the "No-discharge" status.
Normal sludge discharge is accompanied by a drop in horizontal shaft rotation speed to the preset
level. Relying on this characteristic, the Discharge Detector constantly monitors the horizontal shaft
rotation speed by means of a proximity sensor. If the horizontal shaft rotation speed fails to fall at
sludge discharge, a "No-discharge" signal is delivered to the automatic control panel via the
Multi-Monitor.
As a self-diagnosis function, "No-discharge" LED (red) is illuminated in response to a shaft rotation
number beyond 2500 rpm or an instable proximity switch input signal.
In addition to the sludge discharge monitoring function, the automatic GSH-1 system combined
with Multi-Monitor MM-3 has a partial discharge detection function to indicate whether or not sludge
discharge is optimal for partial discharge adjustment.
2.2.4 Water Detector Function (WD)

The Water Detector is an integral device that is used for the G-HIDENS system (for clarifier
operation) that constantly monitors the changing levels of separated water in the bowl by means of
a pressure sensor installed in the circulation line.
Pressure in the circulation line falls when separated water in the bowl has reached a predetermined
level. The Water Detector in the G-HIDENS system detects this pressure change by means of the
pressure sensor and effects partial discharge or total discharge with sludge, whereby the inside of
the bowl is always maintained in a normal separating condition.
The Water Detector is used only in the automatic GSH-1 system configuration.

Pressure adjustment LED (Yellow） Rotation display LED （green）
Pressure adjustment LED (Yellow）
Multi-Monitor（ＭＭ） Multi-Monitor（ＭＭ）
Cable gland
Cable gland
Proximity switch
Fig. 2-2 Sketch Drawing of MM-1 Fig. 2-3 Sketch Drawing of MM-2, MM-3

2.3 Gear pump
This is installed on the bearing housing (3) of
Pressure sensor
the purifier and connected to the horizontal for oil outlet
shaft via a safety joint. It is driven by the Pressure sensor
for circulation line
motor of the purifier. (Refer to Fig. 2-4) Main parts of (GSH-1 only)
The gear pump supplies feed liquid to the Multi-Monitor
Pressure sensor
purifier. for oil inlet
The gear pump can be selected according to

Temperature sensor
its treating capacity.
Ｒevolution sensor
(Proximity switch)
(GSH-1 and Option)
Gear pump
Safety joint
Fig. 2-4
Table 2-1 Gear pump capacities (use for suction pump)*1
Model GP10G GP20G GP30G GP50G GP70G GP100G

Capacity
1,300 2,100 3,600 5,700 8,200 11,600
（L / h）
Suction head : -4m / Delivery head : 20m
NOTE1:In case of 60Hz
2.4 Safety joint

This is mounted on the end of the horizontal shaft for transmitting the motor power to the pump.
(Refer to Fig. 2-4)
This will be automatically disconnected for protecting the gear pump, if it is subjected to an
excessive overload due to sticking foreign matters, etc.
2.5 Plug (sludge outlet)
! WARNING
Do not open this plug absolutely during a sludge discharge process.
These are inserted in the sludge chute of the purifier main body. (Refer to Fig. 2-4)
When it becomes necessary to check the internal state of the frame, unplugged.

2.6 Operating water solenoid valves unit
There are a triple solenoid valves unit for total discharge and a quadruple solenoid valves unit for
both total and partial discharge available for control of operating water. Each unit has a reducing
valve upstream of the solenoid valves. (Refer to Fig. 2-5)
The solenoid valves unit for operating water is built in the oil purifier.
The solenoid valves unit controls the feed of operating water for opening bowl, operating water for
closing bowl, sealing water and replacement water.
Each solenoid valves is actuated by input signals from the automatic control panel to effect and
stop the feed of operating water to the oil purifier.
2.7 3-way Cylinder Valve

This is a pneumatically operated cross valve mounted on the purifier inlet pipe. (Refer to Fig. 2-5)
It supplies feed liquid to the purifier.
When discharging sludge, it returns the oil from the by-lass pipe to the tank by switching the valve
position.
2.8 3-way Solenoid Valve

This is attached on the air piping to the 3-way cylinder valve.(Refer to Fig. 2-5)
The 3-way solenoid valve changes its position according to signals from the control panel and
actuates the 3-way cylinder valve.
2.9 Oil Heater

This is installed on the way between the gear pump and the purifier.(Refer to Fig. 2-5)
It heats the feed liquid supplied from the gear pump to an optimal treating temperature.
There are two types of oil heater; steam type and electric.
2.10 Oil strainer

This is installed upstream of the oil purifier to remove residual solids in the feed liquid. (Refer to Fig.
2-5)
2.11 Flow control valve

This is installed to control the feed rate to the oil purifier. (Refer to Fig. 2-5)
2.12 Pressure Control Valve (needle valve)

This is installed in the light liquid outlet line of the oil purifier. (Refer to Fig. 2-5)
This valve is used to control the light liquid outlet pressure to 0.15 MPa {1.5 kgf/cm2} (standard
value).
NOTE
The light liquid outlet pressure is critical in ensuring that the Leakage Monitor Function (LM) of
the Multi-Monitor acts correctly.
Improper pressure adjustment could result in a LM alarm output. For pressure adjustment
during running, refer to "Leakage Monitor Function (LM)" in the Operation Manual 2.

Automatic Electric
Starter Power source
Control panel
SV4 5
S
3 P SV3 SV2 SV1 SV9
R4 S S S S
9
CV1 4
WD
1
C
OIL HEATER
7 10
LM
6 12
E MM
13
B 2
M
A DD 8
11
P
C
MKK SUPPLY
Note) Automatic GBC-1 and GBC-2

F D specifications are not provided with Water
Detector (WD) and solenoid valve (SV9).
Also, Discharge Detector (DD) is optional
for these specifications.
Fig. 2-5 Typical Purifying System Configuration with Automatic GSH-1 (HIDENS)
Specification of SELFJECTOR

5 3-way solenoid valve E Water inlet
11 Oil strainer

3 Setup Items and Recommended Values for Operation
3.1 Feed Rate
An appropriate feed rate should be set for operating the SELFJECTOR efficiently.
Table 3-1 shows the actual capacity for each model of the SELFJECTOR G-series.
NOTE
Actual capacity refers to the maximum treating capacity of each model (maximum feed rate).
Table 3-1
Actual capacities (Unit : L/h)

Fuel oil Lubricating oil
A heavy oil C heavy oil Cross-head Trunk-piston
40℃ 98℃ 74～90℃ 83～95℃
Treating
mm2/sec mm2/sec
temperature Detergent oil
at 40℃ at 50℃
100mm2/sec 150mm2/sec
Viscosity 14 180 380 500 600 700
at 40℃ at 40℃
2,900 1,600 1,150 890 790 720 1,250 1,050
SJ10G/GH
2,900 1,650 1,200 930 830 760 1,350 1,100
4,350 2,450 1,750 1,400 1,250 1,150 1,950 1,650
SJ20G/GH
4,350 2,600 1,850 1,450 1,300 1,200 2,050 1,700
7,800 4,500 3,200 2,550 2,250 2,050 3,550 2,950
SJ30G/GH
7,800 4,700 3,350 2,650 2,350 2,150 3,750 3,100
11,600 6,900 4,900 3,900 3,450 3,150 5,450 4,550
SJ50G/GH
11,600 6,950 4,950 3,950 3,500 3,200 5,500 4,600
13,300 8,000 5,700 4,500 4,000 3,700 6,350 5,300
SJ60G/GH
13,300 8,100 5,750 4,550 4,050 3,700 6,400 5,350
15,900 9,800 6,950 5,500 4,900 4,500 7,750 6,450
SJ70G/GH
15,900 9,750 6,950 5,500 4,900 4,500 7,750 6,400
21,800 14,100 10,000 7,900 7,050 6,450 11,200 9,250
SJ100G/GH
21,800 14,200 10,100 8,000 7,100 6,500 11,300 9,350
24,500 16,300 11,600 9,200 8,150 7,450 13,000 10,700
SJ120G/GH
24,500 16,500 11,700 9,250 8,250 7,550 13,100 10,800
29,200 20,500 14,600 11,600 10,300 9,400 16,300 13,500
SJ150G/GH
29,200 20,400 14,500 11,500 10,200 9,300 16,200 13,400
NOTE: G-series are Standard. / GH series are HIDENS specification. Upper row: 60Hz
Lower row: 50Hz
NOTE
Actual capacities may be changed for improvement without notice.

3.2 Treating Temperature
The treating capacity of the oil purifier depends mainly on the viscosity of feed liquid. To ensure that the
oil purifier operates efficiently, heat the feed liquid to specified temperatures of Table 3-2 as
appropriate.
Table 3-2
Oil type Treating temperature（℃）

A heavy oil 14 mm2/sec at 40℃ 40
2
C heavy oil 180～700 mm /sec at 50℃ 98
2
100 mm /sec at 40℃ (SAE#30) 74～90
Lubricating oil
150 mm2/sec at 40℃ (SAE#40) 83～95
Temperature vs. Viscosity diagram
Fig. 3-1
Fig. 3-1 shows the relationship between various oil temperatures and their viscosity.
How to obtain a treating temperature

【Ex.】Case of purifying a heavy oil of 45 mm2/sec (50℃)
Draw a dotted line that is parallel to the line of 40 mm2/sec at 50℃ and passes an intersection (point A)
between a horizontal line of 45 mm2/sec and a vertical line of 50℃. From the intersection between this
line and a horizontal line of 24 mm2/sec draw a line perpendicular to the horizontal axis, then read the
temperature falling on the foot; that is 67℃.
Thus the treating temperature of this heavy oil should be 67℃.

3.3 Gravity Disc
In the purifier operation it is necessary to hold the interface between the light liquid and heavy liquid in
the bowl within a definite rage. Therefore, the SELFJECTOR can employ gravity discs of various inside
diameters such that the outlet diameter of the heavy liquid side can be altered for interface position
adjustment. One gravity disc having a larger inside diameter, if incorporated, moves the interface
outward, and another disc having a smaller inside diameter moves the interface inward.
Selection of an appropriate gravity disc is one of the most important subjects for oil treatment with the
SELFJECTOR. Exercise sufficient care for this selection to avoid unintended purifier operation.
NOTE
At the delivery of a SELFJECTOR, the gravity disc and bowl come in each package.
Select an appropriate gravity disc and assemble it in the bowl according to Section 3.3.2
"Gravity Disc Selection Procedure".
3.3.1 Supplied gravity discs
! CAUTION
Before treating a different type and nature of oil, select a suitable gravity disc having an
inside diameter that fits the gravity of the treated oil.
Running the purifier with a gravity disc of incorrect diameter may cause oil outflow to the
heavy liquid side and water circulation over the light liquid side.
Table 3-3 shows the supplied standard gravity discs for the purifier operation and Table 3-4 shows the
gravity discs for the G-HIDENS operation.
NOTE
Actually supplied gravity discs differ for types of the treated oil. For detail refer to the attached
document and drawing.

1. Gravity discs for purifier operation
Table 3-3
Model Inside diameter of gravity disc

SJ10G/GH 64 65 66.5 68.5 71.5 74 78 79
SJ20G/GH 64 65 66.5 68.5 71.5 75 77 78 82 83
SJ30G/GH 65 66.5 68.5 71.5 75 79 82 86 90
SJ50G/GH 86.5 88.5 91 94 98 103 107.5 113 115
SJ60G/GH 86 88.5 91 94 98 103 106.5 110.5 115
SJ70G/GH 87.5 91 94 98 103 107.5 113 119 122
SJ100G/GH 113 116 120 124 129 136 140.5 142 150 153
SJ120G/GH 113 116 120 124 129 136 140.5 142 146.5 150 153 160
SJ150G/GH 114 118 122 127 134 142 145.5 146.5 153 160
(mm)
2. Gravity discs for G-HIDENS operation
Table 3-4
Model Gravity disc symbol

SJ10GH
SJ20GH GH or 62
SJ30GH
SJ50GH
SJ60GH GH or 83
SJ70GH
SJ100GH
SJ120GH GH or 108
SJ150GH

3.3.2 Gravity disc selection procedure
3.3.2.1 Purifier operation
For purifier operation, use dedicated gravity discs for purifier. Table 3-5 below shows the model series
of SELFJECTOR versus the numbers of Figures in which gravity disc selection nomograms are given
for reference. Select appropriate gravity discs by models and kinds of treated oil accordingly.
Table 3-5
Model Fuel oil Fuel oil Lubricating oil
(A heavy oil) (C heavy oil)
SJ10G/GH Fig. 3-3 Fig. 3-12 Fig. 3-21
SJ20G/GH Fig. 3-4 Fig. 3-13 Fig. 3-22
SJ30G/GH Fig. 3-5 Fig. 3-14 Fig. 3-23
SJ50G/GH Fig. 3-6 Fig. 3-15 Fig. 3-24
SJ60G/GH Fig. 3-7 Fig. 3-16 Fig. 3-25
SJ70G/GH Fig. 3-8 Fig. 3-17 Fig. 3-26
SJ100G/GH Fig. 3-9 Fig. 3-18 Fig. 3-27
SJ120G/GH Fig. 3-10 Fig. 3-19 Fig. 3-28
SJ150G/GH Fig. 3-11 Fig. 3-20 Fig. 3-29
3.3.2.2 G-HIDENS operation

For G-HIDENS operation, use dedicated gravity discs for G-HIDENS. (See Table 3-4)
NOTE
In the case of G-HIDENS operation, there is no need to change gravity discs according to
operating parameters such as gravity of treated oil.
For HIDENS purifier operation, select suitable gravity discs in accordance with the gravity disc selection
procedure for purifier operation described above.

3.3.2.3 Gravity disc selection examples
[Example 1]
The specific gravity of treated oil at 15℃ is known.
Treating condition
Specific gravity of treated oil 0.925 at15℃
Treating temperature 70℃
Feed rate 3000 L/h
Selection method
1. From an intersection between falling curve ①
of specific gravity of 0.925 and the vertical line
of 70℃, draw horizontal line ② to reach the
vertical line of 100℃.
2. Connect between the right end of line ② and
the point of 3000 L/h on the treating capacity
scale using straight line ③.
3. Read within which section of gravity disc Inside
diameter scale the intersection made by line
③ falls.
4. For this [Example 1] select a gravity disc
having an Inside diameter of φ79.
[Example 2]
The specific gravity of treated oil at a certain
temperature is known.
Treating condition
Specific gravity of treated oil 0.944 at50℃
Treating temperature 98℃
Feed rate 1250 L/h
Selection method
1. From an intersection between rising curve ④
of specific gravity of 0.944 and the vertical line
of 50℃ (being converted to a specific gravity
at 15℃), draw curve ⑤ along the falling curve
to reach the vertical line of 98℃, then draw a
horizontal line to reach the vertical line of
100℃.
2. Connect between the right end of the
horizontal line and the point of 1250 L/h on the
treating capacity scale using straight line ⑥.
3. Read within which section of gravity disc Inside
diameter scale the intersection made by line
⑥ falls. For this [Example 2] select a gravity
disc having an Inside diameter of φ71.5.

Fig. 3-2

SELECTION NOMOGRAM OF GRAVITY DISC,
［Model SJ10G/GH (Fuel Oil: A Heavy Oil)］
Fig. 3-3

Fig. 3-4

Fig. 3-5

Fig. 3-6

Fig. 3-7

Fig. 3-8

Fig. 3-9

Fig. 3-10

Fig. 3-11

［Model SJ10G/GH (Fuel Oil: C Heavy Oil)］
Fig. 3-12

Fig. 3-13

Fig. 3-14

Fig. 3-15

Fig. 3-16

Fig. 3-17

Fig. 3-18

Fig. 3-19

Fig. 3-20

［Model SJ10G/GH (Lubricating Oil)］
Fig. 3-21

Fig. 3-22

Fig. 3-23

Fig. 3-24

Fig. 3-25

Fig. 3-26

Fig. 3-27

Fig. 3-28

Fig. 3-29

3.4 Lubrication Oil
Lubrication oil in the gear case lubricates each
bearing of the vertical and horizontal shafts as well
OI
as the acceleration gear.
L
The available lubrication method includes the oil
bath and splash lubrication by a spiral gear.
As the maintenance performance of the lubrication
oil seriously affects the life of each power
transmission unit, sufficient care should be Oil gauge
exercised on its handling.
For this lubrication, remove the gear cover or
lubrication plug attached on the gear cover.
Fig. 3-30
! CAUTION
Before supplying the lubrication oil, be sure to stop the SELFJECTOR. The oil becomes very hot
during operation. To avoid the risk of the oil being scattered around to burn operator's hand or
hurt his eyes, do not remove the plug or gear cover when the SELFJECTOR is in operation.
3.4.1 Oil quantity

Red line
! CAUTION
Oil quantity should be checked with the SELFJECTOR being held H

horizontally.
Refilling the lubrication oil as to exceed the upper red line (H) may L
cause additives contained in the lubrication oil to deposit into sludge,
which can adversely affect the lubrication effect. Take sufficient care
not to exceed the upper red line (H).
Fig. 3-31
Refer to
Table 3-6 for appropriate oil quantities. Refill the oil up until the red
line (H) on the oil gauge as shown in Fig. 3-31.
During operation make sure that the oil level falls in-between the red lines (H) and (L).
Table 3-6
Model SJ10G/GH SJ50G/GH SJ100G/GH
SJ20G/GH SJ60G/GH SJ120G/GH
Oil quantity（L） 6.3 11.5 16

3.4.2 Optimum viscosity
Optimum viscosity ISO VG150 (135 ～165 mm2/sec)
Refer to Section 3.4.3 for recommended lubricating oil brands.
NOTE
Synthetic lubricating oil should be within an equivalent range of ISO VG220 (198 to 242 mm2/S).
! CAUTION
Before using synthetic lubricating oil, make sure of its suitability by the procedure described in
the "Maintenance Manual".

3.4.3 Recommended brands
For the recommended brands refer to Table 3-7.
Table 3-7
Viscosity
Manufacturer Brand name
mm2/sec at40℃
BP ENERGOL GR-XP150 140
MEROPA LUBRICANT 150 143

CALTEX
URSA OIL P150 140
CASTROL CASTROL ALPHA SP150 159
GEAR COMPOUND EP150 142

CHEVRON
MACHINE OIL AW150 143
COSMO OIL COSMO GEAR SE150 153.8
SPARTAN EP150 144

EXXONMOBIL
MOBIL GEAR 629 152
GULF EP LUBRICANT HD150 150
IDEMITSU KOSAN DAPHNE SUPER GEAR OIL 150 150.4
JAPAN ENERGY JOMO REDUCTUS 150 149.4
NIPPON OIL BONNOC M150 154
SHELL OMARA OIL 150 150

SHELL
SHELL TELLUS OIL C150 150
MEROPA LUBRICANT 150 143
TEXACO
REGAL R&O 150 150
NOTE
Please consult our company when using lubricating oil other than herein recommended or
synthetic lubricating oil.
For the replacement period of the lubricating oil and precautions for use of synthetic lubricating
oil, refer to Section 3.2 of the "Maintenance manual".

3.5 Sludge Discharge Interval
! CAUTION
Too long sludge discharge intervals may cause defective separation and mechanical damage on
the unit.
The optimum sludge discharge interval varies with the operation method and nature of the treated oil,
etc., which makes it hard to be uniformly determined.
Too long intervals may accelerate the contamination inside the bowl and result in sludge deposition,
whilst too short intervals may reduce the operation efficiency.
NOTE
To determine an optimal discharge interval, it is a recommended practice to perform a test run
under practical conditions for a certain length of time and find an interval commensurate to
sludge concentration in the treated oil while watching the internal state of the bowl partial
accumulation of sludge, contamination of disc(1), etc.
3.5.1 Discharge Interval (Total discharge)

The general discharge intervals and amount of sludge discharge for the treatment of fuel and lubricating
oils by the manual type GAP-11 and automatic types GBC-1, GBC-2, and GSH-1 are as shown in Table
3-8 and Table 3-9, respectively.
Table 3-8

A Heavy Oil C Heavy Oil Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine
2
（380mm /s at50℃）
Standard Standard Standard Standard
Sludge discharge times
12 24 12 24
(time / day)
Sludge discharge interval
120 60 120 60
(min)
Bowl washing times
0 0 2 4
(time / day)
Table 3-9
SJ10G/GH SJ20G/GH SJ30G/GH SJ50G/GH SJ70G/GH SJ100G/GH SJ150G/GH

SJ60G/GH SJ120G/GH
Amount of
sludge
2.0 2.3 3.5 7.1 8.4 17.2 19.2
discharge
（L / time）

3.5.2 Discharge Interval (HIDENS specification)
For reference, Table 3-10 shows the general discharge intervals where a fuel oil or lubricating oil is
treated in automatic specification GSH-1.
The automatic specification GSH-1 discharges sludge in the total discharge and separated water in the
partial discharge. In some cases, however, total discharge of separated water with sludge takes place,
depending on the amount of time spent for water detection. The lubricating oil treatment can include
post-total discharge the bowl washing process at a certain rate. The sludge discharge rates for different
types are generally as shown in Table 3-9, though they vary with the frequency of water detection.
Table 3-10
A Heavy Oil C Heavy Oil Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine
2
（380mm /s at50℃）

Sludge discharge times
12 24 12 24
(time / day)
Sludge discharge interval
120 60 120 60
(min)
Bowl washing times
0 0 2 4
(time / day)
NOTE
No the bowl washing process is included, except in lubricating oil treatment.
Table 3-11 shows the amount of separated water in the partial discharge.
Table 3-11
SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH SJ70GH SJ100GH SJ150GH

SJ60GH SJ120GH
Amount of
separated
0.8 - 1.2 0.9 – 1.4 1.4 – 2.1 2.8 – 4.3 3.4 – 5.0 6.9 – 10.3 7.7 – 11.5
water
（L / time）

! CAUTION
Operate the lubricating oil purifier continuously as long as possible.
Should the purifier be forced to stop for the reasons below, operate it for approximately 12
hours with sludge discharged at 10 to 20 minutes intervals before setting for discharge at
standard intervals after taking into consideration of the system oil at the time of normal
operation.
Length of Purifier Shutdown

Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine
Restarting the engine and purifier after stopping
them in the anchorage or dock.(This is because
the sludge density increases at the inside 24 h or more 12 h or more
bottom of the sump tank due to natural
sedimentation.)
Restarting the purifier after once stopping it

12 h or more 6 h or more
with the engine kept running.

3.6 Operating Water
The SELFJECTOR requires;
Operating water for opening/closing bowl,
Sealing water,
Replacement water,
Regulating water (when lubricating oil is treated),
Bowl washing water (when lubricating oil is treated).
Normally, pure water is used in all cases. To ensure proper use of the SELFJECTOR, the water
pressure should be correctly set by means of reducing valve for operating water.
Fig. 3-32 Triple Solenoid Valve Unit (GBC-1, GBC-2)
Fig. 3-33 Quadruple Solenoid Valve Unit (GSH-1)

3.6.1 Operating water quality
! CAUTION
When hard water is used, scale will be produced on the inside surface of the water
supplying device, drain nozzle, or solenoid valve, which may cause various troubles.
The harder the water, the more scales on the water supplying device and pilot valve. To
prevent it, the cleaning intervals should be as short as practically possible.
Since the operating water is used for the opening/closing valve of the purifier bowl, its quality should be
pure, transparent and soft water such that it can prevent the valve from scaling or corrosion.
Use that quality of operating water, as follows:
Evaporation remainder 10 mg/L or less

Total hardness 110 mg/L or less : as CaCO3 /L (Hardness 6°dH or less)
pH value 6.5 to 7.5
Salt content 100 mg/L or less: (Cl- 60 mg/L or less)
3.6.2 Setting pressure of operating water

Use the following operation water pressure for each of automatic specifications.
Automatic type Discharge type Set pressure Required pressure

(Standard value)
Manual, GAP-11 0.35 to 0.5 MPa
Total discharge 0.3 MPa (3.0 kgf/cm2)
GBC-1, GBC-2 (0.35 to 0.5 kgf/cm2)
Total and Partial 0.35 to 0.5 MPa
GSH-1 0.25 MPa (2.5 kgf/cm2)
discharge (0.35 to 0.5 kgf/cm2)
! CAUTION
Where the primary pressure of operating water is lower than 0.2 MPa (2 kgf/cm2), then sludge
discharge efficiency will be decreased. Otherwise a pressure exceeding 0.75 MPa (7.5 kgf/cm2)
may cause the solenoid valve malfunctioning.

To adjust the operating water pressure, use the adjust screw on top of the reducing valve while reading
the valve's pressure gauge. (See Fig. 3-17)
How to pressure adjustment with adjust screw

Turn clockwise: Pressure increases.
Turn counter-clockwise: Pressure decreases.
The reducing valve has been shop-adjusted for optimal water pressure according to manual and
automatic specifications shown in Section 3.6.2.
! CAUTION
When setting or adjusting the operating water pressure during running, use the manual handle
of SV2 while running operating water for bowl closing. When the purifier is not running, perform
this with the operating water inlet tube (Teflon) removed. Otherwise, the operating water could
find its way to the gear case to damage bearings.
NOTE
The pressure of the operating water reducing valve may increase after the SV2 solenoid valve
closes, but this is not an anomaly.

3.6.3 Operating water for opening bowl
The operating water for opening bowl is used to force down the main cylinder to open the bowl, letting
out sludge and water accumulated in the bowl in the "total discharge" or "partial discharge".
In the case of total discharge, the operating water is regulated by the solenoid valve SV1 and
introduced into the bowl opening water pressure chamber via feeding device.
In the case of partial discharge (GSH-1 specification models only), the operating water is regulated
by the solenoid valve SV9 and introduced into the bowl closing water pressure chamber via feeding
device. When the bowl closing water pressure chamber has been filled up, the bowl opening water
overflows into the bowl opening water pressure chamber, depressing the main cylinder to open the
bowl instantly.
Main seal ring
Main cylinder
Pilot valve
Valve sheet
Bowl opening Watercourse for closing bowl

water pressure chamber
Bowl closing
water pressure chamber
Watercourse for opening bowl
Quadruple solenoid valve unit
ＳＶ９ Operating water for opening bowl
ＳＶ１ Operating water for onening bowl
ＳＶ２ Operating water for closing bowl
ＳＶ３ To sealing water and replacement inlet
Supply water
Fig. 3-34
3.6.4 Operating water for closing bowl

The operating water for closing bowl is used to force up the main cylinder to close the bowl. The bowl
closing water is regulated by the solenoid valve SV2 and introduced into the bowl closing water
pressure chamber via feeding device. The bowl closing water is introduced intermittently into the bowl
closing water pressure chamber for a predetermined period of time during purifier operation.
! CAUTION
Where the primary pressure of operating water is lower than 0.2 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2), the bowl
closing failure could occur.

3.6.5 Quantity of sealing water/regulating water and replacement water, washing water
! CAUTION
If the sealing water and replacement water are not adequate in quantity;
Oil loss during sludge discharge will increase,
Water circulates over the light liquid side, or
Oil flows out from the heavy liquid side.
Therefore, be sure to set correct quantities of these waters.
Sealing water is used to form a water phase within the bowl prior to performing a purifier-run and
prevent feed liquid from flowing out of the heavy liquid side when it is supplied. On the other hand,
replacement water is used to collect oils in the bowl before discharging sludge so that the oil loss can
be minimized.
The quantities of sealing water and replacement water required by different models shown below,
respectively.
3.6.5.1 Quantities of sealing water, replacement water (Manual, GAP-11, GBC-1, GBC-2)
Table 3-12 shows the quantities of replacement water and sealing water for Manual, GAP-11, GBC-1,
GBC-2 Type.
Table 3-12
SJ10G SJ20G SJ30G SJ50G SJ70G SJ100G SJ150G

SJ60G SJ120G
Quantity of Sealing Water 1.2 1.3 1.6 3.5 4.0 8.4 8.0
（L / time）
Quantity of Replacement Water 0.6 1.0 1.6 2.8 3.7 7.8 9.5
（L / time）
3.6.5.2 Quantities of replacement water, regulating water (GSH-1)

Table 3-13 shows the quantities of regulating water and replacement water for GSH-1 Type. On
lubricating oil purifier for G-HIDENS specifications, regulating water is supplied before oil feed.
Table 3-13
SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH SJ70GH SJ100GH SJ150GH

SJ60GH SJ120GH
Quantity of Regulating Water
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.3 1.6
（L / time）
Quantity of Replacement Water
for Total discharge 1.3 1.4 1.9 4.1 5.2 10.2 11.0
（L / time）
Quantity of Replacement Water
for Partial discharge 0.3 0.7 1.2 1.7 1.7
（L / time）
NOTE
No regulating water needs to be fed into a fuel oil purifier.

3.6.6 Quantities of washing water
In the case of lubricating oil purifier, washing water is introduced into the bowl to clean the inside at
predetermined intervals of sludge discharge. Solids in the bowl are removed with washing water in total
discharge. The quantities of washing water required by different models are as shown below.
Table 3-14
SJ10G/GH SJ20G/GH SJ30G/GH SJ50G/GH SJ70G/GH SJ100G/GH SJ150G/GH

SJ60G/GH SJ120G/GH
Washing water 1.6 1.8 2.5 5.2 6.1 12.8 14.2
（L / time）
NOTE
No washing water needs to be fed into a fuel oil purifier.

3.7 Partial Discharge Setting/Adjustment (GSH-1)
Partial discharge (amount of sludge) adjustment can be accomplished through pressure control by the
reducing valve for operating water. The Multi-Monitor (MM-3) tells whether or not partial discharge is
optimal.
3.7.1 Setting/adjustment of partial discharge

1. Set the timer (T011) of the control panel to 0.6 sec.
2. Set the reducing valve connected to the solenoid valve unit for secondary pressure at a standard
preset level of 0.25 MPa (2.5 kgf/cm2).
NOTE
The primary pressure of the supply water line should be 0.35 to 0.5 MPa (3.5 to 5.0 kgf/cm2).
The supply water pressure beyond 0.75 MPa (7.5 kgf/cm2) could cause a reducing valve
failure.
To adjust the reducing valve for optimum secondary pressure, use the adjust screw that is exposed if
the seal on top of the valve is removed. Turning the adjust screw as required, set the reducing valve for
desired pressure while reading its pressure gauge. Turning the adjust screw clockwise increases the
secondary pressure and a counter-clockwise turn decreases it.
Proper pressure setting on the reducing valve provides the discharge rates of Table 3-11 “Separated
Water Discharge Rates (Partial Discharge)”. After pressure setting/adjustment, check through the
Multi-Monitor that sludge discharge is optimal in accordance with Section 3.7.2 “Monitoring Partial
Discharge”.
Quadruple solenoid valve unit
Fig. 3-35

NOTE
With the reducing valve for operating water set (shop-adjusted) for secondary pressure
at a standard preset level of 0.25 MPa (2.5 kgf/cm2), be sure to ascertain that partial
discharge is optimal by measuring its quantity.
Increasing the reducing valve secondary pressure increases sludge discharge. To
decrease, lower the pressure.
The pressure of the operating water reducing valve may increase after the SV2 solenoid
valve closes, but this is not an anomaly.
3.7.2 Measure of the amount of partial discharge

The measure of the partial discharge is available only in the automatic control (GSH-1) system.
To measure, there are two methods:
1. Continuous measurement during normal operation.
2. One-time measurement for discharge adjustment or check
In this paragraph, the procedure for one-time measurement will be described. Before measure of the
partial discharge, make sure that the sensor is in position by reference to Section 4.3.3 “Checking
Proximity Switch Position” in this manual.
! CAUTION
Described below is the general procedure for checking the amount of partial discharge. Prior to
starting operation, be sure to refer to Section 5. “Operation“ in this manual. Given instructions
are subject to the SELFJECTOR being ready to start. (The piping had completed for operation).
1. Set the power switches of the starter, automatic control panel and Multi-Monitor to ON in that order.
2. Remove the front cover of the Multi-Monitor and check that all internal switches are in the
designated positions.
1) Check that the 50Hz/60Hz selector switch is in the position of power frequency for the
SELFJECTOR. (See Fig. 3-36)
2) Set the DD alarm output switch to OFF. (See Fig. 3-36)
3) Set the Partial ON/OFF switch to OFF. (See Fig. 3-36)
NOTE
Each model of the SELFJECTOR has a different range of optical discharge.
Correct measurement cannot be performed without proper settings. (Refer to Section 4.1.2)
3. Start the SELFJECTOR in accordance to the start-up procedure described in Section 5.

“Operation”.
4. Ascertain that the SELFJECTOR has entered into purifier operation. Purifier operation is started in
response command signals received by the Multi-Monitor from the automatic control panel, when
the confirmation LED for input signal "Feeding"(green) in the Multi-Monitor and the “Rotation
Display LED”(green) on the Multi-Monitor are illuminated.
5. Press the Discharge measurement switch in the Multi-Monitor. The green "Measuring" LED of the
confirmation LED for partial discharge quantity is illuminated. This indication means that the purifier
is ready for measurement. (See Fig. 3-36)

6. Then, press the “DISCHG.TEST” push button on the automatic control panel.
7. The sequence of the automatic control panel proceeds to the "sludge discharge" process and
sludge discharge takes place.
8. The revolution sensor (proximity switch) installed in the purifier picks a drop in horizontal shaft
speed and its output signal equivalent to the quantity of sludge discharge effected is sent to the
Multi-Monitor.
9. The input is indicated through appropriate Partial Discharge LED in the Multi-Monitor; red LED for
"OVER", green LED for "JUST" or red LED for "UNDER". (See Fig. 3-36)
10. If "OVER" LED (red) or "UNDER" LED (red) is illuminated, regulate the secondary pressure of the
reducing valve for operating water (refer to Section 3.7.1 and perform above operations from Step 5
downward to adjust the quantity of discharge until the "JUST" LED (green) is illuminated.
NOTE
A change in reducing valve setting must be followed by discharge tests to have line pressure
stabilized before proceeding to discharge measurement.

Dischargr quantity
setting switch
OVER （LED red）
Center voltage of discharge JUST （LED green）
quantity setting switch
UNDER （LED red）
MEASURING （LED green）

Power switch 2. Partial ON / OFF selector switch

OFF ON
OFF ON
Fig. 3-36
Control / LED Function
Power switch ON/OFF control of Multi-Monitor power
50Hz / 60Hz selector switch Used to select power frequency for SELFJECTOR.
Setting to ON effects constant monitoring to determine
Partial ON / OFF switch whether or not discharge is proper. With the switch in OFF
position, there is no monitoring of discharge.
Used for one-time measurement of sludge discharge. With
Partial ON/OFF switch in OFF position, pressing this
switch once effects measurement of sludge discharge only
once, with "Measuring" LED (green) illuminated.
Partial OVER (red) Lit when discharge is more than preset.
discharge JUST（green） Lit when discharge is optimal as preset.
confirmation UNDER（red） Lit when discharge is less than preset.
LED MEASURING (green) Lit when discharge measurement switch is pressed.
Setting the switch to OFF cuts off No Discharge alarm
DD alarm output switch signal. There is no alarm output to the automatic control
panel and alarm panel.

3.8 Timer Setup on the Automatic Control Panel
Literally the automatic control panel automatically controls each operation of the SELFJECTOR.
This automatic control panel has incorporated various timers such as to control each solenoid valve, etc.
Correct settings of these timers are the keys to normal and efficient machine operations. The set
periods of these timers will vary depending on the flow rate of the operating water. Consult
Table 3-15 and Table 3-16 for standard settings (guidelines) at each operation mode.
3.8.1 GBC-1, GBC-2 timer settings(guideline)

Fig. 3-37 shows the operation timing of each timer incorporated in the automatic control panel during
sludge discharge process and purifying process.
Purifying process Sludge discharge process Purifying process Sludge discharge process
Operation intervals of each solenoid valve

during sludge discharge process
Replacement water supply period

5
0 0 0 0 Treated liquid feeding period

(sludge discharge interval)
2
Sealing water supply period
1
Operating water supply for closing bowl
3
｝
6 …
Intermittent water supply timer
Replacement
water Sealing water 4 4 …
Intermittent water supply
Water for Water for

closing bowl closing bowl
Operating water supply period for opening bowl

Closing the feed valve Sludge discharge
(Remarks)
Figures in the oblong boxes above denote timer numbers.
For treatment of lubricating oil, bowl washing process is added downstream of the
sludge discharge process.
Fig. 3-37

3.8.1.1 GBC-1, GBC-2 type automatic control panels
Table 3-15 Timer Counter Setting Guideline (GBC-1, GBC-2)
Timer
Item U n i t SJ10G SJ20G SJ30G SJ50G SJ60G SJ70G SJ100G SJ120G SJ150G
No.
Interval 0 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20
Opening bowl 1 sec 3
Replacement water 2 sec 5 8 12 14 14 19 29 29 32
Sealing water 3 sec 9 10 12 18 18 20 32 32 27
Intermittent water supply 4 min 10
Operating water supply for
6 sec 5
closing bowl
Discharge interval 5 min NOTE1
Bowl washing Fuel oil 0
D sec
water Lubricating oil 12 13 19 26 26 31 48 48 47
E times
counter Lubricating oil 6
NOTE1: For discharge intervals, refer to Section 3.5 “Sludge Discharge Interval”.
NOTE
Timer settings for sealing water and replacement water in the above list are based on the
feed rate at 8 L/min. for SJ10G to 30G, at 12 L/min. for SJ50G to 70G, at 16 L/min. for SJ100G
and 120G and at 18 L/min. for SJ150G. For practical setting, always measure the flow rate
actually and select proper values accordingly.
Fuel oil purifiers have no bowl washing process.

3.8.2 GSH-1 type timer settings (guideline)
Normally, the G-HIDENS type oil purifier discharges sludge in the total discharge mode and separated
water in the partial discharge mode on a command signal from the Multi-Monitor with Water Detector
Function.
For G-HIDENS specification, various timers in the automatic control panel GSH-1 are actuated at the
timings shown in Fig. 3-38 for sludge discharge process and bowl washing process. For action timings
for total discharge timers, see Fig. 3-37. For specific setting requirements for timers in the automatic
control panel GSH-1, refer to the Operation Manual 3C.
Purifying process Separated water discharge process Purifying process Sludge discharge process Purifying process Sludge discharge process
(Partial discharge) (Total discharge) (Total discharge)
Monitoring time
C022 C022 C022
C015 C015
Command to discharge
of separated water
from the water detector
Operation intervals
of each solenoid valve
Water detection during separated water
discharge process
Treated liquid feeding period (sludge discharge interval)
T000 T000 T000 T000

Operating water supply for closing bowl
T012
｝
T011 T016 …
Intermittent water supply timer
C014 C014 …
Replacement water
(Partial)
Intermittent water supply
Water for
closing bowl Operating water supply period for opening bowl
during separated water discharge process
Closing the feed valve Separated water discharge
(Remarks)
Figures in the oblong boxes above denote timer numbers.
If the Water Detector is activated after the lapse of monitoring time (C022), total
discharge of sludge and separated water is effected.
For the timing of total discharge, refer to Section 3.8.1.
In the case of lubricating oil treatment, washing process is effected as many times as
set on the washing counter (CO23) after sludge discharge process (total discharge).
For lubricating oil treatment, regulating water feed is added before washing process
and after separated water discharge process (partial discharge).
Fig. 3-38

3.8.2.1 GSH-1 type automatic control panels
Table 3-16 Timer Counter Setting Guideline (GSH-1)
Timer
Item Unit SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH SJ60GH SJ70GH SJ100GH SJ120GH SJ150GH
N o .
Interval T000 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20
Opening bowl T001 sec 3
Replacement water T002 sec 10 11 14 21 21 26 38 38 37
Regulating Fuel oil 0
T003 sec
T004 sec
Opening bowl(partial) T011 sec 0.6
Replacement
T012 sec 2 2 2 3 3 6 6 6 6
water(partial)
T013 sec
Water(partial) Lubricating oil 1 1 2 3 3 3 5 5 5
Intermittent water supply C014 min 15
T016 sec 5
closing bowl
Discharge interval C015 min NOTE1
Detection count reset C026 min 30
Water detection setting
C027 times 6
counter
Monitoring time C022 min 20
C023 times
NOTE1: For discharge intervals, refer to Section 3.5 “Sludge Discharge Interval”.
NOTE2: Please use C021 by fixing to 1.
NOTE
Timer settings for sealing water and replacement water in the above list are based on the
feed rate at 8 L/min. for SJ10GH to 30GH, at 12 L/min. for SJ50GH to 70GH, at 16 L/min. for
SJ100GH and 120GH and at 18 L/min. for SJ150GH. For practical setting, always measure
the flow rate actually and select proper values accordingly.
Fuel oil purifiers have no regulating water feeding process and bowl washing processes.
! CAUTION
When SJ10GH to 150GH types are used in the total discharge mode (purifier operation), select
an appropriate gravity disc that fits the specific gravity of feed liquid and install it in position.
Then, fully open the shut-off valve and set the Water Detector selector dial to No working
position. (Refer to Section 6.4.2.4 in the Operation Manual 1.) In this particular case, the
regulating water (T003) mentioned above refers to sealing water. Accordingly, set appropriate
value for sealing water on the timer of the model used by reference to Table 3-15 in 3.8.1.1. If
there is no setting for sealing water, the Leakage Monitor function of the Multi-Monitor is
actuated and gives an alarm.

3.8.3 Setup method
3.8.3.1 GBC-1 type automatic control panel
The following Fig. 3-39 shows the layout of timers in the automatic control panel.
Alarm Indicating
LEDs
ALARM
Mode Selector Switch for Switch- Unit Indicators Value Indicators for indication of
NO.1 OPTION NO.1 over of elapsed time/set time Min/Sec elapsed time/set time of timer
LEAK NDIS HTMP LTMP VIBR
SET.MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1
SET.MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 Optional Function
Selector Switches
MIN.
MODE
SEC. MIN.
MON.MODE
MODE
789 45 6 45 6
Timer indication/ SEC.
2 3456
AB E
23
23
78
78
CD
9 01 901
Setting Parts
F01
T.SEL 101(102) 100(101) MW

T.SET
MON.MODE
CN4
Connector Terminal 789 45 6 45 6
23 6
AB
45
2 3
2 3
7 8
7 8
C DE
CN1 F01 9 9
01 01
T.SEL. 101(102) 100(101) MW

T.SET
Timer No. Setting Value Set Value
Power Terminal Selector Switch Selector Switch Memory Switch
Fig. 3-39
1. Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON", and check to see that the pilot lamp "CONT.
SOURCE" LED of the Graphic panel and the value indicator LEDs of the control unit are ON.
2. Operate the individual switches in the following sequence.
Set Time Calling-out Procedure
Select a timer number to

Set the mode selector
set by the timer number
switch (MODE) to
selector switch (T.SEL).
SET.MODE.
Set Time Changing Procedures
Select a time to set by

the setting value Press the set value
selector switch (T.SET). memory switch (MW).
(2 digits)

NOTE
o Set the timers Nos. 0 to 3, 6 and D by the second.
Set the timer No. 4 by the minute.
Set the timer No. 5 at steps of 10 minutes.
Set numbers of times on the counter timer E.
o To operate the T.SEL. and T.SET. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something
else.
3. Timer Elapsed Time Indication Procedures
Set the MODE Select a timer number to Indicate by

the timer number selector switch
to MON.MODE.
(T.SEL).
[For Example]
The operation times and intervals set by the timers can be changed as exampled below.
Setting time to 180 minutes.
SET.MODE
789 45 6 45 6
23 6
AB
45
2 3
2 3
7 8
7 8
MODE
C DE
9 9
F01 01 01
101(102) 100(101)
MON.MODE T.SEL. T.SET MW

3.8.3.2 GBC-2 type automatic control panel
The following Fig 3-26 shows the layout of timers in the automatic control panel.
NO.1 NO.2
Alarm Indicating
LEDs
ALARM
NO.1 OPTION NO.1 NO.2 OPTION Mode Selector Switch for switch- Unit Indicators Value Indicator for indication of elapsed
LEAK NDIS HTMP LTMP VIBR over of elapsed time/set time Min/Sec time/set time of timer
NO.2
SET.MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 No.1 SEL.
Optional Function SET.MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 No.1 SEL.
Selector Switch
MIN.
MODE
SEC.
MIN.
MON.MODE No.2 SEL.
789 45 6 45 6
MODE TS3
Timer Indication/
2 3456
AB E
23
23
78
78
CD
SEC.
901 901
Setting Parts
F01
T.SEL 101(102) 100(101) MW

T.SET
MON.MODE No.2 SEL.

CN4 CN5
Connector Connector
Terminal Terminal 789 45 6 45 6
45 6
AB
(No.1 Machine) (No.2 Machine)
2 3
2 3
7 8
7 8
Machine Number
C DE
23
CN1
F01 01
9
01
9 Selector Switch
T.SEL. 101(102) 100(101) MW

T.SET
Timer No. Setting Value Set Value
Power Terminal Selector Switch Selector Switch Memory Switch
Fig. 3-40
1. Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON", and check to see that the pilot lamp "CONT.
SOURCE" LED of the Graphic panel and the value indicator LEDs of the control unit are ON.
2. Operate the individual switches in the following sequence.
Select machine No. 1 or Select a timer number to

Set the mode selector
2 by the machine set by the timer number
switch (MODE) to
number selector switch. selector switch (T.SEL).
SET.MODE.

(2 digits)

NOTE
o Set the timers Nos. 0 to 3, 6 and D by the second.
Set the timer No. 4 by the minute.
Set the timer No. 5 at steps of 10 minutes.
Set numbers of times on the counter timer E.
o To operate the T.SEL. and T.SET. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something
else.
4. Timer Elapsed Time Indication Procedures
Select machine No. 1 or 2 Select a timer number to Indicate by

Set the MODE to
by the machine number the timer number selector switch
selector switch. MON.MODE.
(T.SEL).
[For Example]
Setting time to 180 minutes for the machine No.1.
No.1 SEL. SET.MODE

789 45 6 45 6
23 6
AB
45
2 3
2 3
7 8
7 8
C DE
SEL. MODE 9 9
F01 01 01
101(102) 100(101)
No.2 SEL. MON.MODE T.SEL. T.SET MW

3.8.3.3 GSH-1 type automatic control panel
The following Fig 3-41 shows the operation display panel on the automatic control panel.

Address Display Section (Upper/Lower Stage)
アドレス表示部データ表示部（上段／下段）
SET MAIN
ADDRESS DATA
MAIN
MON OPT
TIM
CNT
MON OUT
- +
ALM M

CLR ENT
モード表示部
Mode Display Section 操作キー
Control Keys
Fig. 3-41
1. Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON" and check to see that the "CONT. SOURCE" pilot
lamp, and the LED of the "mode display section" on the operation display panel are ON.
2. Press the control keys of the operation display panel in the following sequence. Confirm the
displays of the display section before proceeding ahead.
Set Time/Elapsed Time Call Procedures

設定時間／経過時間の呼び出し操作手順
MAIN - or +
TIM CNT TIM CNT
T001～T025は、１回押す
For T001 to T025, press TIM CNT once. タイマ番号を選択
Select a timer number.
C014～C027は、２回押す
For C014 to C027, press TIM CNT twice.
Set Time Change Procedures

設定時間の変更操作手順
SET
(REG)
or - or + ENT
TIM CNT
桁選択
To select a digit To設定時間増減
increase or decrease the set time

[For example of timer setting procedure]
To change the set time to 180 minutes, for example, proceed as described below.

MAIN - or +
TIM CNT TIM CNT
Select CNT to Press TIM CNT twice. タイマ番号を選択
Select timer No. C015

SET
(REG)
or - or + ENT
TIM CNT
Set digit flashes. 桁選択

To select a digit Set 180 設定時間増減
(Upper Stage)
NOTE
o 0.1 second for timer Nos. T001-T025
o 1 minute for timer Nos. C014-C015,C22
o 1 time for counter Nos. C021,C023,C27
o Light “TIM” in Mode Display Section when timer “T” is selected.
o Light “CNT” in Mode Display Section when timer “C” is selected.

3.9 Timer setting for Electrostatic Capacity Type Water Detector
! CAUTION
When the optional electrostatic capacity type Water Detector is used, apply a back pressure of
0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) to the light liquid outlet side to avoid an error.
Set timer for Water Detector in Programmable controller, according to the following Table 3-17. The
method of setting timer refer to Section 3.8.3.3.
For the description of the Counters, etc., refer to Operation Manual 3C.
Table 3-17
C027 Number of times 6

T025 sec. 90
C026 min. 30
Variations of back pressure, oil temperature, and flow rate during operation should fall within the range
shown by Table 3-18 comparing to the setting values.
Table 3-18
Back pressure ±0.01MPa (±0.1kgf/cm2)

Oil thermometer ±5℃
Flow rate ±5％

4 Multi-Monitor
4.1 Multi-Monitor
The Multi-Monitor, which is an integrated detection and display instrument, is available in three types.
The Multi-Monitors vary in the functions that have with applicable types of automatic system (Refer to
Table 4-1).
Table 4-1
Functions MM-1 MM-2 MM-3

Applied automatic control device GBC-1, GBC-2 GBC-1, GBC-2 GSH-1
Alarm panel: GAP-11 (with DD)
Leakage Monitor Function (LM) ○ ○ ○
Indication of inlet temperature ○ ○ ○
Indication of flow rate ○ ○ ○
Indication of outlet pressure ○ ○ ○
Discharge Detector Function (DD) ― ○ ○
Indication of revolution number ― ○ ○
Water Detector Function (WD) ― ― ○
Communication (RS485) ― ○ ○
NOTE
See Table 4-1 above for the functions incorporated in different types of the Multi-Monitor.
4.1.1 Kinds of switches and Setting parameters

For the Multi-Monitor, there are parameters to be selected through switches, etc. and those preset in
internal memories. Fig. 4-1 identifies the switches, etc. and their locations. For memory preset items,
see Table 4-2.
Discharge quantity setting switch 1. 50Hz / 60Hz selector switch

2. Partial ON/OFF selector switch
Center voltage of discharge quantity setting switch
Pressure display lock switch Function setting switch

SW1：Select F
SW2：Forward
SW3：Backward
SW4：Enter

Water detection output switch
Temperature alarm output switch OFF ON
Rotation output switch
Flow rate indication adjustment VR

Power switch
ON ON Temperature indication adjustment VR
OFF
OFF
D-sub connector
Water detector selector dial
LM alarm output switch
No water / heavy liquid detector function
Water detector function
Heavy liquid detector function (for optional use)
Fig. 4-1

Table 4-2
Memory preset
Setting items Operation
item number
1 Kinds of oil YES
2 SELFJECTOR-G model YES
3 Gear pump model YES
4 Minimum light liquid pressure (MPa) YES
5 LM trigger pressure △P (MPa) YES
6 Delay timer (sec) YES
7 Hold timer (sec) YES
8 Feed oil temperature (℃) NO
9 Detection exclusion temperature (℃) NO
10 Minimum WD pressure (MPa) YES
11 Maximum heavy liquid pressure (MPa) NO
12 WD trigger pressure △W (MPa) YES
13 Light liquid pressure (MPa) YES
14 Pressure averaging time (sec) NO

4.1.2 Accessing Memory Preset Items and Changing Memory Settings
4.1.2.1 Accessing Multi-Monitor Memory Preset Items

To access the memory preset items of the Multi-Monitor, use the function setting switches (SW1 to 4).
Press the function setting switch 4 (SW4: Enter) for 2 seconds and release. A preset item number
appears in the upper seven-segment display with the current preset value indicated in the lower. Keep
pressing the function setting switch 1 (SW1: Select) until the desired preset item number is displayed.
4.1.2.2 Changing Multi-Monitor Memory Preset Value

When it becomes necessary to change a memory preset value, access the number of the item to be
changed through the function setting switch 1 (SW1: Select) and change it by means of the function
setting switch 2 (SW2: Forward) or the function setting switch 3 (SW3: Backward). The preset value
increases or decreases at minimum variable steps predetermined for each preset item. Key in a desired
new value and press the function setting switch 4 (SW4: Enter). The new value is registered in the
memory.
NOTE
Preset values cannot be changed without pressing the function setting switch 4 (SW4).
4.1.2.3 Locking Display

During normal operation, "flow rate" is always indicated in the upper seven-segment LED display, and
"feed liquid temperature"/"light liquid pressure" appears in the lower changing (incrementally) at steps of
5 seconds.
At the start of operation or during operation, when back pressure at the light liquid outlet becomes
necessary to adjust to optimize the Leakage Monitor function of the Multi-Monitor or for other reason,
press the Pressure Display Lock switch on the Multi-Monitor panel once. This freezes the "light liquid
pressure" appearing in the lower seven-segment LED display of the Multi-Monitor. (Flow rate remains
indicated in the upper LED display.) To release the lock to resume the incremental display of pressure,
press the Pressure Display Lock switch again.
NOTE
To lock the display of light liquid pressure only, press the Pressure Display Lock switch at
the left of the Multi-Monitor panel once, and the incremental display is switched to the locked
indication. To resume the incremental display, press this select switch once.
By long pushing the function setting switch 2 and 3 (SW2: Forward, SW3: Backward) at the same time,
the incremental display is switched to the "feed liquid temperature", the "light liquid pressure", the
"revolution number" and the "water pressure" indication by repetition.
The “revolution number” is indicated by MM-2 (with DD function) and MM-3, the “water pressure” is
indicated by MM-3 only. LEDs (green) on the Multi-Monitor panel are illuminated to confirm the
indications.
By detaching from the function setting switch 2 (SW2: Forward), the display indicates only the "feed
liquid temperature" and the "light liquid pressure" indication by repetition incrementally.

4.1.2.4 Default of Setting Value
Factory-set default values for the respective preset items are as shown in Table 4-3.
! CAUTION
At test running, listed default values require adjustment according to the SELFJECTOR
specification and model.
Table 4-3
Memory preset Selection range of

No Setting items MM-1 MM-2 MM-3
item number setting
1 ― Power switch ON / OFF OFF OFF OFF
2 ― LM alarm output switch ON / OFF OFF OFF OFF
3 ― DD alarm output switch ON / OFF ― OFF OFF
4 ― Water Detection output switch ON / OFF ― ― OFF
Partial discharge detection

5 ― ON / OFF ― OFF OFF
function
6 ― Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz 60Hz*1 60Hz*1 60Hz*1
7 1 Kinds of oil FO / LO FO*1 FO*1 FO*1
10G,20G,30G,
8 2 SELFJECTOR model 50G,60G,70G, 10G*1 10G*1 10G*1
100G,120G,150G
10G,20G,30G,
9 3 Gear pump model 10G*1 10G*1 10G*1
50G,70G,100G
Minimum light liquid pressure
10 4 0.03～0.30 0.12*1 0.12*1 0.12*1
(MPa)
LM trigger pressure (△P)
11 5 0.010～0.050 0.02 0.02 0.02
(MPa)
Delay timer
12 6 5～120 40 40 40
(sec)
Hold timer
13 7 5～120 15 15 15
(sec)
Minimum WD pressure
14 10 0.010～0.10 ― ― 0.03
(MPa)
WD trigger pressure (△W)
15 12 0.010～0.10 ― ― 0.05
(MPa)
16 13 0.03～0.30 0.15*1 0.15*1 0.15*1
(MPa)
NOTE＊1: The default value surely requires setting change according to machine specification and
operation conditions. And please set various switches to ON position according to
directions of operation manuals.

4.1.3 Wiring
Fig. 4-2 is a general view of the Multi-Monitor terminal layout.
Table 4-4 lists the terminals by use and connection.
Connect sensor output signal lines by using furnished wires.

To facilitate connection, strip the wire end 5 to 6 mm long.
Connect wires to the terminal board as follows:
1. Put a small standard screwdriver in the appropriate screwdriver inserting slot above the terminal to
which the wire is connected and depress the internal metal piece. This opens the snap-in metal
piece to hold the wire in the cable plug receptacle below the screwdriver slot.
2. Plug in the wire stripped at end 5 to 6mm long. (See Fig. 4-3)
3. Remove the screwdriver, and the wire should be held in place.
4. Pull the wire lightly to check that it is firmly connected.
Cable inserting slot
Screwdriver inserting slot
Fig. 4-2
5～6 mm
Fig. 4-3

Table 4-4
Terminal Terminal
Number Number
Connection Connect to Connection Connect to
MM-2 MM-2
MM1 MM1
MM-3 MM-3
1 1 Power source (DC24V) 7 13 Temperature Signal (Black) Temperature sensor

The color of a tube
2 2 GND 8 14 Temperature signal (Red) ：black
Oil inlet pressure signal

3 3 Leakage Signal 9 15
(Black)
Oil inlet pressure
Control panel
Oil inlet pressure signal sensor
－ 4 No discharge signal Alarm panel 10 16
(Green) The color of a tube
Starter
：green
Oil inlet pressure signal
― 5 Highly water signal 11 17
(Red)
Oil outlet pressure signal

6 6 Feeding signal 12 18
(Black)
Oil outlet pressure
Oil outlet pressure signal sensor
― 7 Discharging signal 13 19
(Yellow) The color of a tube
：yellow
Revolution signal Oil outlet pressure signal
― 8 Spare output 14 20
(Collector) (Red)
Revolution signal Circulation line

― 9 Spare output ― 21
(Emitter) pressure signal (Black) Circulation line
pressure sensor
Circulation line
― 10 Revolution signal (Black) ― 22 (MM-3/GSH-1)
Revolution sensor pressure signal (Pink)
The color of a tube
(MM-3: Standard)
Circulation line ：blue
― 11 Revolution signal (White) (MM-2: Option) ― 23
pressure signal (Red)
The color of a tube
：white 15 Leakage Signal Alarm panel
― 12 Revolution signal (Red) ―
16 (ｂ／ａ contact) Starter
NOTE: 1. The terminal board number 24 of the Multi-Monitor (MM-2, MM-3) is for optional function.
2. The terminal number 15 is used for “ｂ-contact” and the terminal number 16 is used for “a-contact”

4.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)
NOTE
The Leakage Monitor Function of the Multi-Monitor is a protective device that detects treated
oil leaking from the sludge outlet or heavy liquid outlet of the bowl by means of a pressure
sensor. Be sure that settings are correct to prevent a false alarm.
4.2.1 Setting Up the Leakage Monitor Function

Fig. 4-4 shows principal switches necessary for setting the Leakage Monitor Function.
Pressure display lock switch Function setting switch

SW1：Select F
Seven-segment LED SW2：Forward

Upper: Setting item number SW3：Backward
Lower: Set value SW4：Enter
Power switch LM alarm output switch
OFF ON OFF ON
Fig. 4-4
Switch Function Remarks

Power switch ON/OFF control of power Power is turned on with the switch in ON position,
and off in OFF position.
LM alarm output ON/OFF control of LM Alarm is issued with the switch in ON position,
switch alarm output and not in OFF position
Function setting Used to access preset Pressing SW1 indicates preset item number in
switch items in memory of the upper seven-segment display and current preset
Multi-Monitor and change value in lower. SW2 and SW3 select a new value
preset values. to replace existing value. Pressing SW4 registers
new value in memory.
Pressure display Change “the incremental Pressing this switch indicates the flow rate in
lock switch display” / “the locked upper seven-segment display and the light liquid
display”. pressure in lower by fixed. IT is able to operate
on the Multi-Monitor panel.

4.2.2 Principal Preset Items
Memory preset Preset Description Unit Minimum Setting Standard Factory

item item step of range value setting
No. adjustment
This is light liquid outlet
pressure. Pressure control LED
(yellow) on top of the 0.03
Light liquid
13 Multi-Monitor flashes when MPa 0.01 to 0.15 0.15
pressure
actual light liquid outlet pressure 0.30
is within ± 15% of preset value
and is illuminated within ± 3%.
Alarm trigger level is ΔP lower
than actual light liquid outlet 0.010
LM trigger
5 pressure. When actual light MPa 0.005 to 0.02 0.02
pressure (ΔP)
liquid outlet pressure falls below 0.050
this level, an alarm is issued.
This is the lower alarm limit level
of light liquid outlet pressure. 0.03
Minimum light
4 When actual light liquid outlet MPa 0.01 to 0.12 0.12
liquid pressure
pressure falls below this limit, an 0.30
alarm is issued.
Alarm status is released as long
5
as set on delay timer until actual
Delay Timer 6 sec 5 to 40 40
light liquid outlet pressure is
120
stabilized after feed is started.
If actual light liquid outlet
pressure falls below alarm
trigger level or lower alarm
trigger limit during oil feed, alarm
5
status is released as long as set
Hold Timer 7 sec 5 to 15 15
on hold timer. When the timer is
120
up, an alarm is issued if pressure
is not back to normal. Timer
count is cleared if pressure is
back to normal within set time.
NOTE
Set minimum light liquid pressure using the following as a guide.
[Minimum light liquid pressure] = [Light liquid pressure] – [LM trigger pressure ΔP] – [A]
[A] = 0.01 to 0.02 MPa

4.2.3 Light Liquid Outlet Pressure Adjustment
Pressure adjustment LED (Yellow）
To ensure proper functioning of the Leakage Monitor, the
adjustment of light liquid outlet pressure to the light liquid
pressure level preset in the Multi-Monitor (memory preset
item No. 13) through back pressure control valve is required.
Carry out this adjustment as follows.
1. Accomplish pre-operational checks. (Refer to Section

5.1.4 “Inspections Prior to Running”.)
2. Switch on the starter, automatic control panel (or alarm Pressure display lock switch
panel) and Multi-Monitor in that order.
3. Set the MM function switch on the automatic control
panel (or alarm panel, starter panel) to ON and the LM
alarm output switch in Multi-Monitor to OFF.
4. Remove the front cover of the Multi-Monitor and check
that all internal switches are in the appropriate positions. Cable gland
5. Start the oil purifier in accordance with the starting
Proximity switch
procedure. Do not start feeding until the rated speed has
been reached.
6. While watching the flow rate display on the Multi-Monitor, Fig. 4-5
adjust the bypass valve and flow rate control valve for
the feed rate specified for the SELFJECTOR being operated. At the same time, fully open the back
pressure control valve (needle valve) at the light liquid outlet and record the pressure at that point
without fail.
7. Check that the feed liquid temperature is at the preset level through the feed liquid temperature
display on the Multi-Monitor. If lower, pressure drops when the feed liquid reaches the preset
temperature and an alarm is issued in some cases.
8. Press the pressure display lock switch on the panel (or the function setting switch SW1 in the
Multi-Monitor) to freeze the indications of flow rate and light liquid pressure in the upper and lower
seven-segment displays. While reading the light liquid pressure on the Multi-Monitor, accomplish
pressure adjustment to the level preset in the Multi-Monitor (refer to Section 4.2.2) through the
pressure control valve at the light liquid outlet.
9. Make fine adjustment of pressure through the back pressure control valve until the pressure control
LED (yellow) on top of the Multi-Monitor is illuminated. This LED flashes when pressure is within ±
15% of the level preset in the Multi-Monitor and is illuminated within ± 3%.
10. After the adjustment of light liquid outlet pressure is completed, press the pressure display lock
switch on the panel (or the function setting switch SW1 in the Multi-Monitor) again to release the
pressure display locked status. Set the MM function switch on the automatic control panel to OFF
and then to ON. After that, the LM alarm output switch in Multi-Monitor to ON. Finally, reinstall the
front cover of the Multi-Monitor.
NOTE
For a period of approximately 20 to 30 seconds after the MM function switch on the automatic
control panel (or the alarm panel or starter) is set to ON from OFF, the LED displays of the
Multi-Monitor remain blank, which is a normal transient phenomenon.
In addition the manual SELFJECTOR version with no alarm panel has the MM function switch
installed on the starter.

! CAUTION
1. The level of "light liquid pressure" preset in the Multi-Monitor is the "measured pressure
recorded in 6" plus LM trigger pressure ΔP (standard value: 0.02 MPa).
Be sure not to set it beyond 0.2 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2). Setting beyond 0.2 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2) may
cause the light liquid to overflow the light liquid chamber. (Refer to Section 4.2.2.)
Standard value for setting "light liquid pressure" is 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) for fuel oil, and is
0.10 MPa (1.0 kgf/cm2) for lubricating oil.
2. The level of "minimum light liquid pressure" preset in the Multi-Monitor should be less than
the "light liquid pressure" mentioned above minus LM trigger pressure ΔP.
This value must be higher than the "measured pressure recorded in 6." If it is equal to or lower
than the recorded level, the Leakage Monitor may fail to detect a leakage of treated oil properly.
Standard value for setting "minimum light liquid pressure" is as follows,
[Minimum light liquid pressure]
= [Light liquid pressure] – [LM trigger pressure ΔP] – [0.01 to 0.02] (MPa)
NOTE
Normally, once adjusted at trial run, light liquid outlet pressure requires no further
adjustment unless there are fluctuations in flow rate and temperature.
During daily check, ascertain proper illumination of the pressure control LED (yellow) and
correct indication in the light liquid pressure on the Multi-Monitor.
LM trigger pressure follows up pressure fluctuations due to pulsations during operation.
Even if the pressure control LED (yellow) flashes, therefore, there is no particular need for
pressure adjustment.
4.2.4 Checking Timer Setting after Start of Feeding

Always check that the following timer setting is correct after oil feed is started.
Delay timer
Ascertain that the time from the start of feeding after sludge discharge to the arrival of discharge side
pressure at preset level is shorter than the time preset on the delay timer.
NOTE1
Control fluctuations in the flow rate of feed liquid to the purifier to be within ± 0.01 MPa in
pressure equivalent.
NOTE2
Control feed liquid temperatures to be within ± 5% of preset level. Excessive fluctuations
change the feed liquid in viscosity to fluctuate light liquid outlet pressure as a result, possibly
affecting the output of the Leakage Monitor Function of the Multi-Monitor.
4.2.5 Pressure Adjustment after Feeding

1. Set the LM alarm output switch in Multi-Monitor to OFF.
2. Accomplish the steps 8 to 10 in Section 4.2.3 “Light Liquid Outlet Pressure Adjustment”.

Discharge Detector Function (DD)
NOTE
The Discharge Detector Function (DD) of the Multi-Monitor is a protective device that relies on a
shaft speed drop to work. More specifically, if the horizontal shaft speed is not dropped during
sludge discharge, the detector detects it as a "No-Discharge" status by means of a proximity
switch. If the proximity switch is out of position or the switches are set wrong, a false alarm is
issued.
4.2.6 Setting Up the Discharge Detector Function

For the Discharge Detector Function, the Multi-Monitor is provided with a Partial ON/OFF switch for
monitoring sludge discharge among others, in addition to normal and abnormal speed indicating means.
Fig. 4-6 shows principal switches necessary for setting the Discharge Detector Function.
OVER （LED red）
JUST (LED green）
Seven segment display UNDER （LED red）
Upper: Setting number MEASURING （LED green）
Lower: Set value

Rotation output switch 2. Partial ON/OFF selector switch
50Hz 60Hz
OFF ON
Power switch
OFF ON
OFF ON
Fig. 4-6
Remarks
Switch Function
ON/OFF control of Power is turned on with the switch in ON

Power switch position and off in OFF position.
Multi-Monitor power.
DD alarm output ON/OFF control of An alarm is issued with the switch in ON
switch discharge alarm output. position, and not in OFF position.
Used to select appropriate power
50Hz / 60Hz Selection of power frequency
frequency for the SELFJECTOR between
selector switch between 50Hz and 60Hz.
50Hz and 60Hz.
Constant monitoring is effected with the
switch in ON position and stopped in OFF
Partial ON / OFF Constant monitoring of partial
position. Whether or not partial discharge
switch charge for optimal quantity.
is optimal is indicated through partial
discharge LEDs.
Measurement is enabled only when
A push button for effecting partial ON/OFF switch is in OFF position.
Discharge
one-time measurement of Whether or not partial discharge is
measurement
discharged quantity during optimal is indicated through partial
switch
partial discharge. discharge LEDs. This switch is mainly
used for adjustments at trial run.

4.2.7 Adjusting the Proximity Switch Position
! CAUTION
The Discharge Detector is precision equipment. Take special cares so that it is not bumped
during handling.
The proximity switch should be retained firmly with the screws.
(The fastening torque should be 60 kg･cm or less.)
Make sure that the purifier is completely stopped before checking and adjusting, if
necessary, the installed position of the proximity switch.
Do not use a proximity switch other than supplied with the SELFJECTOR.
The proximity switch is screwed directly in the gear pump housing (horizontal shaft cover where
separate pump is used) and secured with a lock nut. To adjust the installed position of the proximity
switch, loosen the lock nut and set the proximity switch at a distance of 1.0～1.3 mm from the horizontal
shaft. After the adjustment is finished, retighten the lock nut to secure the proximity switch. (See Fig.
4-7.) The nut tightening torque should be less than 60 kg･cm.
Trouble display LED（red）

Rotation display LED（green）
Lock nut
Proximity switch
Horizontal shaft
Cable gland
Usually 1.0～1.3 mm
Fig. 4-7

4.2.8 Checking Proximity Switch Position
1. If the proximity switch is in position
The rotation display LED (green) on top of the Multi-Monitor flashes while the oil purifier is in
operation.
The rotation display LED (green) is illuminated when the oil purifier is stopped.
The speed appears in the appropriate seven-segment display.
2. If the proximity switch is out of position -

The trouble display LED (red) on top of the Multi-Monitor is lit when rated speed is reached.
Specifically, this LED is illuminated in either of the following cases.
(i) Input signal to the proximity switch is unstable - probable cause is the proximity switch being out of
position.
(ii) Proximity switch output exceeds 2,500 rpm in speed equivalent - probable cause is a circuit failure.
4.2.8.1 Measuring Proximity Switch Output Voltage

The installed position of the proximity switch can be accurately checked by measuring its output
voltage.
Test pin REV（Red ＋）
Open then cover of the Multi-Monitor and measure voltage

Test pin GND（Black -）
across between the test pins [GND (black) and [REV (red)]
shown in Fig. 4-8 using a tester.
Table 4-5 shows test pin voltages versus power frequencies
when the proximity switch is in position.
Check the measure voltage reference to the correct voltage.
Table 4-5
Frequency Voltage
60Hz Approx. DC3.5V
50Hz Approx. DC2.9V
Fig. 4-8
NOTE
When the tester reading exceeds DC4V, a circuit failure is suspected. In such case, contact MKK
service shop or us nearest to you.

4.3 Water Detector Function (WD)
4.3.1 Setting Up the Water Detector Function
Described below is the pressure sensor type Water Detector (G-HIDENS system) incorporated in the
automatic control panel GSH-1/Multi-Monitor MM3 system configuration.
Fig. 4-9 shows principal switches necessary for setting the Water Detector Function of the
Multi-Monitor.
Seven-segment display Function setting switch

Upper: Setting number SW1：Select F
Lower: Set value
SW2：Forward
SW3：Backward
SW4：Enter
Water detection output switch

Water detector selector dial
OFF ON
No water / heavy liquid
detector function
Power switch
Water detector function
Heavy liquid detector function

(for optional use)
OFF ON
Fig. 4-9
Remarks
Switch Function
ON/OFF control of Power is turned on with the switch in ON

Power switch position and off in OFF position.
Multi-Monitor power.
Selection between working Set the switch to working of the Water
Water detector
and no working of Water detector function in clarifier operation and
selector dial
Detector function. to no working in purifier operation.
Water detection ON/OFF control of Water An output signal is issued with the switch
output switch Detection output signal. in ON position, and not in OFF position.
Pressing SW1 indicates the preset item
Used to access memory number in upper seven-segment display
Function setting preset item in the and current preset value in lower. SW2
switch Multi-Monitor and change and SW3 select new preset value to
preset value. replace existing value. Pressing SW4
registers new preset value in memory.

4.3.2 Principal Preset Items
Memory preset Preset Description Unit Minimum Setting Standard Factory

item item step of range value setting
No. adjustment
This is the trigger level for
pressure sensor installed in
circulation line. When pressure
in circulation line falls below this 0.01
Minimum WD
10 level, pressure sensor detects MPa 0.01 to 0.03 0.03
pressure
accumulated water in bowl 0.10
having reached the predetermine
level and issues an output
signal.
Water Detection trigger level is
ΔW lower than actual circulation 0.01
WD trigger
12 line pressure. If actual circulation MPa 0.005 to 0.05 0.05
pressure (ΔW)
line pressure falls below this 0.10
level, an alarm signal is issued.
4.3.3 Adjusting Circulation Line Back Pressure Valve

1. Set the MM function switch on the automatic control panel (GSH-1) to OFF.
2. Operating the function setting switches, check that preset Water Detection trigger pressure (ΔW:
memory preset item No. 12) and minimum water detection pressure (memory preset item No. 10)
are correct. If not, reset them.
3. Set the Water Detector selector dial to "Water detector function" position for working of the Water
Detector Function.
4. Reading the analog pressure gauge installed at the circulation line, adjust the circulation line back
pressure valve for a back pressure of 0.1 MPa (1.0 kgf/cm2).
5. After circulation line pressure adjustment is finished, return the MM function switch on the automatic
control panel (GSH-1) to ON to make the Water Detector Function operative. Finally, reinstall the
cover of the Multi-Monitor.
Analogue type pressure gauge
Pressure sensor Shut off valve
Circulation line
Circulation line back pressure valve
Heavy liquid connecting piping
Fig. 4-10
! CAUTION
To avoid the risk of feed liquid being scattered out from the chamber or the motor being
overloaded, be sure that the maximum circulation line back pressure is controlled by less than
0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2).
! CAUTION
Before operating the SELFJECTOR, make sure that the G-HIDENS gravity disc installed in the
bowl is suitable for its type. A wrong gravity disc may cause outflow of treated oil to the sludge
outlet or the motor being overloaded
.
4.3.4 Setting Up the Electrostatic Capacity Type Water Detector

1. When the electrostatic capacity type Water Detector is used, set the following switches in the
Multi-Monitor in respective positions.
(i) Water Detector selector dial: "No water / heavy liquid detector function" position
(ii) Water Detection output switch: "OFF"
2. Set [Water Detector] switch on the automatic control panel (GSH-1) to AUTO or MANUAL.
3. Press [Start Water Detector Control] push button to make the Water Detector ready for control.
! CAUTION
Do not operate the SELFJECTOR without installing necessary parts for clarifier operation in the
bowl first.
Lack of clarifier parts causes light liquid to flow out to the heavy liquid side.

5 Operation
5.1 Inspections Prior to Running
! CAUTION
The purifier should be operated under optimum conditions to suit the nature of the treated oil.
For each purifier type or specification, there are design limits for flow rate, pressure,
temperature, etc. Operation beyond these limits could put the purifier in a dangerous state.
5.1.1 Pipe connections

Make sure that the oil pipes, operating water pipes, and air pipes are correctly laid and that the joints
are firmly tightened. (Refer to the attached document & drawing.)
NOTE
Check if the operating water pipes for opening/closing bowl are not connected the wrong
way, i.e. one for the other.
Make sure that a 60 to 100 meshes strainer is attached in front of the gear pump.
Make sure that a butterfly valve is mounted on the sludge outlet pipe.
5.1.2 Electrical wiring

Make sure that the wiring has been done correctly. (Refer to the attached document & drawing.)
5.1.3 Flushing
Flush the inside of pipes connected to the purifier (oil delivery, water supply and compressed air lines)
to completely remove foreign matters from them.
! CAUTION
If the purifier is re-started after an insufficient flushing, the following malfunctions may occur:
Damage to the gear pump and frequent breaks of the safety joint.
Damage to the main cylinder seat surface and the main seal ring.
Damage to the valve seat surface.
NOTE
Before flushing, disconnect the primary side connection flange from the operating water
pressure reducing valve to prevent ingress of water into the bowl from the water supplying
device during flushing.

5.1.4 Inspections prior to running (confirmation)
! CAUTION
Always confirm the following subjects prior to running the purifier.
1. Make sure that an appropriate gravity disc has been employed in the bowl. (Refer to Section 3.3.)
2. Refill an appropriate type of lubrication oil in the gear case. This oil quantity should be confirmed
with the oil gauge.
3. Make sure that the primary pressure of compressed air supply pressure is between 0.5 and 0.9
MPa (5 to 9 kgf/cm2).
4. Open the source valve on the operating water pipe to make sure the pressure.
Automatic Discharge mode Set pressure Required operating

configuration (Standard value) water pressure
Manual, GAP-11 Total discharge 0.3 MPa 0.35 ～ 0.5 MPa
GBC-1, GBC-2 (3 ㎏ f/cm2) (3.5 ～ 5 ㎏ f/cm2)
GSH-1 Total discharge and 0.25 MPa 0.35 ～ 0.5MPa
Partial discharge (2.5 ㎏ f/cm2) (3.5 ～ 5 ㎏ f/cm2)
5. Either operate the solenoid valve or manually operate the respective valve to make sure that the
operating water for opening/closing bowl is properly flowing out. (Check before the bowl is installed,
with the operating water inlet pipe disconnected.)
6. Disconnect the sealing water pipe (steel pipe) and measure the quantity of the sealing water
and replacement water. (Refer to Section 3.6.5.)
7. Make sure that the brake is in the non-braking position.
8. Make sure that the purifier has been properly assembled with bolts completely tightened. (Refer to
Section 2.2 in the “Maintenance Manual”.)
9. Make sure the direction of revolution.
Turn on the starter. Start the motor and stop it simultaneously (within 3 seconds) and check that
the rotating direction of the motor or horizontal shaft is the same as the arrow n the purifier frame.
10. In case of automatic specification, power on the control panel and make sure that the timer
setting value is appropriate. (Refer to Section 3.8.)
11. Set the power switch of the Multi-Monitor to ON, and check that all the switches in the Multi-Monitor
are in proper positions and necessary memory preset items/values are correctly set. (Refer to
Section 4 “Multi-Monitor”.)
12. Fully open the inlet valve, outlet valve, and by-pass valve of the oil pipe.
13. Open the butterfly valve at the sludge discharge outlet.

! CAUTION
Before resuming operation after the bowl has been overhauled and reassembled, check to
ascertain the following.
1. Make sure that the cap nut tying the bowl and vertical shaft together is tightened firmly.
2. Make sure that the alignment marks (stamped 0) on the bowl meet.
(Refer to Section 2.2 in the “Maintenance manual”.)
3. Assemble the bowl into the vertical shaft, check the height, and make sure that the bowl can be
easily rotated by hand.
4. Make sure that the joints and traps (frame cover) of the piping are firmly tightened.
5. Make sure that the union nuts and cover nuts of the inlet pipe are firmly tightened.

5.2 Start-Up
5.2.1 Precautions on start-up
! CAUTION
Prior to starting operation, always accomplish what is described in Section 5-1 “Inspections
Prior to Running“.
Note the following points at the start-up.
Subject Measures
Operation sound When an abnormal sound is heard, immediately stop the operation and
inspect the purifier and identify the cause.
Vibration Vibration may temporarily occur just after start-up, however, this is not
an anomaly.
It will be reduced when the rated number of revolution is achieved.
At the rated number of revolution if the vibration is large, immediately stop
the operation and inspect the purifier and identify the cause.
If feed liquid is being supplied, discontinue it and stop the purifier
immediately without sludge discharged.
Start-up time Small-size (SJ10G/GH - SJ30G/GH) and medium and large-size
(SJ50G/GH - SJ150G/GH) purifiers respectively reach their rated speeds in
less than 5 minutes and less than 10 minutes with current stabilized at 50
to 70% of the rated level. If the purifier fails to reach its rated speed despite
the lapse of more than 10 minutes, stop it in accordance with given
stopping procedure and check the friction block.
5.3 Stop
5.3.1 Precautions on stop
As the bowl is retarded, the purifier may vibrate at certain low speeds. This is a transient phenomenon
and normal.
! WARNING
Before disassembling or checking, make sure that the purifier is completely stopped and turn
off the starter. A look at the gear pump safety joint or motor fan tells whether or not the purifier
is at a stop.
NOTE
For the inspection procedure refer to the "Maintenance manual".

5.4 Automatic Specification (GBC-1, GBC-2)
Automatic Electric
Starter
control panel Power source
SV4
S
2 P SV3 SV2 SV1
CV1
S S S
V9 1
C
OIL HEATER
LM
3 V5
E MM
B
V6
A DD *1 M
V7
P
C V10
G
V8
MKK SUPPLY
NOTE1: DD is option.
F D
Fig. 5-1

5.4.1 Start-up
Use the following procedure for start-up.
Step 1
Before start-up, make sure that the valves [V5, V6, V7, V8, V9, and V10] are fully open.
Step 2
Operation Check item
Set power switches of the starter, automatic Make sure that power to the starter, automatic
control panel and Multi-Monitor to ON in that order. control panel and Multi-Monitor is on.
Step 3
Set the MM function switch on the control panel to Always operate this switch as described when feed
ON and the LM alarm output switch to OFF. liquid flow and light liquid outlet pressure become
necessary to adjust.
Step 4
Depress the [START] button on the starter to start Make sure that the operation sound and vibration
up the purifier. are normal.
After the start-up make sure that the current value
falls within 50 to 70% of the rating.
NOTE
Refer to Table 4-3 in Section 4.1.4 the “Operating manual1”.
Usually the rated number of revolution can be achieved 5 to 10 minutes following the start-up.
Step 5
Start the oil heater. Make sure that the feed liquid is circulating in the
oil heater and heated up to the given temperature.
NOTE
Such as fuel oil A does not have to be heated.
Step 6
Depress the [AUTO.START] push button on the Processes of [Opening bowl] ⇒ [replacement
automatic control panel. water] ⇒ [Discharge] ⇒ [Sealing water] ⇒
[Feeding] will advance in this order.
Confirm the discharge operation by the increase of
current reading or discharge sound.

Step 7
After making sure that the purifier-run enters, Check that the flow rate displayed on the
regulate the by-pass valve V8 and flow control Multi-Monitor is the predetermined value.
valve V5 to a given feed rate. Make sure the pressure at the light liquid outlet
side when V6 is fully open.
After the feeding, make sure that no oil leaks out in
the sludge outlet side and heavy liquid outlet side.
NOTE
Always make sure the pressure at the light liquid outlet side when V6 is fully open. This is
necessary for Leakage Monitor Function adjustment of the Multi-Monitor.
When setting up the Leakage Monitor (LM), refer to Section 4.2 “Leakage Monitor Function”.
Step 8
Throttle down the pressure valve V6 for the light The pressure adjustment LED (green) on top of the
liquid pressure level present in the Multi-Monitor. Multi-Monitor starts flashing when the pressure is
Then, change the MM function switch on the within ±15% of the set pressure, and changes to
control panel from OFF to ON and following to set continuous lighting when it is within ±3%.
the LM alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor to
ON.
NOTE
After the temperature of feed liquid being fed is stabilized (approximately 5 minutes), check
once again that the light liquid pressure is within 15% of the level present in the Multi-Monitor
(the pressure adjustment LED flashing or continuous lighting). Readjust the pressure, if
necessary, through V6 while watching the pressure adjustment LED.
! CAUTION
When adjusting the light liquid outlet pressure only after feeding to a level beyond LM trigger
pressure (△P), follow the procedure below. Failure to follow may cause a false alarm.
(i) Set the MM function switch on the control panel to OFF position.
(ii) Accomplish pressure adjustment.
(iii) Place the MM function switch on the control panel back into the ON position.
In addition, the flow rate indicating LED of the Multi-Monitor should be actuated approximately 20 to
30 seconds after the MM function switch is set to ON.
The procedure adjusting both flow rate and light liquid outlet pressure after feeding refers to the
steps 8 to 10 in Section 4.2.3 “Light Liquid Outlet Pressure Adjustment”.
Step 9
If the Multi-Monitor has the Discharge Detector Make sure that the Rotation display LED (green)
Function, set the DD alarm output switch in the on top of the Multi-Monitor is flashing. Make sure
Multi-Monitor to ON. that the Trouble display LED (red) turns off.
NOTE (MM-2:Optional specification)
If the rotation display LED (green) does not flash or the trouble display LED (red) is lighting, the
sensor out of position or a sensor circuit failure is probable cause. Take appropriate action in
accordance with Section 4.3.3 in this manual or Section 6.12.5 in the Maintenance Manual.

5.4.2 Stop
! WARNING
When an unusually large vibration or sound (contact sound or abnormal sound from the
bearing section) is present, stop the purifier as soon as possible by depressing the
"Emergency Stop" push button.
Stop the purifier with the following procedure.

Step 1
Depress the [AUTO.STOP] push button on the The feed liquid valve CV1 closes and the
automatic control panel. sequential process of [Replacement] ⇒
[Discharge] ⇒ [Stop] automatically follows.
current reading and discharge sound.
Step 2
Stop the oil heater.
Step 3
After making sure that the SELFJECTOR Also make sure that the other valves and cocks are
completely stops, close both the feed liquid inlet closed.
valve V7 and butterfly valve V10.
NOTE
Whether the SELFJECTOR stops or not can be confirmed with either the safety joint at the
horizontal shaft gear pump or the motor fan.
As the Discharge Detector Function is included in the MM-2 system, the rotation display LED
(green) on top of the Multi-Motor changes from flashing to constant lighting to tell that the
SELFJECTOR has been stopped.
Step 4
Set power switches of the Multi-Monitor, automatic Make sure that power to the Multi-Monitor,
control panel and starter to OFF in that order. automatic control panel and starter has been cut
off.

5.5 Automatic Specification (GSH-1)
Automatic Starter Electric

SV4
S
2 P SV3 SV2 SV1 SV9

CV1
S S S S
WD
V9 1
C
OIL HEATER
LM
3 V5
E MM
B
V6
M
A DD
V7
P
C V10
G
V8
MKK SUPPLY
For G-HIDENS Specification
F D V12
V11
Fig. 5-2

5.5.1 Start-up
Step 1
Before start-up, make sure that the valves [V5, V6, V7, V8, V9, V10 and V11] are fully open and that
the valve V12 is fully closed.
Prior to clarifier operation with the G-HIDENS type SELFJECTOR, make sure that the valve V12 is fully
open and the valve V11 is fully closed.
Step 2
Set power switches of the starter, automatic Make sure that power to the starter, automatic
control panel and Multi-Monitor to ON in that order. control panel and Multi-Monitor is on.
Step 3
Set the MM function switch on the control panel to Always operate this switch as described when feed
ON. Then set the LM alarm output switch and liquid flow and light liquid outlet pressure become
water detection output switch in the Multi-Monitor necessary to adjust.
to OFF.
Step 4
NOTE
Refer to Section 4.1.4 Table 4-3 in the “Operating manual1”.
Step 5
Step 6
Depress the [AUTO.START] push button on the Processes of [Closing bowl] ⇒ [replacement
automatic control panel. water] ⇒ [Discharge] ⇒ [Sealing water] ⇒
[Feeding] will advance in this order.
current reading or discharge sound.

Step 7
After making sure that the purifier-run enters, Check that the flow rate displayed on the
regulate the by-pass valve V8 and flow control Multi-Monitor is the predetermined value.
After the feeding, make sure that no oil leaks out
in the sludge outlet side and heavy liquid outlet
side.
NOTE
Step 8
within ±15% of the set pressure, and changes to
continuous lighting when it is within ±3%.
NOTE
Step 9
Adjust the circulation line pressure to 0.1 MPa (1.0 Check that adjusted pressure is correct on the
kgf/cm2) through the circulation line back pressure analog pressure gauge installed on the circulation
valve V12. line (lower hood of the frame).
Set the water detector selector dial in the
Multi-Monitor to working of the water detector
position, and change the MM function switch on
the control panel from OFF to ON. And then set
the LM alarm output switch and water detection
output switch in the Multi-Monitor to ON,

! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Setting the circulation line pressure beyond 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) could result in the light liquid
flowing out to the sludge side or the motor being overloaded.
! CAUTION
When adjusting the circulation line pressure to a level beyond the WD trigger pressure, follow
the procedure below. Failure to follow may cause a false alarm.
Step 10
Set the DD alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor Make sure that the Rotation display LED (green)
to ON. on top of the Multi-Monitor is flashing.
Make sure that the Trouble display LED (red)
turns off.
NOTE
If the rotation display LED (green) does not flash or the trouble display LED (red) is lighting, the
sensor out of position or a sensor circuit failure is probable cause. Take appropriate action in
accordance with Section 4.3.3 in this manual or Section 6.12.5 in the Maintenance Manual.

5.5.2 Stop
! WARNING
bearing section) is present, stop the purifier as soon as possible by depressing the
"Emergency Stop" push button.
Step 1
Depress the [AUTO.STOP] push button on the The feed liquid valve CV1 closes and the
automatic control panel. sequential process of [Replacement] ⇒
[Discharge] ⇒ [Stop] automatically follows.
current reading and discharge sound.
Step 2
Step 3
After making sure that the SELFJECTOR Also make sure that the other valves and cocks
completely stops, close both the feed liquid inlet are closed.
NOTE
As the Discharge Detector Function is included in the MM-3 system, the rotation display LED
(green) on top of the Multi-Motor changes from flashing to constant lighting to tell that the
SELFJECTOR has been stopped.
Step 4
Set power switches of the Multi-Monitor, automatic Make sure that power to the Multi-Monitor,
control panel and starter to OFF in that order. automatic control panel and starter has been cut
off.

5.6 Manual Specification (GAP-11)
Alarm panel Starter Electric

Power source
SV4
S
2 P SV2 V1
CV1
S V3
V9 1
C
OIL HEATER
LM
3 V5
E MM
B
V6
M
A
V7
P
C V10
G
V8
MKK SUPPLY
F D
Fig. 5-3

5.6.1 Start-up
Step 1
Before start-up, make sure that the valves take the following positions:
Full open: V5, V6, V7, V8, V9, and V10
Full close: V1, V3, CV1 and SV2
Step 2
Set power switches of the starter, alarm panel and Make sure that power to the starter, alarm panel
Multi-Monitor to ON in that order. and Multi-Monitor is on.
Step 3
Set the MM function switch on the alarm panel to Always operate this switch as described when feed
ON. Then set the LM alarm output switch in the liquid flow and light liquid outlet pressure become
Multi-Monitor to OFF. necessary to adjust.
Step 4
up the purifier. Set the MM function switch on the are normal.
control panel to ON. After the start-up make sure that the current value
NOTE
Step 5
NOTE
Step 6
Open the manual handle of the solenoid valve When the supply of operating water for closing
SV2 bowl is completed, close the manual handle of
for 20 to 30 seconds to supply the operating water the valve.
for closing bowl so that it is closed.

Step 7
Fill the measuring hopper with a specified quantity When the refill is completed, always make sure
of pure water, and open the globe valve V3 to that V3 is closed.
refill the bowl (supply of replacement water).
NOTE
The inside surface of the measuring hopper has a mark to show the quantity.
For the necessary quantity of replacement water, refer to Table 3-12 in Section 3.6.5.1.
Step 8
Open the cock (for opening bowl) V1 for Confirm the discharge operation by the increase of
approximately 2 seconds to supply the operating current reading or discharge sound.
water for opening bowl so that water in the bowl
(replacement water) is discharged.
NOTE
Perform flushing inside the bowl.
Step 9
When the discharge is completed, close the cock
V1 and open the solenoid valve SV2 for 20 to 30
seconds to supply the operating water for closing
bowl.
Step 10
Refill the bowl with a specified quantity of pure When the refill is completed, always make sure
water using the hopper (supply of sealing water). that V3 is closed.
NOTE
Same as above step 7.
For the necessary quantity of sealing water, refer to Table 3-12 in 3.6.5.1.
Step 11
Depress the [FEEDING] push button.

Step 12
Regulate the flow control valve V5 and by-pass Check that the flow rate displayed on the
valve V8 to a given feed rate. Multi-Monitor is the predetermined value.
Make sure the pressure at the light liquid outlet
After the feeding, make sure that no oil leaks out
in the sludge outlet side and heavy liquid outlet
side.
NOTE
Step 13
Then, change the MM function switch on the alarm within ±15% of the set pressure, and changes to
panel from OFF to ON, and following to set the LM continuous lighting when it is within ±3%.
alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor to ON.
NOTE
! CAUTION
(i) Set the MM function switch on the alarm panel to OFF position.
(iii) Place the MM function switch on the alarm panel back into the ON position.

Sludge discharge procedure
To have sludge discharge effected during feeding operation;
1. Depress the [STOP FEEDING] push button on the alarm panel to stop oil feed to the purifier.
2. Accomplish Steps 7, 8 and 9 to let sludge discharge take place.
3. Then, accomplish Steps 10 and 11 to resume feeding operation.
! CAUTION
In the lubricating oil treatment, introduce washing water into the bowl to clean at intervals of 6
to 8 hours before sludge discharge operation. (Carry out according to the operation procedure
for sludge discharge.) The bowl washing process is carried out after sludge discharge. For
necessary quantity of washing water, refer to Table 3-14 in Section 3.6.6.
Failure to clean the bowl may affect the purifier's performance or cause mechanical troubles.

5.6.2 Stop
! WARNING
When an unusually large vibration or sound (contact sound or abnormal sound from the bearing
section) is present, stop the purifier as soon as possible by first depressing the "STOP
FEEDING" push button, then depressing the [Stop] push button on the starter.
Step 1
Depress the [STOP FEEDING] push button on the
alarm panel to close the feed valve CV1.
Step 2
Step 3
of water, and open the globe valve V3 to refill the that V3 is closed.
bowl (supply of replacement water).
NOTE
Step 4
Open the cock V1 for approximately 2 seconds to Confirm the discharge operation by the increase of
discharge the sludge. current reading or discharge sound.
Step 5
Depress the [STOP] push button of the starter to
stop the motor.

Step 6
NOTE
Step 7
Set power switches of the Multi-Monitor, alarm Make sure that power to the Multi-Monitor, alarm
panel and starter to OFF in that order. panel and starter has been cut off.

5.7 Manual Specification
Starter Electric
Power source
to control consol
2 P SV2 V1
S V3
V9 1
OIL HEATER
LM
E MM
3 V5 V4
B
V6
M
A
V7
P
C V10
G
V8
MKK SUPPLY
F D
Fig. 5-4

5.7.1 Start-up
Step 1
Before start-up, make sure that the valves take the following positions:
Full open: V4, V6, V7, V8, V9 and V10
Full close: V1, V3, V5 and SV2
Step 2
Set the MM function switch on the starter panel Always operate this switch as described when feed
and the LM alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor liquid flow and light liquid outlet pressure become
to OFF. necessary to adjust.
Step 3
Set power switches of the starter, and Make sure that power to the starter, and
Multi-Monitor to ON in that order. Multi-Monitor is on.
Step 4
NOTE
Step 5
NOTE
Step 6
Open the manual handle of the solenoid valve
SV2
for 20 to 30 seconds to supply the operating water
for closing bowl so that it is closed.

Step 7
of pure water, and open the globe valve V3 to that V3 is closed.
refill the bowl (supply of replacement water).
NOTE
The inside surface of the measuring hopper has a mark to show the quantity.
Step 8
Open the cock (for opening bowl) V1 to supply the Confirm the discharge operation by the increase of
operating water for opening bowl so that water in current reading or discharge sound.
the bowl (replacement water) is discharged.
NOTE
Perform flushing inside the bowl.
Step 9
When the discharge is completed, close the cock
V1 and open the solenoid valve SV2 for 20 to 30
seconds to supply the operating water for closing
bowl.
Step 10
Refill the bowl with a specified quantity of pure When the refill is completed, always make sure
water using the hopper (supply of sealing water). that V3 is closed.
NOTE
Same as above step 7.
For the necessary quantity of sealing water, refer to Table 3-12 in Section 3.6.5.1.
Step 11
Open flow control valve V5 fully and then set the Make sure that the by-pass valve V8 is fully open.
MM function switch on the starter panel to ON.
After it, gradually open the feed liquid inlet valve
V7 for feeding.

Step 12
After the feeding, close the glove valve for return Check that the flow rate displayed on the
V4, regulate the by-pass valve V8 and feed control Multi-Monitor is the predetermined value.
After the feeding, make sure that no oil leaks
out in the sludge outlet side and heavy liquid
outlet side.
NOTE
Step 13
within ±15% of the set pressure, and changes to
continuous lighting when it is within ±3%.
NOTE
Step 14
Change the MM function switch on the starter The MM function switch in the ON position causes
panel from OFF to ON, and then set the LM alarm a FEED signal to be issued from the starter to the
output switch in the Multi-Monitor to ON. Multi-Monitor, making the Leakage Monitor
operative.
! CAUTION
(i) Set the MM function switch on the starter panel to OFF position.
(iii) Place the MM function switch on the starter panel back into the ON position.

Sludge discharge procedure
To have sludge discharge effected during feeding operation;
1. Set the MM function switch on the starter panel to OFF to make the Leakage Monitor
Function of the Multi-Monitor inoperative.
2. Open the circulation valve V4 and close the feed liquid inlet valve V5 to stop oil feed to the
oil purifier.
3. Accomplish Steps 7, 8 and 9 to let sludge discharge take place.
4. Then, accomplish Steps 10, 11 and 12 to resume oil feeding.
In order to prevent an incorrect alarm, please carry out operation of Procedure 12 within 40
seconds after setting the MM functional switch to ON.
! CAUTION
In the lubricating oil treatment, introduce washing water into the bowl to clean at intervals of 6
to 8 hours before sludge discharge operation. (Carry out according to the operation procedure
for sludge discharge.) The bowl washing process is carried out after sludge discharge. For
necessary quantity of washing water, refer to Table 3-14 in Section 3.6.6.
Failure to clean the bowl may affect the purifier's performance or cause mechanical troubles.

5.7.2 Stop
! WARNING
bearing section) is present, shut off the supply of feed liquid, then immediately depress the
[Stop] button on the starter to stop the purifier.
Step 1
Set the MM function switch on the starter panel to
OFF.
Step 2
Step 3
After fully open the glove valve for return V4 and
by-pass valve V8, close the feed liquid inlet valve
V7.
Step 4
of water, and open the globe valve V3 to refill the that V3 is closed.
bowl (supply of replacement water).
NOTE
Step 5
Open the cock V1 for approximately 2 seconds to Confirm the discharge operation by the increase of
discharge the sludge. current reading or discharge sound.
After this discharge, close cock V1.
Step 6
Depress the [STOP] push button of the starter to
stop the motor.

Step 7
NOTE
Step 8
Set power switches of the Multi-Monitor, and starter Make sure that power to the Multi-Monitor, and
to OFF in that order. starter has been cut off.

6 Suspension
If the oil purifier will not be used for a long period of time (more than 3 months) carry out the following
inspection, maintenance and service activities.
6.1 Preparations for Suspension

1. The frame and sludge cover should be disassembled for cleaning. After completely removing
moisture, apply rust-preventive oil all over the inside surface.
2. After disassembling and cleaning, the bowl should be applied lubricating oil, then re-assembled.
Apply rust-preventive oil on the outside surface of the bowl, and store it separately without
re-assembling in the vertical shaft.
3. The vertical and horizontal shafts should be disassembled for cleaning. After cleaning, apply
rust-preventive oil all over the surface, then re-assemble them in the purifier main body.
4. The inside surface of the gear case should be applied rust-preventive oil after cleaning. Do not refill
lubricating oil before starting operation.
5. After disassembling and cleaning, the gear pump should be applied lubricating oil, then
re-assembled. Accumulated oil, if present in the pump connecting tube, should be completely
removed in advance so that it from does not flow into the gear pump.
6. Close the source valve of the operating water pipe, then drain water from the pipe and open the
flange.
7. Place appropriate desiccant in the Multi-Monitor.
! CAUTION
Place appropriate desiccant in the starter, control panel and Multi-Monitor and wrap them
closely in vinyl film sheet or the like. Condensation due to significant moisture may cause
rust inside. Close the butterfly valve at the sludge outlet.
Shut the butterfly valve. If the butterfly valve is open during suspension, vapors from the
sludge tank may cause the shaft system to be oxidized.

6.2 Maintenance during Suspension
6.2.1 Purifier main body and mechanical components
Carry out the turning of the vertical shaft for 2 or 3 minutes by hand at least once a week.
Carry out quarterly inspections, centering on the bearing section, to make sure of freedom
from rust.
Carry out the 6-month periodical inspection and execute the rust prevention measures.
6.2.2 Electrical component

Carry out the 6-month periodical inspection and replace desiccants, then perform complete seal-up.
6.3 Resuming Operation

Before resuming the operation, carry out inspections according to “6.1.4 Inspections prior to running”.
On the electrical components perform insulation checks on each terminal and coil to make sure they
have a dielectric resistance 1 MΩ or greater.
6.4 Other
! CAUTION
When the purifier has not been used for a long period of time (more than 3 months), carry out
inspections centering on the bearing section prior to resuming the operation.
Check that the bearings are all rust-free.
Be sure to replace rusted bearings.
Be sure to oil the bearings before starting the operation.

MITSUBISHI
SELFJECTOR
GENIUS -SERIES
Instruction Manual
Operation Manual 3A
(GBC-1, GBC-2)
for English

IMPORTANT
This manual has been edited primarily to give instructions for processing mineral
oils such as fuel oils and lubricating oils.
This manual also contains the instructions for the optional equipment available for
the SELFJECTOR and GBC-1 and GBC-2 automatic control panels. The descriptions
for the optional equipment are clearly identified with the options’ specifications.
Confirm the specifications in the furnished documents and read only the portions
that apply to the options you have purchased.
SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual 3A

WARNING
This instruction manual is a guide for using an automatic discharge type oil purifier, the "Mitsubishi
SELFJECTOR Genius Series" (hereinafter referred to as the SELFJECTOR).
The SELFJECTOR is a centrifugal separator rotating at high speeds. Please read through this manual
and obtain a complete understanding of the contents of the manual before using the SELFJECTOR.
Handle the SELFJECTOR safely and operate it in the right way to get the best service.
The Instruction Manual for the SELFJECTOR is configured as shown on the

following page. This volume is one of the manuals composing Part 4,
Operation Manual 3A.
Be sure to use the appropriate manuals and have a complete

understanding of the contents of the manual before starting your work.
NOTE
If you purchase the SJ700, the "Mitsubishi SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual for Model SJ700" and one
of the Part 4 manuals that matches the automatic control panel specification will be supplied.

Intended
Part

①②③④
1 Rigging Procedure Manual Information for transportation, handling and storage of the
machine
O O
O O
Multi-Monitor
O O
Function, operation and maintenance information on O O
automatic control panel GBC-1 and GBC-2
Operation Manual 3C Precautions for safety
O O
NOTE
The Part 4 manuals (Operation Manuals 3A ＆ 3B) deal with the following types of the automatic control
Automatic control systems: GBC-1・GBC-2・GSH-1

CONTENTS
1. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY.................................................................................. 1-1

1.1. SYMBOLS ASSOCIATED WITH SAFETY .................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY ................................................................................................... 1-2
2. OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL .................................................... 2-1
3. FUNCTIONS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL .................................................. 3-1
4. CONTROL UNIT ........................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1. OUTSIDE VIEW OF CONTROL UNIT......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2. FUNCTIONS OF ALARM LEDS .................................................................................................. 4-4
5. TERMINAL UNIT........................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1. OUTSIDE VIEW OF TERMINAL UNIT ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2. FUNCTIONS OF INPUT AND OUTPUT INDICATION LEDS ...................................................... 5-2
6. TIMER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES .................................................................... 6-1

6.1. TIMES TO BE SET FOR TIMERS ............................................................................................... 6-1
6.2. FRONT VIEW OF TIMER INDICATION/SETTING PARTS ......................................................... 6-3
6.3. TIMER SETTING PROCEDURES............................................................................................... 6-4
6.4. TIMER ELAPSED TIME INDICATION PROCEDURES............................................................... 6-7
7. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 7-1
8. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ........................................................................ 8-1

8.1. AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL ................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2. PURIFIER .................................................................................................................................... 8-1
9. AUTOMATIC OPERATION........................................................................................ 9-1

9.1. PROCEDURES FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF ONE SELFJECTOR ONLY ..................... 9-1
9.2. PROCEDURES FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF TWO SELFJECTORS ............................. 9-4
9.3. SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST...................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4. AUTOMATIC STOP..................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.5. EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................................................... 9-4
10. ALARMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS (SJ-G SERIES) ...................................... 10-1

10.1. "LEAK": OIL LEAKAGE ALARM ................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 . "NDIS": NO OPENING OF BOWL ALARM .............................................................................. 10-2
10.3 . "HTMP": OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM ........................................................................ 10-3
10.4 . "VIBR": ABNORMAL VIBRATION .......................................................................................... 10-4
11. ALARMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS (SJ700) .................................................. 11-1

11.1. "LEAK": OIL LEAKAGE ALARM ................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2. "NDIS": NO SHUTTING OF BOWL ALARM .............................................................................. 11-2
11.3. "HTMP": OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM ........................................................................... 11-3

11.4. "VIBR": ABNORMAL VIBRATION ............................................................................................. 11-4
12. SELECTING OPERATION MODE ........................................................................... 12-1

12.1. 2-STAGE PURIFIER OPERATION ........................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 CLARIFIER OPERATION .......................................................................................................... 12-2
13. MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1. PILOT LAMP "AUTO. RUNNING" FAILS TO LIGHT ................................................................. 13-1
13.2. REPLACEMENT OF AUXILIARY RELAY ................................................................................. 13-3
13.3. REPLACEMENT OF FUSE ....................................................................................................... 13-4
14. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET ............................................................. 14-1

14.1. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET (GBC-1, GBC-2) .................................................... 14-1
14.2. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET (SJ700).................................................................. 14-3
15. TIMING CHART ....................................................................................................... 15-1

15.1. SJ-G SERIES ............................................................................................................................ 15-1
15.2. SJ700 ........................................................................................................................................ 15-3
16. SCHEMATIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM (SJ-G SERIES) ....................................... 16-1

16.1. SJ-G SERIES （AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL GBC-2） .................................................... 16-2
17. SCHEMATIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM (SJ700) ................................................... 17-1

17.1. SJ700 （AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL GBC-2） ................................................................ 17-2

1.PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY
Prior to use, carefully read through the "Precautions for Safety", and operate the SELFJECTOR in the
right way.
The precautions for safety in this instruction manual are intended for enabling the user to use the
SELFJECTOR safely and properly, and protecting the user from personal injury and damage. Carefully
read through the precautions until you have a complete understanding before performing any job or
procedure for operation or maintenance of the SELFJECTOR.
1.1.SYMBOLS ASSOCIATED WITH SAFETY
In this instruction manual, the precautions are headed by the following symbols. Since all of them
are important precautions associated with safety, be sure to strictly observe them.
DANGER: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not heeded, will result
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not heeded, could result
CAUTION: Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not heeded, may result in minor or
moderate injury or damage to the machine or facilities.
NOTE: Indicates the items which should be done or which will be of help if kept in mind for
operating the machine or performing work.
SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual 1-1 Operation Manual 3A

1.2.PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY
CAUTION
The automatic control panel is a part of the equipment designed for automatic operation of the
SELFJECTOR. Improper handling of the panel could cause malfunctions and jeopardize your
safety. Before operation, maintenance and inspection of the panel, thoroughly read through this
manual and pay special heed to your safety when using the panel.
• Do not attempt disassembly and reworking of the control panel without permission of
Mitsubishi Kakoki.
• Never place the equipment in a position close to flammable materials.

If it is placed in a position close to flammable materials, an explosion or fire could result.
• Before proceeding with wiring, check to ensure that the input power supply to the system is
OFF.
There is danger of an electrical shock.
• Make sure that wiring is done by qualified electrical engineers.
• Connect the equipment to the hull in an electrically effective way by use of the ground
terminal of the panel.
(Make sure that the equipment is grounded.)
• Check to ensure that the rated voltage and frequency of the panel coincide with those of the
power supply.
Should questions arise concerning the contents of the manual,

please contact Mitsubishi Kakoki or your nearest Mitsubishi
Kakoki service agent.

2.OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL
The automatic control panel is designed for automatic operation of the Mitsubishi SELFJECTOR.
<Automatic Operation Processes>
Closes the main cylinder of the bowl → [Supplies sealing water] → Supplies feed oil (purifier operation) →
[Supplies replacement water] → Opens the main cylinder of the bowl (discharges sludge).
The automatic control panel consists of the following components.

(1) Control switches, pilot lamps, fuses, power supply
(2) Control unit (including timer functions)
(3) Terminal unit (including auxiliary relays and fuses)

3. FUNCTIONS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL
described below.
① ⑤
電源 ④
切入
⑥ ③
Fig. 3-1 GBC-1

① ⑤
⑧
⑩
電源
⑥ 切入
③ ④ ⑦ ②
Fig. 3-2 GBC-2

① "CONT. SOURCE"
Lights when the power is supplied to the automatic control panel.
② "ON-OFF"
③ "AUTO. START"
The automatic running start switch. The pilot lamp stays ON during automatic running.
④ "AUTO. STOP"
When this button is pressed during automatic running, the SELFJECTOR automatically shuts down
after completion of the process to discharge sludge.
⑤ "ALARM"
When any alarm occurs during operation, the pilot lamp comes on. The type of alarm that has
occurred cam be identified on the graphic panel.
⑥ "ALARM RESET"
When an alarm occurs, the pilot lamp is lighted and kept ON. To put out the pilot lamp, press this
button.
In the case of GBC-2, pressing this button enables selection of No. 1 SELFJECTOR or No.2
SELFJECTOR status for monitoring as desired on the graphic panel. To clear the retained alarm,
hold the button down for 2 seconds or longer.
⑦ "DISCHG. TEST"
⑧ "EMERG. STOP"
⑨ “MM FUNC.”
This is a selector switch for ON/OFF control of FEED signals from the control panel to the Multi
Monitor. When the [MM ON] lamp is off, no FEED signal is output from the control panel to the Multi
Monitor even during oil feed. Each time this button is pressed, the green [MM ON] lamp (LED) goes
on and out alternately.
⑩ “GRAPHIC PANEL”
On this graphic panel, the operational status of the SELFJECTOR, bowl operating water solenoid
valves (SV1 - 3) and 3-way solenoid valve (SV4) and the type of alarm can be identified.
SELFJECTOR monitor selection : GREEN

SV1～4 : GREEN
Alarm (LEAK, NO-DIS) : RED

4. CONTROL UNIT
The control unit is a controller with a built-in logic for automatic operation of the SELFJECTOR. The
control unit also contains the timer function.
4.1. OUTSIDE VIEW OF CONTROL UNIT
The control unit consists of alarm indication LEDs and timer indication/setting parts. (For details,
refer to Fig. 4-1 Outside View of Control Unit (for GBC-1) and Fig. 4-2 Outside View of Control
Unit (for GBC-2)) It also has connectors for connection of the unit to the terminal unit, etc.
Alarm inditing
LEDs
ALARM
NO.1 OPTION NO.1
Optional Function
SET.MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1
Selector Sw itch
MIN.
MODE
SEC.
MON.MODE
6789 456 45 6
AB D
2345
23
23
78
78
Tim er Indication
C
EF 1 9 01 9 01
0
Setting Parts
T.SEL 101(102) 100(101) MW
T.SET
CN4
Connector Term inal
(No.1 M achine)
CN1
Pow er Term inal
Fig. 4-1 Outside View of Control Unit (for GBC-1)

NO.1 NO.2
Alarm Indicating
LEDs
ALARM
NO.1 OPTION NO.1 NO.2 OPTION
NO.2
Optional Function
SET.MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 No.1 SEL.
Selector Sw itch
MIN.
MODE
SEC.
MON.MODE No.2 SEL.
6789 456 45 6
AB D
2345
23
23
78
78
Tim er Indication
C
EF 1 9 01 9 01
0
Setting Parts
T.SEL 101(10 2 ) 10 0(10 1 ) MW
T.SET
CN4 CN5
Connector Term inal Connector Term inal
(No.2 M achine)
(No.1 M achine)
CN1
Pow er Term inal
Fig. 4-2 Outside View of Control Unit (for GBC-2)

Table 4-1 Description of Individual Parts of Control Unit
Symbol
Name Symbols in parentheses
are for No. 2 machine
DISP1-DISP3 7-segment LEDs which indicate the elapsed or set time
of the timer. Use the MODE switch to change the
indications.
MODE Use the switch to switch the DISP1-DISP3 timer
indicators between elapsed time and set time. At the
MON. MODE side, the elapsed time is indicated. At the
SET. MODE side, the set time is indicated and can be
changed.
SEL. Use the switch to switch between the machine No. 1
SEL and No. 2 SEL for timer indication and setting. At
No. 1, machine No. 1 is selected. At No. 2, machine No.
2 is selected. This switch is equipped only GBC-2
T.SEL. Use the switch to select a timer No. whose setting is to
be indicated or changed.
Timer Nos. 0 through F
Timer Indication / (A through C, and F are not used.)
Setting Parts T.SET 101 (102) Use the switch to select the higher digit of a timer setting
time.
Setting value: 0-9
T.SET 100 (101) Use the switch to select the lower digit of a timer setting
time.
Setting value: 0-9
MW. Use the switch to change the timer set time.
When this switch is pressed, the set time of the timer
No. selected by the T.SEL. is changed to the value
selected by the T.SET.
MIN. Comes on when the currently used timer indicates time
in minutes.
SEC. Comes on when the currently used timer indicates time
in seconds.
In the case that even MIN. or SEC. which are not lighted
MIN.+SEC. counter(Timer No. E) is shown
Alarm Indication ALARM When an alarm occurs in the Selfjectors, the associated
LEDs LED comes on.
The LEDs in the upper stage are for the No. 1 machine,
whereas those in the lower stage are for the No. 2
machine.
Optional Function NO. 1 OPTION When the optional detector is to be used, set the switch
Selector Switches (NO. 2 OPTION) to ON to enable the optional function.
Power Terminal CN1 5V and 24V power supplies are connected.
Connector CH4 Connected to the terminal unit.
Terminal

4.2. FUNCTIONS OF ALARM LEDs
The alarm LEDs on the control unit enable you to identify the type of alarm. For details, refer to the
following table. (Note: Refer to Fig. 4-1 Outside View of Control Unit (for GBC-1) and Fig. 4-2 Outside
View of Control Unit (for GBC-2).)
Table 4-2 Alarm Indication LEDs
Name Symbol Function

LEAK Comes on when “Oil leakage” alarm occurs.
NDIS Comes on when “No openign of Bowl” alarm occurs.
(Detection Function : Option)
In the case of the SJ700, the LED comes on when the
main cylinder of the bowl fails to close.
Alarm Indication
HTMP Comes on when “Oil high temperature” alarm occurs.
LEDs (ALARM)
LTMP Comes on when “oil low temperature” alarm occurs.
VIBR Comes on when “abnormal vibration” alarm occurs.
(Detector: Option)

5. TERMINAL UNIT
The terminal unit inputs and outputs signals from/to external devices. Two units, one for the No. 1
machine, and one for the No. 2 machine, are provided. The terminal unit is connected to the control unit
through a connector.
5.1. OUTSIDE VIEW OF TERMINAL UNIT
The terminal unit consists of input/output indication LEDs, auxiliary relays, fuse, and external line
terminal boards. (For details, refer to Fig. 5-1.)
Power Terminal Fuse Auxiliary Relay Switch Connector Terminal Input Indication LEDs
SV2 VS DD LT 7SJ
SV1 LM MTR HT C OP LM I
SV4 VSR DISP LT B ALM

SV3 FED MSTP HT B AL C S OP
External Line Terminal Board Output Indication LEDs
Fig. 5-1 Outside View of Terminal Unit
Name Function
Input Indication LEDs Indicate the input status of signals. They come on when the corresponding front panel
pushbuttons are turned ON or when ON signals are issued from the corresponding detectors.
Output Indication LEDs Indicate the output status of signals. They come on when “ON” signals are output to the lamps
on the front panel of the control unit, when “Open” signals are output to the solenoid valves,
and when command signals are output to the detectors, respectively.
Auxiliary Relays Cause the lamps on the front panel of the control unit to illuminate, the solenoid valves to open,
or output signals to the individual detectors to be issued. The auxiliary relays are of the socket
type. When any of the auxiliary relays fails, it can be replaced independently.
Fuse Blows when an overcurrent flows to open or close the solenoid valve.
Power Terminal The power supply for opening the solenoid valve and the power supplies for the individual
detectors are connected
Connector Terminal Connected to the control unit.
External Line Terminal Used to connect external lines.
Board
Switches (SSW1, Used for switchover of starter stop output and alarm cancel signal output contacts Break and
SSW2) Make. *1. Do not change the settings done at the time of shipment from the factory.
Upper side of switch: Break Contact Lower side of switch: Make Contact
*1. For switchover of contacts Break and Make, the internal wiring in the control panel and emergency
switch contacts must also be changed. Therefore, you cannot change over contacts Break and Make
after shipment from the factory.

5.2. FUNCTIONS OF INPUT AND OUTPUT INDICATION LEDs
Name Symbol Function

Input Indication LM Comes on when the Multi-Monitor is activated.
LEDs In the case of the SJ700, the LM comes on when the heavy liquid
detector (WFR) is activated.
VS Comes on when the vibration switch is activated.
MTR Stays ON during operation of the motor of the SELFJECTOR.
DD Stays ON during operation of the Multi-Monitor.
In the case of the SJ700, the DD comes on when the sludge discharge
detector (SD) is activated.
HT Comes on when the processing oil at the inlet of the purifier has a high
temperature. (Detection Function : Option)
LT Comes on when the processing oil at the inlet of the purifier has a low
temperature. (Detection Function : Option)
C-OP Comes on when the clarifier operation mode is selected by terminal
board jumpering.
7SJ Comes on when the SJ700 operation mode is selected by terminal
board jumpering.
LM-I Comes on when LM interlock signal is input from the console. *
S-OP *1 Comes on when the 2-stage purifier operation mode is selected by
terminal board jumpering.
Output Indication SV1 Comes on when the bowl opening water solenoid valve is energized.
LEDs SV2 Comes on when the bowl closing water solenoid valve is energized.
SV3 Comes on when the sealing/replacement water solenoid valve is
energized.
SV4 Comes on when the solenoid valve for the feed valve is energized.
VSR Comes on when the vibration switch reset coil is energized.
(Detector: Option)
FED Stays ON while the feeding process is in progress. (For interlocking
Multi-Monitor)
MSTP Comes on when stop signal is output to the starter.
DISP Stays ON while the discharge process is in progress. (For interlocking
Multi-Monitor)
(Detector: Option)
HT-B Comes on when the block signal of processing oil high temperature
alarm is output to the console. *2
LT-B Comes on when the block signal of processing oil low temperature
alarm is output to the console. *2
AL-C Comes on when an alarm cancel signal is output to the starter. *
ALM Comes on when a collective alarm signal is output to the console. *2
*1. The LEDs of the No. 2 machine terminal board only are enabled.
NOTE
*1....The starter refers to the separately installed starter for the SELFJECTOR motor.
*2....The console refers to the control console used for remote control.

6. TIMER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES
6.1. TIMES TO BE SET FOR TIMERS
The times to be set for the timers vary with the following factors.
o Model number of SELFJECTOR

o Type of feed oil
o Operating water pressure and sealing water pressure
It is therefore necessary to set the timers so as to match the field conditions. When a test run and
adjustments are performed by Mitsubishi Kakoki service personnel, the timers are set to the proper
values suitable for the field conditions before handover. If changes occur in the properties of feed oil
thereafter, refer to the following explanations and change the set times properly.
Table 6-1 Timer Nos. and Uses (Standard)
Timer No. Use Time that can be set

0 Interval between each solenoid valve operation 0-60s
1 Bowl opening time 0-60s
2 Replacement water supply time 0-60s
3 Sealing water supply time 0-60s
4 Intermittent bowl closing water supply intervals 0-60 min
5 Sludge discharge intervals 0-720 min (set in steps of 10 min)
6 Intermittent water supply time for closing bowl 0-60s
D Bowl cleaning water supply time 0-60s
E Bowl cleaning frequency setting 0-99times
Set the following timers when the optional detectors or functions are to be used.
Table 6-2 Timer Nos. and Uses (Optional)

7 Oil high temperature alarm block time 0-30 min
Set the time required before the processing oil
temperature stabilizes after the start of feeding. Even
if the processing oil has a high temperature, no alarm
is set off until the set time elapses. (Alarm block signal
is output.)
8 Oil low temperature alarm block time 0-30 min
Set the time required before the processing oil
temperature stabilizes after the start of feeding. Even
if the processing oil has a low temperature, no alarm is
set off until the set time elapses. (Alarm block signal is
output.)
9 Abnormal vibration block time 0-30 min
Set the time required before the SELFJECTOR motor
reaches the rated speed after turning the power ON.
Even if the vibrator switch is activated, no alarm is
produced until the set time elapses.

Table 6-3 Standard Setting Times for Timers
Timer
ITEM No. Unit SJ10G SJ20G SJ30G SJ50G SJ60G SJ70G SJ100G SJ120G SJ150G
Interval 0 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20
Opening bowl 1 sec 3

Replacement
water 2 sec 5 8 12 14 14 19 29 29 32
Sealing water 3 sec 9 10 12 18 18 20 32 32 27

Intermittent water
supply 4 min 15
Operating water
supply for closing
bowl 6 sec 5
Discharge interval 5 min Refer to the NOTE 1)
Washing Fuel oil 0

D sec
Water
Lub. oil 12 13 19 26 26 31 48 48 47
Number of
Fuel oil tim 0
times of E
e
washing Lub. oil 6
NOTE
1) The times for sealing water and replacement water timers shown in the table assume that the
supply flow rate is 8L/min for the SJ10G-30G, 12L/min for the SJ50G-70G, 16L/min for the
SJ100G-120G, 18L/min for the SJ150G, and 5L/min for the SJ700. Be sure to measure the
actual flow rate and set the times to proper values.
2) There is not a washing process in the case of the fuel oil purifier.
Table 6-4 shows the general discharge intervals for processing fuel oils and lubricating oils. The table is
intended for general guidance.
Table 6-4
Fuel oils Lubricating oils

Fuel oil A Fuel oil C Cross-head Trunk piston
(380mm2/s at 50℃) engine engine
Number of times of
discharge 12 24 12 24
(times/day)
Discharge interval
120 60 120 60
(min.)
Number of times of
washing 0 0 2 4
(times/day)

6.2. FRONT VIEW OF TIMER INDICATION/SETTING PARTS
Mode Selector Switch for switch-

モード選択スイッチ Unit 単位表示部
Indicators 数値表示部
Value Indicators for indication of
over of設定時間／設定時間の切り替え
elapsed time/set time Min/Sec
分／秒 elapsed time/set time of timer
タイマーの経過時間／設定時間
SET. MODE DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 No.1 SEL
MIN.
MODE SEL
SEC.
MON. MODE No.2 SEL
89
67 45 6 45 6
AB
45
2 3
2 3
7 8
7 8
CD
Machine Number
号機選択スイッチ
23
EF 9 9
01 01 01 Selector Switch
T.SEL. 101 (102) 100 (101) MW

T.SET
タイマ番号選択
Timer No. Setting
設定値選択 Value Set設定値記憶
Value
スイッチ Switch
Selector Selector
スイッチSwitch スイッチ
Memory Switch
Fig. 6-1

6.3. TIMER SETTING PROCEDURES
To set a time for a timer, proceed as described below.
① Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON", and check to see that the pilot lamp "CONT.
SOURCE" and the value indicator LEDs of the control unit are ON.
② Operate the individual switches in the following sequence.
Select machine No. 1 or Set the mode selector Select a timer number to
2 by the machine switch (MODE) to SET. set by the timer number
number selector switch. MODE. selector switch (T.SEL).

(2 digits)
If the set time is in excess of the value that can be set, the maximum value that can be set is set.
NOTE
o For information on the timer numbers and uses, refer to Section 6.1.
o Set the discharge interval timer (timer No. 5) in steps of 10 minutes. To set the timer to 180
minutes for example, set the timer time setting switches T.SET 101(102)and 100(101)to 1 and 8,
respectively.
o The unit of time for timer numbers 0 through 3, 6 and D is a second.
(The unit indicator LED SEC. lights.)
The unit of time for timer numbers 4, 5 and 7 through 9 is a minute.
(The unit indicator LED MIN. lights.)
Timer number E (counter) counts the number of times.
o Time numbers A-C and F are not used.
When any of the timer numbers A-C and F is selected, the SEC., MIN. and set value indicator
LED go out.

6.3.1. Calling Set Time
It is possible to have the set time indicated on the value indicators before starting automatic
operation or during automatic operation. To call the set time of timer No.5 (Discharge Interval)
for the machine No.1 which has been set to 60 minutes, for example, proceed as described
below.
Set the SEL. Set the MODE Set the T.SEL.

to No. 1. to SET. to 5.
Machine No. 1 Timer No.
Then the indications will be presented as shown in the following table.
Unit Indicator
Control Switch Value Indicator
SEC. MIN.
No.1 SEL. Indefinite Indefinite Indefinite
000 to 999
SEL.
No.2 SEL.
SET. MODE Same as above (Flashing) Same as above Same as above
MODE
MON. MODE
789 060 (Flashing)

23 6
AB
45
C DE
F01
T.SEL.
*1
Fig. 6-2
*1. To operate the T.SEL. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something else.
And turn crack of knob as point to the number.

6.3.2. Changing Set Time
To change the set time of 60 minutes in the foregoing section to 180 minutes;
Set the T.SET Set the T.SET Press the MW

101 (102) to 1. 100 (101) to 8. switch.
The indications will be presented as shown in the following table.
Be sure to perform this procedure only after calling out the set time according to the instructions
given in Paragraph 6.3.1 “Calling Set Time”.
Unit Indicator
SEC. MIN.
45 6 45 6 060 (Flashing)
2 3
2 3
7 8
7 8
9 9
01 01
101 (102) 100 (101)

T.SET
*1
180 (Flashing)
MW.
Press
Fig. 6-3
*1. To operate the T.SEL. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something else.
And turn crack of knob as point to the number.

6.4. TIMER ELAPSED TIME INDICATION PROCEDURES
To monitor the elapsed time of a timer, proceed as described below. You can find the elapsed time
conveniently during operation of the purifier.
To find the elapsed time of timer No. 5 (Discharge Interval) of machine No. 1 for example, proceed
as described below.
Set the SEL Set the MODE Set the T.SEL.

to No. 1. to MON. to 5.
Machine No. 1 Timer No.
If the elapsed time is 23 minutes for example, the value indicators will indicate 023.
The unit of time is:

Seconds (s) when the unit indicator LED SEC. is ON.
Minutes (min) when the unit indicator LED MIN. is ON.
Unit Indicator
SEC. MIN.
No.1 SEL. Indefinite Indefinite Indefinite
000 to 999
SEL.
No.2 SEL.
*1.
SET. MODE Same as above (Steadily ON) Same as above Same as above
MODE
MON. MODE
789
023 (Steadily ON)
23 6
AB
45
C DE
F01 Elapsed time indicated

T.SEL. LED MIN. ON
*2
Fig. 6-4
*1. Provided on GBC-2 only.
*2. To operate the T.SEL. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something else.And turn
crack of knob as pointed to the number.

7. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
To use an optional detector, the optional function is to be enabled either by using the Optional Function
Selector Switch on the control unit or by bridging the terminals on the control panel terminal board with a
jumper wire. For information on the types of functions of the options, refer to Table 7-1.
The optional function selector switches are turned ON when they are set in the upper position and OFF
when they are set in the lower position. Accordingly, in the state shown in Fig. 7-1, only the discharge
detector is activated.
Since the optional functions are set to meet your requirements and specifications before shipment from
the factory, there is usually no need for changing the settings. Before operation, however, confirm the
settings.
NO.1 OPTION
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-1 Optional Function Selector Switch

Table 7-1
Terminal Board Function

Optional Function One for machine ON OFF
Name
Selector Switch No. 2 is shown in (Terminal board (Terminal board
parentheses short-circuited) open-circuited)
Discharge Detector 1(1) — To enable Discharge To disable Discharge
[Sludge Discharge Detection Function or Detection Function or
switch] [Sludge Discharge switch] [Sludge Discharge Switch]
Oil high temperature 2(2) — To enable oil high To disable oil high
alarm temperature alarm (block) temperature alarm (block)
Oil low temperature 3(3) — To enable oil low To disable oil low
alarm temperature alarm (block) temperature alarm (block)
OP/OC 4(4) 1OP1-1OP2 To perform clarifier To perform purifier
(2OP1-2OP2) operation operation
SJ700 OPERATION 5(5) 1SJ1-1SJ2 To operate SJ700 To operate SJ-F series
(2SJ1-2SJ2)
Vibration switch 6(6) — To enable vibration switch To disable vibration switch
2-stage purifier -(7) — To enable 2-stage purifier To disable 2-stage purifier
operation (SO1-SO2) operation operation
LM signal interlock 8(8) — To enable the function To disable the function
[caution] *1 which temporarily described at left
invalidates the leakage
detection Function by an
external signal
The statement in [ ] applies when the SJ700 is operated.
*1. When the SJ700 is operated, be sure to switch 8 to [OFF].
NOTE
Before performing the procedures for changing the settings of the optional functions, set the
power switch of the control panel to "OFF".

8. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
8.1.AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL
CAUTION
o Refer to Section 6.1 and check to ensure that each of the timers has been set to the proper
value suitable for the actual conditions (type of feed oil, model number of SELFJECTOR,
working water pressure, etc.).
o Pay special heed to the discharge interval timer "C015", as it affects the quantity of sludge to
be accumulated in the bowl of the SELFJECTOR. Make sure that the timer is set to the
proper value suitable for the type of feed oil. (To change the set time, refer to Section 6.)
o When you perform setting change of an option function (ex. changing a dipswitch and so on),
please turn [OFF] the power supply of a control panel for safety.
8.2.PURIFIER
8.2.1.SJ-G SERIES
For information on the SELFJECTOR and valves, refer to the separate "Operation Manual 2".
Refer to the attached 14.1 Automatic Operation Flow Sheet (GBC-1, GBC-2) as well.
CAUTION
o Make sure that the selection of the gravity disc is correct.
o Make sure position of the switches in the Multi-Monitor (MM) is right.
o Make sure the set pressure value of the operating water reducing valve is right.
o About details of the above, refer to Section 3.3, 3.6 and 3.7, 4, 5.5 and so on in "Operation
Manual 2".
8.2.2. SJ700
For information on the SELFJECTOR and valves, refer to the separate "Instruction Manual".
Refer to the attached 14.2 Automatic Operation Flow Sheet (SJ700) as well.
CAUTION
o Make sure that the selection of the gravity disc is correct.
o About details of the above, refer to the separate " Instruction Manual ".

9. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The procedures for automatic operation include:

o Procedures for automatic operation of one SELFJECTOR
o Procedures for automatic operation of two SELFJECTORs
9.1. PROCEDURES FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF ONE SELFJECTOR ONLY
Step 1. Start the SELFJECTOR by the separately installed starter.
Step 2. Set the power switch on the automatic control panel to "ON".
The pilot lamp "CONT. SOURCE" (WL) will light.
Step 3. After checking the ammeter to confirm that the SELFJECTOR has reached the rated
speed, press the pushbutton "AUTO. START" on the automatic control panel.
Solenoid valve SV2 will be operated, the bowl closing water will be supplied, and the main
cylinder of the bowl will be closed.
Step 4. The sludge discharge process timer and discharge interval timer in the automatic control
panel will operate in the following sequence for continuous purifier operation.
(Refer to the attached 17. Automatic Operation Flow Sheet and 18. Timing Chart as well.)
Interval timer 0 starts operation.
Timer 0 ... When the timer expires,

o Solenoid valve SV2 will be deactivated to stop supplying bowl-closing water.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will be activated to supply replacement water into the bowl.
o At the same time, replacement water setting timer 2 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying replacement water.
o Solenoid valve SV1 will be activated to supply bowl opening water, and the bowl will
be opened to discharge replacement water.
o At the same time, bowl opening water supply time setting timer 1 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV1 will be deactivated to stop supplying bowl opening water.
o Solenoid valve SV2 will operate to supply bowl closing water, and the bowl will be
closed.
o At the same time, timer 0 will start operation.
Timer 0...When the timer expires,
o Solenoid valve SV3 will be activated to supply sealing water into the bowl. At the
same time, sealing water supply time setting timer 3 will start operation.

o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying sealing water.

o Solenoid valve SV4 for feed valve (SV5 in the case of the SJ700) will be activated to
open feed valve CV1. The feed oil will then be forced into the SELFJECTOR to start
purifying.
o Pilot lamp "FEEDING" will come on.
o The discharge interval timer (timer 5) will operate. The CV1 will continue to open as
long as the set time.
o While the feed timer is in operation, bowl closing water solenoid valve SV2 will
intermittently open to supply the bowl closing water.
More specifically, the following operations will be repeated:
Timer 4 will operate (intermittent bowl closing water supply interval) -> Timer 4 will
expire -> Timer 6 will operate (SV2 will open to supply bowl closing water) -> Timer 6
Automatically repeated during operation
will expires (SV2 will be closed) -> Timer 4 will operate.

o A "FEED" signal will be output to the Multi Monitor.
(In the case of the SJ700, this signal is output but is not used.)
o Timer 7 will operate. After the timer has expired, the "Oil high temperature alarm
block" signal output will be stopped (when the optional function selector switch 2
is ON).
o Timer 8 will operate. After the timer has expired, the "Oil low temperature alarm
block" signal output will be stopped (when the optional function selector switch 3
is ON).
Timer 5 ...When the timer expires,
o When the set time of the discharge interval timer 5 elapses, solenoid valve SV4 for
feed valve (SV5 in the case of the SJ700) will be deactivated to close feed valve CV1
and stop supplying the feed oil.
o The "FEED" signal to the Multi-monitor will be cut off.
o "DISCHARGE PROCESS" signal will be output to the Multi-Monitor. (Optional
Specification)
(In the case of the SJ700, this signal is not output.)
o "OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM BLOCK" signal will be output
(when the optional function selector switch 2 is ON).
o "OIL LOW TEMPERATURE ALARM BLOCK" signal will be output
(when the optional function selector switch 3 is ON).
Timer 0....When the timer expires,
o Solenoid valve SV3 will be activated to supply replacement water into the bowl.
o Bowl cleaning frequency timer (counter) E will operate to add one time to the current
count.
o At the same time, replacement water supply time setting timer 2 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying replacement water.
o Solenoid valve SV1 will be activated to supply the bowl opening water. The bowl will
then open to discharge sludge.
o At the same time, bowl opening water supply time setting timer 1 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV1 will be deactivated to stop supplying the bowl opening water.
closed.

Timer 0...When the timer expires, (When timer E is not counting)
o Solenoid valve SV3 will be activated to supply sealing water into the bowl. At the
same time, sealing water supply time setting timer 3 will start operation.
o At the same time, timer 0 will restart operation.
o The "DISCHARGE PROCESS" signal output to the Multi Monitor will be stopped.
(Optional Specification)
o The reset coil signal will be output to the vibration switch for a second. (Optional
Specification)

o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying sealing water.
Timer 0... When the timer expires (when timer E is counting),

o Timer 0 will restart operation.
o The "DISCHARGE PROCESS" signal output to the Multi Monitor will be stopped.
Timer 0... When the timer expires,
o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply cleaning water into the bowl.
o At the same time, timer D will start operation.
Timer D... When the timer expires,
o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying bowl-cleaning water.
o Solenoid valve SV2 will operate to supply bowl opening water, and the bowl will be
opened to discharge cleaning water.
o Solenoid valve SV1 will be deactivated to stop supplying bowl-opening water..
closed.

9.2. PROCEDURES FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF TWO SELFJECTORS
Step 1. Start both No. 1 and 2 machines by the starter.

If one of the machines is already in operation, start the other one.
Step 2. After confirming that the SELFJECTOR(s) has reached the rated speed, press the "AUTO
START" of the associated machine on the automatic control panel. Then both the No. 1
and 2 machines will automatically repeat the discharge and feed operations according to
Step 4 in Section 9.1.
9.3. SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST
During feeding operation, a sludge discharge test can be performed at any time irrespective of
the elapsed feed time. When pushbutton "DISCHG. TEST" on the automatic control panel is
pressed, the SELFJECTOR will enter the sludge discharge process in the same way as upon
expiry of the discharge interval timer (timer 5).
As soon as the sludge discharge process is completed, the SELFJECTOR will directly be
restored to the automatic operation.
9.4. AUTOMATIC STOP
Press pushbutton "AUTO. STOP" on the automatic control panel.

The SELFJECTOR will automatically stop operation after completion of the sludge discharge
process.
9.5. EMERGENCY STOP
CAUTION
When the SELFJECTOR is shut down because of an emergency, No opening of Bowl,
abnormal vibration or overload, it will stop operation without discharging the sludge
accumulated in the bowl. If the SELFJECTOR is directly restarted, the bowl might lose balance
and cause a hazardous situation. For this reason, be sure to disassemble the bowl and
remove the sludge according to "Operation Manual 2" before restarting operation.
In the case of the SJ700, refer to the "Mitsubishi SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual (Model
SJ700)".
CAUTION
The automatic control panel is electrically interlocked with the starter. Therefore, the
automatic control panel is not operable unless the SELFJECTOR is started by the starter.
To operate the SELFJECTOR, without using the automatic control panel, manually operate the
individual solenoid valves.
In cases of emergency, press pushbutton "EMERG. STOP" on the automatic control panel.
In any of the processes, the power supply to the SELFJECTOR will be cut off, and all the solenoid valves
will be closed to stop operation.

10. ALARMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS (SJ-G SERIES)
10.1. "LEAK": OIL LEAKAGE ALARM
CAUTION
Remove the cause of an alarm before pressing pushbutton "ALARM RESET".
If the feed oil or processing oil flows out toward the heavy liquid outlet side or sludge chute side
during feeding operation, and the light liquid side pressure falls, the leakage detector function (LM)
will be operated to light the fault indicating lamp on the automatic control panel and close feed valve
CV1. The SELFJECTOR will then stop operation after discharging the sludge.
If an alarm occurs, remove the cause of the alarm according to the following table. Thereafter,
press pushbutton "ALARM RESET" on the automatic control panel and perform the procedures to
restart operation.
Table 10-1
Alarm Cause Corrective Action

Oil Leakage(LEAK) 1. Sealing water/replacement water 1. Replace with non-defective parts.
If the leakage monitor solenoid valve SV3 failed to operate
function of the because of failure of timer 3 or loose
multi-monitor is contact of the relay in the automatic
operated during the control panel.
feeding process in
the automatic 2. The required quantity of sealing water 2. Adjust the set time of the timer.
operation mode, pilot was not supplied because the set
lamp "ALARM" on the time of timer 3 in the automatic control
automatic control panel was too short.
panel , and the
"LEAK" LED in the 3. No sealing water was supplied 3. Repair or replace.
graphic panel and the because of failure of sealing
automatic control water/replacement water solenoid
panel will light. The valve SV3.
SELFJECTOR will
automatically stop 4. False alarm due to Multi Monitor 4. Repair or replace.
operation after failure.
discharging sludge.

10.2 . "NDIS": NO OPENING OF BOWL ALARM
This alarm occurs when no discharge is detected by the discharge detector function (DD) despite
the fact that a DISCHARGE SLUDGE signal was sent to the bowl opening solenoid valve (SV1).
As soon as this alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR will stop operation immediately. After removal of
the cause of the alarm, press pushbutton "ALARM RESET" on the control panel and perform the
procedures to restart operation.
Table 10-2
Alarm Cause of Alarm Corrective Action

No opening of Bowl 1. The bowl failed to open because of 1. Refer to the separate "Maintenance
(NDIS) failure of the SELFJECTOR proper. Manual".
2. The bowl opening water was not 2. Repair or replace the valve with a
supplied because of failure of bowl non-defective one.
opening solenoid valve SV1.
3. SV1 failed to open because of failure 3. Replace the relay or unit with a
of the auxiliary relay or terminal unit. non-defective one.
4. Failure of Multi Monitor 4. Refer to the separate "Maintenance

Manual".
5. A fault in the water or air system 5. Refer to the separate "Maintenance

Manual".

10.3 . "HTMP": OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM
"LTMP": OIL LOW TEMPERATURE ALARM
This alarm occurs when the temperature of the processing oil becomes so high or low during
feeding operation that the thermal switch is operated. Even if this alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR
will continue to operate.
To clear the alarm, remove the cause of the alarm. Thereafter, press pushbutton "ALARM RESET"
on the control panel.
Table 10-3

Oil High Temperature 1. The temperature of the processing oil 1. Adjust the set time of the timer.
Alarm (HTMP) was not stable because of the set
time of timer 7 or 8 of the automatic
control panel was too short.
Oil Low Temperature
Alarm (LTMP) 2. The temperature regulator for the 2. Readjust or repair the temperature
processing oil failed to function regulator.
properly.
3. Thermal switch out of order 3. Replace the switch with a

non-defective one.

10.4 . "VIBR": ABNORMAL VIBRATION
This alarm occurs when the vibration switch is operated by occurrence of an abnormal vibration in
the SELFJECTOR.
As soon as the alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR will stop operation immediately.
Disassemble and check the SELFJECTOR and remove the cause of the alarm. Thereafter, press
pushbutton "ALARM RESET" on the control panel and perform the procedures to restart operation.
Table 10-4

Abnormal vibration 1. Abnormal vibration of the bowl 1. Refer to the separate "Maintenance
(VIBR) occurred because of a fault in the Manual".
SELFJECTOR proper.
2. The vibration switch was operated 2. Adjust the set time of timer 9.
because of vibration at the time of a
start, because the set time of timer 9
was too short.
3. The reset coil of the vibration switch 3. Replace the auxiliary alarm with a
was not operated because of loose non-defective one.
contact of the auxiliary relay.
4. Vibration switch out of order 4. Replace the switch with a

non-defective one.

11. ALARMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS (SJ700)
11.1. "LEAK": OIL LEAKAGE ALARM
CAUTION
Remove the cause of an alarm before pressing pushbutton "ALARM RESET".
If the processing oil leaks out toward the heavy liquid outlet side during feeding operation, the heavy
liquid detector (WFR) will be operated to light the alarm indicating lamp on the automatic control
panel and close feed valve CV1. The SELFJECTOR will automatically stop operation after
discharging sludge.
restart operation.
Table 11-1

Oil Leakage 1. Sealing water leaked toward the 1. Refer to the separate "Mitsubishi
(LEAK) heavy liquid outlet side because of a SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual
If the heavy liquid fault in the SELFJECTOR proper. (MODEL SJ700)" and make repairs.
detector is operated
during the feeding 2. Sealing water/replacement water 2. Replace with non-defective ones.
process in the solenoid valve SV3 failed to operate
automatic operation because of failure of timer 3 or loose
mode, pilot lamp contact of SV3 power feeding relay in
"ALARM" on the the automatic control panel.
automatic control
panel and the "LEAK" 3. The required quantity of sealing water 3. Adjust the set time of the timer.
LED in the automatic was not supplied because the set
control panel will time of timer 3 in the automatic control
light. The panel was too short.
SELFJECTOR will
automatically stop 4. No sealing water was supplied 4. Repair or replace.
operation after because of failure of sealing
discharging sludge. water/replacement water solenoid
valve SV3.
5. Alarm error because of failure of 5. Repair or replace.

heavy liquid detector (WFR)

11-1
11.2. "NDIS": NO SHUTTING OF BOWL ALARM
If the bowl of the SELFJECTOR fails to close during automatic operation, the sludge discharge
detector mounted to the SELFJECTOR will be operated to light the alarm indicating lamp on the
automatic control panel and close feed valve CV1. The SELFJECTOR will automatically stop
operation after discharging sludge.
restart operation.
Table 11-2

No Shutting of Bowl 1. The bowl failed to close because of a 1. Refer to the separate "Mitsubishi
(NDIS) fault in the SELFJECTOR proper. SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual
(MODEL SJ700)" and make repairs.
2. The bowl closing water was not 2. Repair or replace the valve with a
supplied because of failure of non-defective one.
solenoid valve SV2.
3. SV2 failed to operate because of 3. Replace the relay or unit with a

failure of the auxiliary relay or terminal non-defective one.
unit.
4. Failure of sludge discharge detector 4. Repair or replace the detector with a

(SD) non-defective one.
5. A fault in the water or air system 5. Repair.

11-2
11.3. "HTMP": OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM
"LTMP": OIL LOW TEMPERATURE ALARM
This alarm occurs when the temperature of the processing oil becomes so hot or low during the
feeding operation that the thermal switch is operated. Even if this alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR
will continue to operate.
To clear the alarm, remove the cause of the alarm. Thereafter, press pushbutton "ALARM RESET"
provided on the automatic control panel.
Table 11-3

Oil High Temperature 1. The temperature of the processing oil 1. Adjust the set time of the timer.
Alarm (HTMP) was not stable because of the set
time of timer 7 or 8 of the automatic
Oil Low Temperature control panel was too short.
Alarm (LTMP)
2. The temperature regulator for the 2. Readjust or repair the temperature
processing oil failed to function regulator.
properly.
3. Thermal switch out of order 3. Replace the switch with a

non-defective one.

11-3
11.4. "VIBR": ABNORMAL VIBRATION
This alarm occurs when the vibration switch is operated by occurrence of an abnormal vibration in
the SELFJECTOR.
As soon as the alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR will stop operation immediately.
Disassemble and check the SELFJECTOR and remove the cause of the alarm. Thereafter, press
pushbutton "ALARM RESET" on the control panel and perform the procedures to restart operation.
Table 11-4

Abnormal vibration 5. Abnormal vibration of the bowl 5. Refer to the separate "Maintenance
(VIBR) occurred because of a fault in the Manual".
SELFJECTOR proper.
6. The vibration switch was incorrectly 6. Adjust the set time of timer 9.
operated because of vibration at the
time of a start, because the set time of
timer 9 was too short.
7. The reset coil of the vibration switch 7. Replace the auxiliary alarm with a
was not operated because of loose non-defective one.
contact of the auxiliary relay.
8. Vibration switch out of order 8. Replace the switch with a

non-defective one.

11-4
12. SELECTING OPERATION MODE
12.1. 2-STAGE PURIFIER OPERATION
To perform a series operation with two SELFJECTORs arranged in series, enable the 2-stage
purifier operation function either by using the switch on the control panel or by bridging the terminals
on the terminal board of the control unit.
The 2-stage purifier operation function is set to OFF at the factory before shipment.
12.1.1. Operation
When the 2-stage purifier operation function is enabled, the SELFJECTOR will perform the
following operations in addition to the normal operations.
(1) When the SELFJECTOR No. 1 (No. 2) enters into the discharge process, the feed valve of
No. 2 (No.1) is closed for a time to stop the feed signal output to the multi monitor to
disable the leakage detector function.
(2) During the clarifier operation, when the SELFJECTOR No. 1 (No. 2) is stopped, No. 2
(No.1) is stopped as well. The same is true in the event that either SELFJECTOR is
stopped on an alarm signal or through the EMERG. STOP button.
12.1.2 Setting Procedures
To enable the 2-stage purifier operation function, perform either of the following setting
procedures.
(1) Set the No. 2 machine optional function selector switch "7" of the control unit to ON.
NO.2 OPTION
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(2) Bridge the external line terminals, SO1 and SO2, of machine No. 2 by a jumper wire.
NOTE
o Before changing the optional function settings, be sure to set the power switch of the
control panel to "OFF".
o For detailed information on 2-stage purifier operation, refer to the section on series
operation in "Operation Manual 1".

12.2 CLARIFIER OPERATION
To perform a clarifier operation (2-layer separate operation), enable the clarifier operation function
either by using the switch on the control unit or by bridging the terminals on the terminal board of the
control panel with a jumper wire.
The clarifier operation function is set to OFF at the factory before shipment.
12.2.1. Operation
When the clarifier operation function is enabled, the SELFJECTOR will perform the following
operation.
(1) No replacement water and no sealing water will be supplied in the discharge process.
(The timer count for replacement water (timer 2) and that for sealing water (timer 3) are
made, but the SV3 is not energized.)
12.2.2 Setting Procedures
To enable the clarifier operation function, perform either of the following setting procedures.
(1) Set the optional function selector switch "4" of the associated machine to ON.
NO.□ OPTION
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(2) Bridge the external line terminals, 1OP1 and 1OP2 (2OP1 and 2OP2)* with a jumper wire.
* The external line terminals in parentheses apply to machine No. 2.
NOTE
o Before changing the optional function settings, be sure to set the power switch of
the control panel to "OFF".
o For detailed information on clarifier operation, refer to "Operation Manual 1".

13. MAINTENANCE
13.1. PILOT LAMP "AUTO. RUNNING" FAILS TO LIGHT
During automatic operation, pilot lamp "AUTO. RUNNING" on the control panel should stay ON.
If the "AUTO. RUNNING" is OFF, the following causes are suspected.
(1) Defective pilot lamp

(2) Blown fuse
(3) Defective control unit
(4) Defective terminal unit
When the cause is (1), replace the pilot lamp with a spare one.
When the cause is (2), (3) or (4), all of the solenoid and air valves will close, and the automatic
operation function will stop.
(The SELFJECTOR, however, will continue to rotate.)
Check to locate the cause and take corrective action in the sequence shown on the following page.

Proceed as described below to locate the cause.
Troubleshooting Procedures Corrective Action
Set the power switch of the Note

control panel to "ON". (1) When the portion marked * applies, contact
Mitsubishi Kakoki or your nearest Mitsubishi
Kakoki agent.
The "CONT. SOURCE" pilot OFF

lamp on the control panel
After setting the power switch of the control
panel to "OFF", replace the power fuse with a
ON spare one.
Select timer 0 by the DIP
switch "T.SEL" of the
control unit and watch the
indicator section.
*
In this case, set the power switch on the
Both are OFF or ON. control panel to "OFF" and then to "ON"
LED "MIN." and/or "SEC." again. If the same conditions persist, no
automatic operation is possible. A defective
control unit or DC power supply is suspected.
Either one is ON.
LED "MTR" of the terminal ON

unit
OFF Temporarily bridge external

terminals, "M11" and "M12", to
Check whether the motor
check whether the LED "MTR" of
operation signal is output
the terminal unit lights.
from the starter.
Does not light.

Being output Pilot lamp "MTR"
Motor operation signal
Lights *
Not output Check the external wiring
A defective control unit is
between the starter and
suspected.
Check the starter automatic control panel.

13.2. REPLACEMENT OF AUXILIARY RELAY
The auxiliary relay on the terminal unit may fail because of its operating life limit or deterioration.
When the auxiliary relay is out of order, replace it by the following procedures.
Relay Replacement Procedures (Refer to Fig. 13-1 as well.)
(1) Unlock the relay socket by forcing both ends to open outward (①).
(2) Pull the relay straight upward by use of a pointed wrench or something else (②).
(3) Insert a new relay straight in the relay socket (③).
CAUTION
When you replace the relay, be sure to set the power switch of the control panel to "OFF"
beforehand. Otherwise there is danger of electrical shock.
NOTE
o Make sure that the relay is inserted all the way until it is blocked.
o Set the relay with the white marking on the top.
①
Relay
③
Marking (White) ②
① Relay Socket
Fig. 13-1

13.3. REPLACEMENT OF FUSE
The fuse on the terminal unit may blow because of deterioration or solenoid valve overcurrent.
Replace a blown fuse by the following procedures.
Fuse Replacement Procedures (Refer to Fig. 13-2 as well.)
(1) While pressing down on the fuse holder cap, unlock it by turning counter-clockwise.
(① and ②)
(2) Remove the fuse holder cap and replace the fuse with a new one. (③)
(3) While pressing down on the fuse holder cap, lock it by turning clockwise. (④ and ⑤)
CAUTION
When you replace the fuse, be sure to cut off the power supply to the automatic control
panel. Otherwise there is danger of electrical shock.
Fuse Holder
Fuse Holder Cap

② ⑤
① ④
③ Fuse
Fig. 13-2

14. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET
14.1. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET (GBC-1, GBC-2)
14.1.1.GBC-1, GBC-2 (Standard)

自動制御盤始動器電源
2 S S S
V9 1
C
3 V5 OIL HEATER
E 油加熱器
B
V6
A
V7
V10
G
V8
F D
Fig. 14-1

14.1.2.GBC-1, GBC-2 (including options)
The following flow sheet shows the system with all the optional detectors mounted.
自動制御盤始動器電源
2 S S S
V9 1 TH
※1
※1
TL
C
VS
3 V5 OIL HEATER
E 油加熱器
B
V6
A ※1
V7
V10
G
V8
※1 Option オプション
F D
Fig. 14-2
High temperature thermal switch (Option)

TH 高温用温度スイッチ（オプション）
Low temperature thermal switch (Option)
TL 低温用温度スイッチ（オプション）
Vibration switch (Option)
VS バイブラスイッチ（オプション）

14.2.AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET (SJ700)
14.2.1. SJ700 (Standard)
AUTOMATIC
STARTER CONTROL
PANEL
始動器
自動制御盤
ELECTRIC
SOURCE
電源
SV5 AF1
S
C
CV1
P SV3
S
SV1
OIL HEATER
S T F
油加熱器
SV2
P S
G WFR
SD
P
B M
C
D E F
Fig. 14-3
SV1 : Solenoid valve (for bowl opening water) A: Dirty oil inlet
SV2 : Solenoid valve (for bowl closing water) B: Purified oil outlet
SV3 : Solenoid valve (for sealing water) C: Compressed air inlet
SV5 : Three-way solenoid valve (for feed valve air) D: Operating water drain
CV1 : Feed valve E: Sludge/water outlet
AF1 : Air filter F: Water (heavy liquid) outlet
WFR : Heavy liquid detector G: Clean water (high pressure water) inlet
SD : Sludge Discharge switch H: Return

14.2.2. SJ700 (including options)
The following flow sheet shows the system with all the optional detectors mounted.
AUTOMATIC
STARTER CONTROL
PANEL
始動器
自動制御盤
ELECTRIC
SOURCE
電源
SV5 AF1
S
C
CV1
P SV3
TH
S
TL
SV1
OIL HEATER
S T F
油加熱器
SV2
P S
G VS WFR
SD
P
B M
C
D E F
Fig. 14-4
SV1 : Solenoid valve (for bowl opening water)

SV2 : Solenoid valve (for bowl closing water) A: Dirty oil inlet
SV3 : Solenoid valve (for sealing water) B: Purified oil outlet
SV5 : Three-way solenoid valve (for feed valve air) C: Compressed air inlet
CV1 : Feed valve D: Operating water drain
AF1 : Air filter E: Sludge/water outlet
F: Water (heavy liquid) outlet
WFR : Heavy liquid detector G: Clean water (high pressure water) inlet
SD : Sludge Discharge switch H: Return
TH : High temperature thermal switch (Option)
TL : Low temperature thermal switch (Option)
VS : Vibration switch (Option)

15. TIMING CHART
15.1.SJ-G SERIES

15.2. SJ700

16. SCHEMATIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM (SJ-G SERIES)
o The attached drawing contains all of the optional detectors and circuits, some of which may not be
provided or used, depending on the specification for the SELFJECTOR you have purchased. Refer to
the drawing in the finished drawing as well.

16.1.SJ-G SERIES （AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL GBC-2）

17. SCHEMATIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM (SJ700)
o The attached drawing contains all of the optional detectors and circuits, some of which may not be
provided or used, depending on the specification for the SELFJECTOR you have purchased. Refer to
the drawing in the finished drawing as well.
o The attached drawing shows the system which uses the SJ-G series as machine No. 1 and the SJ700
as machine No. 2.
17-1 Operation Manual 3A

17.1.SJ700 （AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL GBC-2）

MITSUBISHI
SELFJECTOR
GENIUS -SERIES
Instruction Manual
Operation Manual 3B
(GSH-1)
for English

IMPORTANT
This manual has been edited primarily to give instructions for processing mineral oils
such as fuel oils and lubricating oils.
SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual 3B

WARNING
This instruction manual is a guide for using an automatic discharge type oil purifier, the "Mitsubishi
SELFJECTOR Genius Series" (hereinafter referred to as the SELFJECTOR).
The SELFJECTOR is a centrifugal separator rotating at high speeds. Please read through this manual
and obtain a complete understanding of the contents of the manual before using the SELFJECTOR.
Handle the SELFJECTOR safely and operate it in the right way to get the best service.
The Instruction Manual for the SELFJECTOR is configured as shown on the

following page. This volume is one of the manuals composing Part 4,
Operation Manual 3B.
Be sure to use the appropriate manuals and have a complete

understanding of the contents of the manual before starting your work.

Intended
Part

①②③④
1 Outline of fitting-out aboard Information for transportation, handling and storage of the
machine
O O
Configuration and structure of SELFJECTOR
O O
Multi-Monitor
O O
How to disassemble and reassemble
O O
Maintenance and checkup procedure
Trouble shooting
NOTE
The Part 4 manuals (Operation Manuals 3A & 3B) deal with the following types of the automatic
control systems. When you purchase the SELFJECTOR controlled by one of these control
systems, the associated operation manual of Part 4 will be supplied.

CONTENTS (1 / 2)
1. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY .................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1. SYMBOLS ASSOCIATED WITH SAFETY ................................................................................ 1-1

1.2. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY ................................................................................................. 1-2
2. OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL..................................................................... 2-1
3. FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL......................................... 3-1
4. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER........................................................................................... 4-1
4.1. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER........................................................................................... 4-1

4.2. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION............................................................ 4-1
4.3. FUNCTIONS OF INDIVIDUAL PARTS OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER ....................... 4-2
4.4. OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL................................................................................................. 4-5
5. RELAY BOARD.......................................................................................................................... 5-1
6. TIMER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES..................................................................................... 6-1
6.1. TIMER SETTING TIMES ........................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2. COUNTER SETTING VALUES ................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3. TIMER/ COUNTER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES................................................................ 6-6
7. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................................................... 7-1
7.1. AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL .............................................................................................. 7-1

7.2. PURIFIER .................................................................................................................................. 7-1
8. AUTOMATIC OPERATION ........................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1. HIDENS SYSTEM OPERATION ............................................................................................... 8-1

8.2. PURIFIER OPERATION ............................................................................................................ 8-6
8.3. SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST.................................................................................................. 8-10
8.4. AUTOMATIC STOP .................................................................................................................8-10
8.5. EMERGENCY STOP ............................................................................................................... 8-10
9. ALARMS..................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1. TYPES OF ALARMS ................................................................................................................. 9-1

9.2. ALARM RESET ......................................................................................................................... 9-1

CONTENTS (2 / 2)
10. ALARM AND CORRECTIVE ACTION ..................................................................................... 10-1
10.1. "01": OIL LEAKAGE................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.2. "02": NO OPENING OF BOWL ................................................................................................ 10-2
10.3. "03": ABNORMAL WATER CONTENT ALARM....................................................................... 10-2
11. MONITORING INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS......................................................................11-1
12. MAINTENANCE........................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1. "AUTO. RUNNING" LAMP NOT ILLUMINATED...................................................................... 12-1

12.2. INDICATION OF OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL ERROR ..................................................... 12-3
13. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW DIAGRAM......................................................................... 13-1
14. TIMING CHART ........................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1. HIDENS OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 14-1

14.2. PURIFIER OPERATION .......................................................................................................... 14-4

1.PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY
Prior to use, carefully read through the "Precautions for Safety", and operate the SELFJECTOR in the
right way.
The precautions for safety in this instruction manual are intended for enabling the user to use the
SELFJECTOR safely and properly, and protecting the user from personal injury and damage. Carefully
read through the precautions until you have a complete understanding before performing any job or
procedure for operation or maintenance of the SELFJECTOR.
1.1.SYMBOLS ASSOCIATED WITH SAFETY
In this instruction manual, the precautions are headed by the following symbols. Since all of them
are important precautions associated with safety, be sure to strictly observe them.
DANGER: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not heeded, will result
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not heeded, could result
CAUTION: Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not heeded, may result in minor or
moderate injury or damage to the machine or facilities.
NOTE: Indicates the items which should be done or which will be of help if kept in mind for
operating the machine or performing work.
SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual 1-1 Operation Manual 3B

1.2.PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY
CAUTION
The automatic control panel is a part of the equipment designed for automatic operation of the
SELFJECTOR. Improper handling of the panel could cause malfunctions and jeopardize your
safety. Before operation, maintenance and inspection of the panel, thoroughly read through this
manual and pay special heed to your safety when using the panel.
• Do not attempt disassembly and reworking of the control panel without permission of
Mitsubishi Kakoki.
• Never place the equipment in a position close to flammable materials.

If it is placed in a position close to flammable materials, an explosion or fire could result.
• Before proceeding with wiring, check to ensure that the input power supply to the system is
OFF.
There is danger of an electrical shock.
• Make sure that wiring is done by qualified electrical engineers.
• Connect the equipment to the hull in an electrically effective way by use of the ground
terminal of the panel.
(Make sure that the equipment is grounded.)
• Check to ensure that the rated voltage and frequency of the panel coincide with those of the
power supply.
Should questions arise concerning the contents of the manual,

please contact Mitsubishi Kakoki or your nearest Mitsubishi
Kakoki service agent.

2.OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL
The control panel is used for automatic purification of the feed oil by the Mitsubishi SELFJECTOR. It is so
designed that, if a trouble like an abnormal oil leakage or sludge discharge failure (failure to open the bowl)
occurs during operation, the supply of the feed oil and then the SELFJECTOR may be stopped
automatically.
<Automatic Operation Process>

Closes the main cylinder of the bowl → Supplies sealing water → Supplies feed oil (purifier operation) →
Supplies replacement water → Opens the main cylinder of the bowl (discharges sludge).
The control panel outputs “Feeding” signal to the Multi-Monitor (MM), and has separated water discharged
in response to “alarm (water detection)” signal from the Multi-Monitor. If the number of times water
discharge is detected is abnormally large, the control panel automatically shuts down the SELFJECTOR
after completion of the discharge process. For detailed information on the Water Detector Function (WD)
of the Multi-Monitor, refer to “OPERATION MANUAL 2”.
The control panel has a built-in programmable controller to control the automatic operation processes.
The control panel consists of the following devices.
Programmable controller
(1) CPU board: PZ3M

(2) Operation display panel: S-10D-M
(3) Expansion board: PZ3ME (Option)
Control switches, pilot lamps, fuses, relay board and terminal board

3.FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL
The front panel configuration and functions of the automatic control panel are shown below.
5 3
8
1
OFF ON
2
MM機能警報リセット自動運転制御電源
RUNNING SOURCE
OFF ON
非常停止排出テスト
自動停止制御電源
EMERG. DISCHG.
7 STOP TEST
AUTO. CONT.
STOP SOURCE
6 4
(1) "CONT. SOURCE"

Lights when power is supplied to the automatic control panel.
(2) "CONT. SOURCE ON-OFF"

Turns on/off the power for the automatic control panel.

(3) "AUTO. RUNNING"
The pushbutton is a switch for starting automatic operation. The built-in pilot lamp will stay ON
during automatic operation.
(4) "AUTO. STOP"

When this pushbutton is pressed during automatic operation, the SELFJECTOR will stop
automatically after discharging sludge.
(5) "ALARM RESET"

When any alarm occurs during operation, the built-in pilot lamp will come on. The type of alarm that
has occurred can be known from the data display on the front panel.
When the pushbutton is pressed, the sustained alarm will be reset.
(6) "DISCHG. TEST"

When this pushbutton is pressed during automatic operation, the SELFJECTOR is forced to
discharge sludge.
(7) "EMERG. STOP"

When this pushbutton is pressed, all the valves will immediately close, and the SELFJECTOR will
stop.

This selector switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the control panel to the
Multi-Monitor.
When the "MM FUNCTION SWITCH" is off position, feeding signal is not outputted from the control
panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding.
(9) "OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL"

The operation display panel displays input and output data, ON/OFF status of input and output
signals and kinds of alarm signals. Also, it is possible to enter and alter various set values on the
graphic panel.

4.PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
4.1.PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
The programmable controller contains the logic for automatic operation of the purifier.
It is a flexible controller whose programs can be rewritten from an external tool.
The programmable controller contains the functions for inputting and outputting signals from/to the
external devices, and the timer functions.
4.2.PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION
The programmable controller consists of the following devices. (For details, refer to Section 4.3.)
The CPU board and expansion board are mounted in the automatic control panel, whereas the
operation display panel is mounted on the front of the automatic control panel.
4.2.1.CPU Board
The CPU board is a device which outputs and inputs signals to and from external devices. The
following signals are connected to the CPU board.
[Input Signals]
From Multi-Monitor
o Oil leakage signal (LM)
o No-discharge signal (DD)
o Water detection signal (WD)
From automatic control panel
o ON signal of each pushbutton on front of the control panel
[Output Signals]
o Discharge signal, feeding signal, etc. to the Multi-Monitor
o OPEN/CLOSE signals to solenoid valves
o ON signal to front panel pilot lamps
o STOP signal to motor starter, alarm signal to console, etc.

4.2.2.Operation Display Panel
The operation display panel is a device for changing the timer and counter settings of the
programmable controller and indicating SELFJECTOR alarms. It is connected to the CPU board
by a communications cable.
The timers and counters must be set to different values, depending on:
o Model number of SELFJECTOR,

o Type of feed oil,
o Operating water pressure and sealing water pressure.
It is therefore necessary that the settings are changed to match the operating condition.
4.2.3.Expansion Board (Option)
This is a device for expansion of input/output. Normally, it is not provided.
4.3.FUNCTIONS OF INDIVIDUAL PARTS OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
4.3.1.CPU Board
Screw x 4 Connector terminal

ビス×4 コネクタ端子
入力表示LED
Tool port
ツールポート Input display LED
CN1
CN2
I1
I4
I5
I6
I7
I0
I2
I3
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
I17
RUN
TERM
CN3 動作状態LED
Operating status LED
PWR
RUN
CPU
Communications
通信ポート Output display LED
port 出力表示LED
Connector
コネクタ端子 terminal
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
Q16
Q17
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Mode selector switch

モード切替え CN4
(Normal position: RUN)
スイッチＣＰＵ基板
CPU board
（通常：TERM側）
拡張基板
Expansion board (Option)
Fig. 4-1 Outside View of CPU Board

4.3.2.Functions of Individual Parts of CPU Board

Operating Status LED PWR Comes on when the power supply is turned on.
RUN Stays ON during operation.
When it is OFF, temporarily set the mode switch (SW1) to RUN, and
then to TERM again to light the LED.
CPU Comes on when an error occurs in the CPU.
Input Display LED I0-I17 The LEDs indicate the input status of signals.
When a pushbutton on the front panel is set to ON or a detector is
caused to be ON, the associated LED lights.
Output Display LED Q0-Q17 The LEDs indicate the output status of signals.
When a pilot lamp on the front panel is lit, or a solenoid valve is
opened or closed, or a detector signal is output, the associated LED
lights.
Mode Switch SW1 Normally set to RUN.
TERM side is used at the time of a exclusive communication
apparatus use.
Tool Port CN3 The operation display panel is connected to the port.
To rewrite the program, connect a dedicated tool to the port.
Communications Port CN2 Not used
Connector Terminal CN1 The flat cable for input signals is connected to the terminal.
CN4 The flat cable for output signals is connected to the terminal.
o To replace the CPU board, disconnect the connector and loosen the four screws to remove
the board.

4.3.3.Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs
For the input and output display LED Nos. and functions, refer to the following table.
Table 4-1 Detailed Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs
Name LED No. Description

Input Display LED I0 Lights when Leakage signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.
I1 Lights when No-discharge signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.
I2 Lights when Water Detection signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7 Stays ON during operation of motor of SELFJECTOR.
I10 Lights when Push-button switch “AUTO. START” is pushed.
I11 Lights when Push-button switch “AUTO. STOP” is pushed.
I12 Lights when Push-button switch “DISCHG TEST” is pushed.
I13 Lights when Push-button switch “ALARM RESET” is pushed.
I14 Lights when Change-over switch “MM FUNCTION” is set to “ON”.
I15
I16
I17
Output Display LED Q0 Lights when bowl opening water solenoid valve (SV1) is energized.
(Total Discharge)
Q1 Lights when bowl closing water solenoid valve (SV2) is energized.
Q2 Lights when sealing water/replacement water solenoid valve (SV3) is
energized.
Q3 Lights when feed valve solenoid valve (SV4) is energized.
Q4 Lights when bowl opening water solenoid valve (SV9) is energized.
(Partial Discharge)
Q5
Q6
Q7 Stays ON during automatic operation.
Q10 Q10 / Lights when alarm occurs.
Q11
Q12 Lights when stop signal is output to starter. *1
Q13 Lights when alarm cancel signal is output to starter. *1
Q14 Lights when collective alarm signal is output to console. *2
Q15 Stays ON during feeding process (for Leakage Monitor Function (LM) of
the Multi-Monitor interlocking).
Q16 Stays ON during discharge process (for Discharge Detector Function
(DD) of the Multi-Monitor interlocking).
Q17
NOTE
*1....The starter refers to the separately installed motor starter of the SELFJECTOR.
*2....The console refers to the remote control console.

4.4.OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL

Address Display Section (Upper/Lower Stage)
アドレス表示部データ表示部（上段／下段）
SET MAIN
ADDRESS DATA
MAIN
MON OPT
TIM
CNT
MON OUT
- +
ALM M

CLR ENT
モード表示部
Mode Display Section 操作キー
Control Keys
Fig. 4-2 Outside View of Operation Display Panel

4.4.1.Functions of Individual Sections of Operation Display Panel

Address Display Section ADDRESS Displays the number of the timers/counters or input/output
signals whose data is displayed in the data display section.
Data Display Section DATA Displays the data (timer setting time/time elapsed, etc.) for the
item indicated on the address display section or mode display
section.
Mode Display Section MAIN Lights when an ordinary operation data (main screen) is
displayed. When the MAIN is ON, the upper stage of the data
display section indicates the elapsed time of the discharge
interval timer (CO15). (Unit: Minutes)
The lower stage indicates a water content value. (Option)
TIM Lights when the set time/elapsed time of the timer are
displayed or the setting is changed. When the TIM is ON, the
set time is displayed in the upper stage of the data display
section, and the elapsed time displayed in the lower stage.
CNT Lights when the set time/elapsed time of the timer (counter) is
displayed or the setting is changed. When the CNT is ON, the
set time is displayed in the upper stage of the data display
section.
The lower stage displays the elapsed time.
REG Lights when the internal memory data of the programmable
controller is displayed. (Normally not used)
MON Lights when input/output signals are monitored. When the
MON is ON, the ON/OFF status of the input/output signal is
displayed in the data display section.
IN Lights when an input signal is monitored.
OUT Lights when an output signal is monitored.
Lights when an internal signal is monitored. (Normally not
M
used)
ALM Lights when an alarm is displayed.
When the ALM is ON, the alarm number is displayed in the
data display section.

Input Key SET Use this key when there is a need for changing a setting.
MAIN Use this key to have ordinary operation data displayed on the
screen (to display the “main screen”).
MON Use this key when input/output signals are to be monitored on
the screen.
OPT Press OPT then ENT to display the number of the alarm that
occurred last.
← (REG) In the timer/counter setting change mode, use this key to
move the cursor to the left digit.
→ TIM CNT Use this key to display the set time/elapsed time of the timer
and counter.
In the timer/counter setting change mode, use the key to move
the cursor to the right digit.
- Use this key to decrement a setting or an address (number) by
1.
+ Use this key to increment a setting or an address (number) by
1.
CLR Use this key to clear a changed setting.
ENT Use this key to enter a changed setting.

4.4.2.Expansion Board (Option)
Input display LED

入力表示LED
I20
I21
I22
I23
I24
I25
I26
I27
Q20
Q21
Q22
Q23
Q24
Q25
出力表示LED Q26
Output display LED Q27
Expansion
拡張基板 board
(Option)
Terminals
端子台
Fig. 4-3 Skiagram of Expansion Board
The expansion board is used for analog inputting of the Electrostatic Capacity Type Water
Detector (WD) reading. It is provided only for a control panel with an optional water display.
The board has signal input and output functions, but the functions are not normally used.

5.RELAY BOARD
The relay board is mounted on the rear side of the CPU board.
It accommodates auxiliary relays and fuses. The relay contacts are opened and closed by the output
signals from the programmable controller.
When a fuse blows or an auxiliary relay goes out of order, remove the four screws, remove the cover and
the connector connected to the CPU board, and replace the fuse or auxiliary relay with a spare one.
Screw x 4 Fuse Internal terminal Fuse
Cover
External terminal Auxiliary relay Connector terminal
Fig. 5-1 Relay board

6.TIMER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES
6.1.TIMER SETTING TIMES
The times to be set for the timers vary with the following factors.
o Model number of SELFJECTOR

o Type of feed oil
o Operating water pressure and sealing water pressure
It is therefore necessary to set the timers to match the field conditions. When a test run and
adjustments are performed by Mitsubishi Kakoki service personnel, the timers are set to the proper
values suitable for the field conditions before handover. If changes occur in the properties of feed oil
thereafter, refer to the following explanations and change the set times properly.
Table 6-1 Timer Nos. and Uses (Standard)

T000 Operation intervals of each solenoid valve 0.0-999.9 s
T001 Bowl opening time (Total discharge) 0.0-999.9 s
T002 Replacement water supply time (Total discharge) 0.0-999.9 s
T003 Sealing water (regulating water) supply time (Total discharge) 0.0-999.9 s
T004 Bowl washing water supply time 0.0-999.9 s
T011 Bowl opening time (Partial discharge) 0.0-999.9 s
T012 Replacement water supply time (Partial discharge) 0.0-999.9 s
T013 Sealing water (regulating water) supply time (Partial discharge) 0.0-999.9 s
C014 Intermittent bowl closing water supply intervals 1-9999 min
C015 Sludge discharge intervals 1-9999 min
T016 Operating water supply for closing bowl. 0.0-999.9 s
C022 Monitoring time 1-9999 min
C026 Water detection count reset time 1-9999 min
Table 6-2 Counter Nos. and Uses (Standard)

C023 Bowl washing counter 1-100
C027 Water detection count 1-9999 times

Standard Times to Be Set for Timers/Counters
(HIDENS Operation)
Table 6-3
Timer
Item Unit SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH SJ60GH SJ70GH SJ100GH SJ120GH SJ150GH
N o .
Interval T000 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20
T003 sec
T004 sec
Replacement water(partial) T012 sec 2 2 2 3 3 6 6 6 6
T013 sec
T016 sec 5
closing bowl
C027 times 6
counter
C023 times
NOTE1: For discharge intervals, refer to Table 6-5 “standard discharge intervals for general
guidance”.
NOTE
Timer settings for sealing water and replacement water in the above list are based on the feed
rate at 8 L/min. for SJ10GH to 30GH, at 12 L/min. for SJ50GH to 70GH, at 16 L/min. for
SJ100GH and 120GH and at 18 L/min. for SJ150GH. For practical setting, always measure the
flow rate actually and select proper values accordingly.
Fuel oil purifiers have no regulating water feeding process and bowl washing processes.

Standard Times to Be Set for Timers/Counters
(Purifier Operation: Total discharge)
Table 6-4
Timer
Item U n i t SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH SJ60GH SJ70GH SJ100GH SJ120GH SJ150GH
N o .
Interval T000 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20
Sealing water T003 sec 9 10 12 18 18 20 32 32 27
T004 sec
Replacement water(partial) T012 sec 2 2 2 3 3 6 6 6 6
T013 sec
T016 sec 5
closing bowl
C027 times 6
counter
C023 times
NOTE1: For discharge intervals, refer to Table 6-5 “standard discharge intervals for general
guidance”.
NOTE3: In case of purifier operation by automatic type GSH-1, the timers T011, T012, T013, C022,
C026 and C027 are nonfunctional and need no change in set value.
NOTE
Timer settings for sealing water and replacement water in the above list are based on the feed
rate at 8 L/min. for SJ10GH to 30GH, at 12 L/min. for SJ50GH to 70GH, at 16 L/min. for
SJ100GH and 120GH and at 18 L/min. for SJ150GH. For practical setting, always measure the
flow rate actually and select proper values accordingly.
Prior to purifier operation, do the following settings.
o Select the gravity disc to match the type of oil to be treated. (Refer to Operation Manual 2.)
o Fully close the circulation line backpressure valve attached to the purifier and fully open
the shut off valve.
o Set the Water Detector selector dial to “No Water / heavy liquid detector function” position
and the Water Detection output switch to OFF. (Refer to Operation Manual 2.)

Table 6-5 shows the standard discharge intervals for general guidance in processing fuel and lubricating
oils.
Table 6-5

C Fuel Oil
A Fuel Oil Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine
(380mm2/S at 50°C)
HIDENS
120 min 60 min 120 min 60 min
Operation
Purifier
120 min 60 min 120 min 60 min
Operation
6.2.COUNTER SETTING VALUES
The inside of the bowl can be cleaned after every few total discharge operations in order to remove
unevenly accumulated sludge and dirt.
Table 6-6 shows the standard bowl washing counters for general guidance in processing fuel and
lubricating oils.
Table 6-6

C Fuel Oil
A Fuel Oil Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine
(380mm2/S at 50°C)
Bowl
washing 0 times 0 times 6 times 6 times
counter
NOTE
The Bowl washing count shown above is set so that the washing interval will be 24 hours.
The Bowl washing interval is given by: (Except when the Bowl washing count is 0.)
The Bowl washing interval (min)

= Discharge interval (C015) x Total discharge count (C021) x Bowl washing count (C023)

6.2.1.FUNCTUION OF BOWL WASHING COUNTER
The washing in the bowl is at every total discharge
The bowl washing is made each time the Bowl Washing counter C023 reaches its set total sludge
discharge count.
The bowl washing is performed in such a way that washing water is supplied into the bowl after a routine
total sludge discharge for the period of time set on the bowl washing timer T004 totally drained.
When the set count is "1"

Bowl washing is made after each total sludge discharge.
When the set count is "0" or "100"
No bowl washing is made.
When the set count is "2 to 99"
Bowl washing is made once in the number of times of total sludge discharge that corresponds the
setting.

6.3.TIMER/ COUNTER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES
To set the time of a timer, proceed as described below.
① Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON" and check to see that the "CONT. SOURCE"
pilot lamp, the "RUN" LED of the CPU board, and the LED of the "mode display section" on the
operation display panel are ON.
② Press the control keys of the operation display panel in the following sequence. Confirm the
displays of the display section before proceeding ahead.

MAIN - or +
TIM CNT TIM CNT
For T001-T025, press TIM CNT once. タイマ番号を選択
Select a timer number.
For C014-C027, press TIM CNT twice.

SET
(REG)
or - or + ENT
TIM CNT
桁選択
To select a digit To設定時間増減
increase or decrease the set time
NOTE
o The time cannot be set in hours (HR). For 3HR for example, set 180 MIN.
o For information on the timer numbers and uses, refer to Section 6.1.
o The units of time displayed in the data display section are shown below.
o 0.1 second for timer Nos. T001-T025
o 1 minute for timer Nos. C014-C015 and C022, C026
o 1 time for counter No. C021 and C023, C027

6.3.1.Calling Set Time and Elapsed Time
Here is an example of procedure. Suppose that timer No. C015--Discharge Interval was already
set to 60 minutes. In this case, proceed as described below to call the set time or elapsed time
before entering automatic operation or during automatic operation.
MAIN - or +
TIM CNT TIM CNT
タイマ番号を選択
Select a timer No.
If the keys are operated in the above sequence, the upper stage of the data display section
shows the set time of the timer, whereas the lower stage shows the elapsed time of the timer.
Control Key Display Address Data

Upper stage
Lower stage
ADDRESS DATA Elapsed time of C015
MAIN MAIN
0048
TIM
CNT
Water content value or
REG
MON
IN
OUT
0.0 blank
ALM M
ADDRESS DATA Timer No. Set time of timer

MAIN
TIM
001 10.0 T000-T025 0.0-999.9 s
TIM CNT
CNT
Elapsed time of timer
REG
MON
IN
OUT
0.0 0.0-999.9 s
ALM M
ADDRESS DATA Timer No. Set time of timer

MAIN
TIM
014 0010 C014-C027 0000-9999 min
TIM CNT
CNT
Elapsed time of timer
*1
REG
MON
IN
OUT
0000
ALM M
0000-9999 min
ADDRESS DATA Timer No. Set time of C015

- +
MAIN
TIM
015 0060 C015
or CNT Elapsed time of C015
REG
MON
IN
OUT
0032
ALM M
Fig. 6-1
*1. Each time the TIM CNT key is pressed, the "TIM" LED and "CNT" LED alternately light.

6.3.2.Changing Set Time
Here is an example of procedure to change a set time.

To change the set time of 60 minutes in the preceding section to 180 minutes, for example,
proceed as described below.
Whenever a set time is changed, make sure that the set time is called beforehand by the
procedure described in Section 6.3.1 Calling Set Time.
SET
(REG)
or + ENT
TIM CNT
設定時間増加
To increase the set time
When the control keys are operated in the sequence shown above, the data will be displayed as
shown in Fig. 6-2.
Upper stage
Lower stage
ADDRESS DATA Timer No. C015 Set time of C015
SET MAIN
015 0060 Set digit flashes.
TIM
CNT
Elapsed time of C015
REG
MON
IN
OUT
0033
ALM M

MAIN
TIM
(REG)
or TIM CNT CNT
Elapsed time of C015
Select digit to
REG
MON
IN
OUT
0033
be set ALM M

+ MAIN
TIM
CNT Elapsed time of C015
Keep REG IN
0033
depressed MON OUT
ALM M

MAIN
TIM
015 0180
ENT CNT Elapsed time of C015
REG
MON
IN
OUT
0033
*1 ALM M
Fig. 6-2
*1. Before entering a set time by the ENT key, press the CLR key to restore the original set time.

6.3.3.Monitoring Elapsed Time of Discharge Interval
The elapsed time of discharge interval (C015) can be monitored by pressing the MAIN key of
the operation display panel. If the optional water value display function is provided, the water
content value can also be displayed.
When the power switch of the automatic control panel is set to ON, the "main screen indicating
ordinary operation data" will open.
When it is 23 minutes for example since the start of feeding, if the water content value is 0.1%,
the upper stage will indicate 0023, whereas the lower stage will indicate 0.1.

Upper stage
Lower stage
ADDRESS DATA Elapsed time of C015
MAIN MAIN
0023
TIM
CNT
Water content value or
REG
MON
IN
OUT
0.1 blank
ALM M
Fig. 6-3

7.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
7.1.AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL
CAUTION
o Refer to Section 6.1 and check to ensure that each of the timers has been set to the proper
value suitable for the actual conditions (type of feed oil, model number of SELFJECTOR,
working water pressure, etc.).
o Pay special heed to the discharge interval timer "C015", as it affects the quantity of sludge to
be accumulated in the bowl of the SELFJECTOR. Make sure that the timer is set to the
proper value suitable for the type of feed oil. (To change the set time, refer to Section 6.)
o For information on the Water Detector Function (WD) of the Multi-Monitor, refer to Section 4
in "Operation Manual 2".
7.2.PURIFIER
CAUTION
o Make sure that the gravity disc for HIDENS is installed in the SELFJECTOR.
o Make sure that the circulation line backpressure valve is fully opened and the shut off valve is
fully closed attached to the SELFJECTOR. (Refer to the figure as following.)
o Make sure position of the switches in the Multi-Monitor (MM) is right. (Water detector selector
dial, Water detection output switch, etc.)
o About details of the above, refer to Section 3.3, 3.6 and 3.7, 4, 5.5 and so on in "Operation
Manual 2".
Analogue type pressure gauge
Pressure sensor Shut off valve
Circulation line
Circulation line back pressure valve
Heavy liquid connecting piping

8.AUTOMATIC OPERATION
8.1.HIDENS SYSTEM OPERATION
Step 1. Start the SELFJECTOR by using the separately mounted starter.
Step 2. Set the power switch provided on the control panel to "ON".
Step 3. Set the timer and counter in the control panel.
Step 4. The "CONT. SOURCE" pilot lamp will come on.

Check the ammeter of the starter to confirm that the SELFJECTOR has reached the rated
speed. Thereafter, press pushbutton "AUTO. START" provided on the control panel. Pilot
lamp "AUTO. RUNNING" will come on.
Step 5. The timers in the programmable controller provided in the control panel will operate in the
following sequence to perform continuous purifier operation.
(Refer to the attached Section 16 Automatic Operation Flow and Section 17 Timing Chart
as well.)
Interval timer T000 starts operation.

o Solenoid valve SV2 will open to supply the bowl closing water and close the bowl.
T000...When the timer expires,

o Solenoid valve SV2 will close to stop supplying the bowl closing water.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply replacement water.
o Replacement water timer T002 will start operation.

o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying replacement water.
o Solenoid valve SV1 will open to supply the bowl opening water and open the bowl.
o Bowl opening water timer T001 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV1 will close to stop supplying the bowl opening water.
o At the same time, interval timer T000 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply regulating water.
o Regulating water timer T003 will start operation.
NOTE
In case of the fuel oil purifier, the regulating water does not be supplied.
o At the same time, interval timer T000 will restart operation.

o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying regulating water.
o Interval timer T000 will restart operation.
(1) Solenoid valve SV4 will open to supply operating air and open the feed valve to
supply the feed oil into the bowl and start purifier operation. At the same time,
discharge interval timer C015 will start operation.
(2) During operation of the discharge interval timer C015, the bowl closing water will be
intermittently supplied.
In other words, the following processes will be repeated: Operation of C014 →
Expiry of C014 → Operation of T016 (opens SV2 to supply bowl closing water) →
Expiry of T016 (closes SV2 to stop supplying bowl closing water) → Operation of
C014.
(3) The "Feeding" signal will be output to the Multi-Monitor.
② ①

② ①
When a water detection signal is received from the Multi-Monitor (when the Monitoring timer
C022 have expired.), or when C015...timer expires,
o Discharge interval timer C015 will be reset.
o Monitoring timer C022 will be reset.
o Solenoid valve SV4 will close to close the feed valve.
o The "Feeding" signal output to the Multi-Monitor will be stopped.
o The "Discharging" signal will be output to the Multi-Monitor.
T000...when the timer expires,
o The bowl washing counter C023 is counted one time and is added one time to the
current count.
o At the same time, solenoid valve SV1 will open to supply the bowl opening water and
open the bowl to discharge sludge.
④ ③ ② ①

④ ③ ② ①
T000...when the timer expires, (When the Bowl washing counter C023 have expired.)
o The "Discharging" signal output to the Multi-Monitor will be stopped.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply the bowl washing water.
o Bowl washing water timer T004 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying the bowl washing water.
o At the same time, solenoid valve SV1 will open to supply the bowl opening water
and open the bowl to discharge washing water.
NOTE
o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying regulating water.
T000...When the timer expires, (When the Bowl washing counter C023 have not
expired.)
NOTE
④ ③

④ ③
When a water detection signal is received from the Multi-Monitor, (When the Monitoring
timer C022 have not expired.)
o Operation of discharge interval timer C015 will be stopped temporarily.
(Lapsed time is held.)
o Monitoring timer C022 will be reset.
o Replacement water timer T012 (for partial) will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV2 will open to supply bowl closing water.
o Solenoid valve SV9 will open to supply bowl opening water (for partial) to the
bowl and discharge sludge and separated water.
o Opening bowl timer T011 (for partial) will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV2 will stay open to supply bowl closing water and close the
bowl.
o Interval timer T000 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV2 will close to stop supplying bowl opening water.
o Regulating water (for partial discharge) timer T013 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying the regulating water.
(1) Operation of discharge interval timer C015 will re-started
(2) Monitoring timer C022 will start operation.
(3) During operation of the discharge interval timer C015, the bowl opening water will
be intermittently supplied.
C014.

8.2.PURIFIER OPERATION
CAUTION
When SJ10GH to 150GH types are used in the total discharge mode (purifier operation), select
an appropriate gravity disc that fits the specific gravity of feed liquid and install it in position.
Then, fully open the shut off valve and fully close the circulation line backpressure valve. After
that, set the Water Detector selector dial to No working position and the water detection output
switch to OFF position. Operate the SELFJECTOR on that condition. (Refer to Section 6.4.2.4 in
"Operation Manual 1".)
Step 1. Start the SELFJECTOR by the separately mounted starter.
Step 2. Set the power switch provided on the control panel to "ON".
Step 3. Pilot lamp "CONT. SOURCE" will come on.
Step 4. Check the ammeter of the starter to confirm that the SELFJECTOR has reached the rated
speed. Thereafter, press pushbutton "AUTO. START" provided on the control panel. Pilot
lamp "AUTO. RUNNING" will come on.
Step 5. The timers in the programmable controller provided in the control panel will operate in the
following sequence to perform continuous purifier operation.
(Refer to the attached time chart as well.)
Interval timer T000 will start operation.


o At the same time, replacement water timer T002 will start operation.
open the bowl to discharge the replacement water.

o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply sealing water.
o Sealing water time timer T003 will start operation.
o At the same time, interval timer T000 will restart operation.

o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying sealing water.
(1) Solenoid valve SV4 will open to send the operating air to open the feed valve and
feed the feed oil into the bowl to perform purifier operation. At the same time,
discharge interval timer C015 will start operation.
(2) During operation of the discharge interval timer C015, the bowl opening water will be
intermittently supplied.
C014.
② ①

② ①
C015...when the timer expires,

o Discharge interval timer C015 will be reset.
o The bowl washing counter C023 is counted one time and is added one time to the
current count.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying the replacement water.
open the bowl to discharge sludge.
o Bowl opening water timer T001 will operate.
② ③

② ③
T000...when the timer expires, (When the Bowl washing counter C023 have expired.)
o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply the bowl washing water.
o Bowl washing timer T004 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying the bowl washing water.
o At the same time, solenoid valve SV1 will open to supply the bowl opening water
and open the bowl to discharge washing water.
o Sealing water timer T003 will start operation.
o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying sealing water.
T000...When the timer expires, (When the Bowl washing counter C023 have not
expired.)
o Sealing water timer T003 will start operation.

8.3.SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST
8.3.1.SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST DURING FEEDING OPERATION

During feeding operation, a test can be performed to discharge the sludge from inside the bowl freely at
any time regardless of the elapse of the feed time. Press pushbutton "DISCHG TEST" provided on the
control panel by the following procedures. Then the SELFJECTOR will enter the "Partial Discharge" or
"Total Discharge" process to discharge sludge. After sludge has been discharged, the SELFJECTOR will
continue automatic operation in the original mode.
(1) PARTIAL DISCHARGE

Press the "DISCHG. TEST" pushbutton once.
(2) TOTAL DISCHARGE
Press the "DISCHG. TEST" pushbutton twice in five seconds.
8.3.2.SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST EXCEPTING SELFJECTOR IS IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION

When the SELFJECTOR is not in automatic operation, pressing the "DISCHG. TEST" pushbutton
provided on the control panel will open the bowl closing water solenoid valve SV2 to supply the working
water to close the bowl. The partial bowl opening water solenoid valve SV9 will then continue to
open for the set time of the partial bowl opening timer T011.
This function is not used to normal operation.
8.4.AUTOMATIC STOP
When pushbutton "AUTO. STOP" provided on the control panel is pressed, the SELFJECTOR will
automatically stop after going through the replacement water process and then discharging sludge.
(During feed operation, the feed oil supply is first stopped.)
8.5.EMERGENCY STOP
CAUTION
When the SELFJECTOR is shut down because of an emergency, discharge failure (no
opening of bowl) or overload, it will stop operation without discharging the sludge
accumulated in the bowl. If the SELFJECTOR is directly restarted, the bowl might lose
balance and cause a hazardous situation. For this reason, be sure to disassemble the
bowl and remove the sludge according to the instruction manual for the SELFJECTOR
proper before restarting operation.
In cases of emergency, press pushbutton "EMERG. STOP" provided on the control panel. In any of
the processes, the power supply to the SELFJECTOR will be interrupted, and all the valves will
close, and the SELFJECTOR will stop operation.

9.ALARMS
9.1.TYPES OF ALARMS
When any of the following alarms occurs, the control panel will cause pilot lamp "ALARM" to light
and will transmit an alarm signal to the remote console.
o "Oil Leakage" alarm,

o "No Opening of Bowl" alarm,
o "Abnormal Water Content" alarm which occurs when the water detection setting counter C027
expires,
When the "ALARM" pilot lamp comes on, the operation display panel on the front of the control
panel will display any of the alarm numbers (ALM. No.) of Table 9-1 as shown in Fig. 9-1.
When the MAIN key is pressed while an alarm number is on display, the "Main Screen" will
reappear.
When pushbutton "ALARM RESET" provided on the control panel is pressed, the screen displayed
before occurrence of an alarm will be restored.
Display Address Data

Upper stage
Lower stage
ADDRESS DATA ALM No.
MAIN
TIM
01
CNT
REG IN Blank
MON OUT
ALM M
Fig. 9-1
Table 9-1
ALM No. Alarm Name
01 OIL LEAKAGE
02 NO OPENING OF BOWL
03 ABNORMAL WATER CONTENT
9.2.ALARM RESET
CAUTION
Remove the cause of an alarm before pressing the "ALARM RESET" pushbutton.
Press pushbutton "ALARM RESET" provided on the control panel to reset the alarm circuit.

10.ALARM AND CORRECTIVE ACTION
10.1."01": OIL LEAKAGE
This alarm will be generated by the Leakage Monitor Function (LM) of the Multi-Monitor when the
light liquid side pressure falls due to outflow of the feed oil or processed oil toward the heavy liquid
side or sludge chute side of the SELFJECTOR during feeding operation. When this alarm occurs,
the SELFJECTOR will automatically stop operation after discharging sludge.
Table 10-1

OIL 1. The bowl failed to close because of a fault in the 1. Refer to the separate
LEAKAGE SELFJECTOR proper. "Maintenance Manual".
Alarm No. 01
2. The bowl closing water was not supplied because 2. Repair or replace the valve
solenoid valve SV2 failed to open. with a non-defective one.
3. The required sealing water was not supplied 3. Same as above

because solenoid valve SV3 failed to open.
4. The required sealing water was not supplied 4. Adjust the set time of the
because the set time of sealing water timer "T003" timer.
or "T013" was too short.
5. Solenoid valve SV2 or SV3 failed to open because 5. Replace the auxiliary relay
of a defective auxiliary relay in the control panel. with a spare one.
6. Defective Multi-Monitor (MM) 6. Refer to the separate

"Maintenance Manual".
7. Defective water or air system 7. Refer to the separate


10.2."02": NO OPENING OF BOWL
This alarm occurs when the Discharge Detector Function (DD) of the Multi-Monitor fails to detect
discharge despite the fact that a DISCHARGE SLUDGE signal was sent to the bowl opening
solenoid valves (SV1, SV9).
When this alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR will stop operation immediately.
Table 10-2

NO 1. The bowl failed to open because of a fault in the 1. Refer to the separate
OPENING SELFJECTOR proper. "Maintenance Manual".
OF BOWL
Alarm No. 02 2. The bowl opening water was not supplied because 2. Repair or replace the valve
solenoid valve SV1 or SV9 failed to open. with a non-defective one.
3. Solenoid valve SV1 or SV9 failed to open because 3. Replace the auxiliary relay
of a defective auxiliary relay in the control panel. with a spare one.
4. Defective Multi-Monitor (MM) 4. Refer to the separate

5. Defective water or air system 5. Refer to the separate

6. The set pressure of the reducing valve was low, so 6. Refer to the separate
that amount of sludge discharge was too less. "Operation Manual2", and
adjust the reducing valve as
required.
10.3."03": ABNORMAL WATER CONTENT ALARM
This alarm occurs when the water detection count is abnormally high.
When the Multi-Monitor detects the water content in the bowl, its water detection signal is input to
the CPU board and a water discharge operation is effected, when the water detection setting
counter (C027) adds one time to the current count. C027 is reset every time the water detection
count reset timer (C026), which is repetitively actuated during automatic operation, expires. If the
water content of the feed oil is abnormally high, water detection is repeated within a short period of
time, C027 counts up to give an abnormal water content alarm signal. When this signal is issued,
the SELFJECTOR is automatically stopped after discharging sludge.

11.MONITORING INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS
Pressing the MON key on the operation display panel will enable you to monitor the input and output
signals such as the ON/OFF status of the solenoid valves.
To monitor the input and output signals, press the control keys of the operation display panel in the
following sequence, and check the displays of the display section before proceeding ahead. For the
details of the displays, refer to Fig. 11-1. For the details of signals, refer to Section 4.3.3 "Functions of
Input/Output Indicating LEDs".
Operating Procedures for Monitoring Input and Output Signals

入出力信号モニタの操作手順
MAIN MON MON MON - or +

1～3回押す
Press MON one to three times. 入出力番号を選択
入力信号のモニタは(I)は、IN
To を選択
monitor input signal, select IN for (I).
出力信号のモニタは(Q)は、OUTを選択
To monitor output signal, select OUT for (Q).
内部信号のモニタは(M)は、M
To を選択
monitor internal signal, select M for (M).
③ 33210
2 1 0 No. (I/Q/M)
ADDRESS DATA
MAIN
TIM
000 8___
CNT ④
REG IN
MON OUT
ALM M
No. (I/Q/M)
① ② 77654
6 5 4
No. Details of Display
① Stays ON during monitoring of I/O signal.
② Indicates the type of signal being monitored.
IN: Input signal (I)
OUT: Output signal (Q)
M: Internal signal (M)
Each time the MON key of the operation display panel is pressed, the signal
types change as shown below.
IN → OUT → M → IN → OUT →・・・・
③ Indicates the number of the signal being monitored.
Example of display
o Indicates "000" when any of the signal Nos. 0-7 is being monitored.
o Indicates "010" when any of the signal Nos. 10-17 is being monitored.
④ Indicates the ON/OFF status of signal.
ON ："8" indicated
OFF：" " (blank) indicated
Fig. 11-1

12.MAINTENANCE
12.1."AUTO. RUNNING" LAMP NOT ILLUMINATED
Pilot lamp "AUTO. RUNNING" on the front of the control panel will normally stay ON during
automatic operation.
If the "AUTO. RUNNING" pilot lamp is OFF, the following three causes are suspected.
(1) Defective pilot lamp bulb

(2) Defective relay
(3) Blown fuse
(4) Defective programmable controller itself
In the case of cause (1) or (2), replace with a spare one.
In the case of cause (3) or (4), all of the solenoid valves and pneumatically operated valves will
close, and the automatic operation functions will stop.
(The SELFJECTOR, however, will continue to rotate.)
Check to locate the cause and take corrective action in the sequence shown on the following page.
If there is nothing wrong with the control functions of the programmable controller, pilot lamp "RUN"
provided on the CPU board will always be ON during operation.

Set the power switch of the
Note 1) In the case of mark *, contact
control panel to "ON".
Mitsubishi Kakoki, or your nearest
Mitsubishi Kakoki service agent.
The "CONT. SOURCE" OFF

pilot lamp on the front of
the control panel is Set the power switch on the front of the
control panel to "OFF" and then replace
ON the power fuse in the panel with a spare
one.
Check the operation
indicating LED on the CPU
board.
ON
Pilot lamp "RUN" is
*
In this case, temporarily set the power
OFF Input signal LED "I7" ON switch on the front of the control panel to
is "OFF" and then to "ON" again. If the
same situation persists, automatic
operation can no longer be performed.
ON
Pilot lamp "CPU" is
OFF
OFF
Temporarily set the mode Check whether the

selector switch of the CPU motor operation in
board to "RUN" and then to progress signal output
"TERM" again to check from the starter is
whether pilot lamp "RUN" available.
lights.
Lights Available
Motor operation in
progress signal is
Pilot lamp "RUN"
Temporarily bridge the
Unavailable
Does not light. external terminals "M11"
* and "M12" to check whether
A defective CPU board is Check the starter. LED "I7" on the CPU board
suspected. lights.
Does not light.

LED "I7"
Light
*
Check the external wiring A defective CPU
between the starter and board is suspected.
automatic control panel.

12.2.INDICATION OF OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL ERROR
If a trouble occurs in the operation display panel, an error number will appear in the address
indicating section.
If an error number is on display, perform checks according to the following table.
Error No. Cause Check Point

E10 The power supply to the CPU board Check whether the "PWR" LED on the CPU board is
is unavailable. ON.
The communications cable is Check the connections of the communications cable.
open-circuited or improperly Replace the communications cable.
connected.
E11, E90 The CPU board is incorrectly set or Contact Mitsubishi Kakoki or your nearest Mitsubishi
defective. Kakoki service agent.
E20-E26 The communications cable is Check the connections of the communications cable.
E31, E80 open-circuited or improperly Replace the communications cable.
connected.
E30 The mode selector switch on the Set the mode selector switch to "TERM".
CPU board is placed at "RUN"
position.
NOTE
Error No. "E10" will appear for a while after the power supply to the automatic control
panel has been turned on. This is not an error.
CAUTION
When you check or replace the CPU board and/or communications cables, use care to
prevent electrical shock.

13.AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW DIAGRAM
Automatic Electric
Starter Power source
(GSH-1) Control panel
SV4 5
S
3 P SV3 SV2 SV1 SV9
R4 S S S S
9
CV1 4
WD
1
C
OIL HEATER
7 10
LM
6 12
E MM
13
B 2
M
A DD 8
11
P
C
MKK SUPPLY
F D
Fig. 17-1

SV1: Solenoid valve (for Bowl opening water)
SV2: Solenoid valve (for Bowl closing water)
SV3: Solenoid valve (for Sealing water)
SV9: Solenoid valve (for Partial bowl opening water)
5 3-way solenoid valve (SV4: for Feed valve air supply) E Water inlet
11 Oil strainer

14.TIMING CHART
14.1.HIDENS OPERATION
14.1.1.HIDENS Operation (Automatic Operation, Automatic Stopping)

14.1.2.HIDENS Operation (Bowl Washing)

14.1.3.HIDENS Operation (Alarm)

14.2.PURIFIER OPERATION
14.2.1.Purifier Operation (Automatic Operation, Automatic Stopping)

APPENDIX (SJ-G Series)
The appended drawing to this manual contains all of the optional detectors and circuits, some of which
may not be provided or used, depending on the specification for the SELFJECTOR you have purchased.
Refer to the drawing in the finished drawing as well.

MITSUBISHI
SELFJECTOR
GENIUS -SERIES
Instruction Manual
Maintenance Manual
for English
SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Maintenance Manual

IMPORTANCE


! WARNING
SELFJECTOR).
SELFJECTOR is basically available in the following two versions. The operation

manual describes the operations and control devices of the individual versions
separately from what is common to all. With this in mind, it is expected that the
manual will be read.
No. Available Version Type ID

Code*
1 Total discharge type Automatic specification G
Manual specification
2 HIDENS type HIDENS specification GH
*: These type codes are suffixed to model designations to identify the respective
SELFJECTOR versions such as SJ10G or SJ10GH.

The present manual is Part 5 "Maintenance manual".


Intended for
Part Manual Description ① ② ③
1 Aboard fitting-out procedure Information for machine transport, handling and ○ ○
storage.
Instructions on how to install and dimensions.
System diagram and connection diagram.
2 Operation manual 1 Precautions for safety.
Configuration and structure of SELFJECTOR. ○
Motor, starter and control panel.
Multi-monitor.
3 Operation manual 2 Precautions for safety.
Functions of component devices. ○
Operation setting items and adjusting method.
How to start and stop.
4 Operation manual 3A Precautions for safety.
Functional, operational and maintenance information ○
concerning GBC-1 & GBC-2 type automatic control
panel.
Operation manual 3B Precautions for safety.
Functional, operational and maintenance information ○
concerning GSH-1 type automatic control panel.
5 Maintenance manual Precautions for safety.

How to disassemble and reassemble. ○
Maintenance and checkup procedure.
Trouble shooting.
① : for Design engineer. ② : for Installer. ③ : for Operator or Engine engineer.
NOTE
Relevant operation manual only is furnished out of Part 4 (Operation manual 3A & 3B) when
SELFJECTOR with any types of the automatic specifications indicated below is purchased.
Type of automatic specification : GBC-1 , GBC-2 , GSH-1

CONTENTS
1 PRECAUTIONS IN SAFETY ....................1-1 4 MAINTENANCE INSPECTION
PROCEDURES FOR MAJOR PARTS.....4-1

1.1 SYMBOLS RELATED TO SAFETY .............1-1
1.2 LABELS FOR SAFETY ............................1-2 4.1 BEARING REPLACEMENT INTERVALS .....4-1
1.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................1-3 4.2 BOWL .................................................4-1
1.4 DEFINITION OF TERMS ..........................1-6 4.2.1 Corrosion of bowl.......................4-1
4.2.2 Corrective steps for corrosion ... 4-2

2 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY .....2-1
4.2.3 Disc ..........................................4-3
2.1 DISASSEMBLY ......................................2-1
4.2.4 Bowl body ..................................4-4
2.1.1 Cover .........................................2-3
4.2.5 Bowl hood..................................4-5
2.1.2 Bowl ...........................................2-5
4.2.6 Main seal ring ............................4-5
2.1.3 Horizontal shaft ..........................2-16
4.2.7 Distributor ..................................4-6
2.1.4 Water supplying device..............2-22
4.2.8 Various types of O rings of bowl
2.1.5 Vertical shaft ..............................2-25
................................................4-6
2.1.6 Gear pump .................................2-29
4.2.9 Main cylinder .............................4-7
2.2 REASSEMBLY.......................................2-32
4.2.10 Pilot valve assembly ..................4-7
2.2.1 Bowl ...........................................2-34
4.3 VERTICAL SHAFT SYSTEM .....................4-8
2.2.2 Vertical shaft ..............................2-37
4.3.1 Vertical shaft..............................4-8
2.2.3 Water supplying device..............2-38
4.3.2 Upper springs ............................4-8
2.2.4 Horizontal shaft ..........................2-38
4.3.3 Lower bearing block ..................4-9
2.2.5 Reassembly of trap....................2-40
4.3.4 Flat spring..................................4-9
2.2.6 Gear pump .................................2-41
4.3.5 Steel ball ....................................4-9
3 MAINTENANCE INSPECTION 4.3.6 Lower spring ..............................4-9
PROCEDURES .........................................3-1 4.3.7 Height of vertical shaft ............... 4-10
3.1 ROUTINE CHECKS ................................3-1 4.3.8 Installed height of flat spring
3.2 LUBRICANT REPLACEMENT INTERVALS...3-2 (adjustment of spacer) ............... 4-10
3.3 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE 4.4 HORIZONTAL SHAFT SYSTEM ................4-11
OF SYNTHESIZED LUBRICANT ...............3-3 4.4.1 Spiral gear .................................4-11
3.4 EXPENDABLE PARTS 4.4.2 Horizontal shaft..........................4-11
REPLACEMENT INTERVALS .....................3-5 4.4.3 Collar .........................................4-11
3.5 BOWL OPENING INTERVALS (GUIDELINES) 4.4.4 Friction block .............................4-12
........................................................3-7 4.4.5 Friction pulley ............................4-12
3.6 OVERHAUL (GUIDELINES) .....................3-7 4.5 GEAR PUMP ........................................4-12

4.5.1 Safety joint .................................4-12 6.3.1 Check for unbalance
4.5.2 Drive gear, driven gear in the bowl. ...............................6-9
and bush ...................................4-12 6.3.2 Checking for defects
4.5.3 Valve stem .................................4-12 in vertical shaft system ............. 6-9
4.6 LUBRICANT ..........................................4-13 6.3.3 Checking for defects
4.7 BRAKE EQUIPMENT ..............................4-13 in horizontal shaft system......... 6-9
4.8 WATER SUPPLYING DEVICE ...................4-13 6.4 DOES NOT DISCHARGE SLUDGE
4.9 INSPECTION OF MULTI-MONITOR EVEN IF DISCHARGE PROCEDURES ARE
FOR FUNCTION....................................4-14 PERFORMED. .......................................6-11
4.9.1 Leakage Monitor (LM)................4-14 6.5 MIXED FLOW OF WATER
4.9.2 Discharge Detector (DD) ...........4-14 TOWARD LIGHT LIQUID OUTLET ..............6-11
4.9.3 Water Detector (WD) .................4-14 6.6 LOW FEEDING RATE OR NOT FED AT ALL
.......................................................6-11
5 PERIODIC INSPECTION CHART ............5-1
6.7 GEAR OIL MIXED WITH WATER ...............6-12
6 CAUSES OF TROUBLES 6.8 POOR SEPARATION ..............................6-12
AND CORRECTIVE STEPS..................6-1 6.9 LOW SPEED .........................................6-12
6.1 ALARMS ..............................................6-1 6.10 SLUDGE UNEVENLY ACCUMULATED
6.1.1 Types of alarms .........................6-1 IN BOWL ...............................................6-12
6.1.2 Alarm indications .......................6-2 6.11 MIXED FLOW OF OIL
6.1.3 Processing sequence TOWARD HEAVY LIQUID OUTLET .........6-13
after occurrence of alarm ...........6-4 6.12 ACCESSORIES .....................................6-13
6.1.4 Self-diagnostic fnction 6.12.1 Solenoid valve unit
of detectors ...............................6-5 for the operating water............6-13
6.2 OCCURRENCE OF OIL LEAKAGE .............6-6 6.12.2 Solenoid valve for water ............6-13
6.2.1 Check the flow rates of valve 6.12.3 Three-way raw liquid valve........ 6-13
closing operating water and sealing 6.12.4 Leakage Monitor (LM) function
water. ..........................................6-6 of Multi-Monitor .......................6-14
6.2.2 Checks to perform 6.12.5 Discharge Detector (DD) function
by disassembling bowl................6-7 of Multi-Monitor .......................6-16
6.2.3 Checks to perform 6.12.6 Water Detector (WD) function
by disassembling water supplying of Multi-Monitor .......................6-17
device .........................................6-7
6.2.4 Other ..........................................6-7
6.3 OCCURRENCE
OF ABNORMAL VIBRATION ......................6-9




1-1
The one shown in Pic 1 is put in the spare part box. After fitting-out aboard, the person in charge of
Pic 2, Pic 3are factory attached direct on SELFJECTOR. Do not smear them by painting but keep them
Pic 1
Pic 2 Pic 3

1-2
! WARNING
Perfectly assemble.
particularly of:
(A) Bowl nut

(B) Disk nut
service agency.

1-3
SELFJECTOR installation, etc. If the vibration is excessive,
immediately stop SELFJECTOR without discharging sludge.
Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective action to
ensure safety before restarting SELFJECTOR.
Even if readings are below 100 μ m, continuous cruising ship
vibrations 4-5 times higher than registered when external vibrating
forces are small, such as when the main engine is not in operation, Fig. 1-1
could adversely affect the durability of SELFJECTOR. In such case,

stop SELFJECTOR immediately. Then, check for the cause and take
necessary corrective action to ensure safety before restarting
SELFJECTOR as described above.

1-4
! WARNING



Others
agency.
3. The bowl is factory balanced. Never interchange bowl parts [Disc (1)] even within the same model.
For ambiguous points in the instruction manual,

contact our company or service agency.

1-5
Clarifier operation (clarifying operation):
Density (ρ): Mass per unit volume. Operation of separating into 2 phases or liquid
and solid or, here, into oil and solids.
Specific gravity (γ): Ratio of mass to mass of (See "Clarifier operation".)
water of the same volume. Varies with
temperature. Parallel operation:
Operation with oil fed proportionally to several
Feed rate: Volume per unit time of untreated purifiers arranged in parallel.
liquid upstream the purifier expressed in terms of (See "Parallel operation".)
L/h or m3/h.
Series operation:
Actual capacity: Purifier treating capacity based Operation by several purifiers arranged in series.
on SM Standard (eliminating sludge with 1.8 of (See "Series operation".)
specific gravity and 2μm of diameter or more).
(See "Feed rate" above.) Total discharge type SJ
Purifier designed to totally discharge all contained
Feed liquid: Untreated oil to feed to purifier. in the bowl.
Light liquid: Oil treated by purifier or purified oil. Partial discharge type SJ
Purifier designed to partially discharge water and
Heavy liquid: Separated moisture and heavy solids only in the bowl. This type has the total
components in oil or simply "water". discharge function as well.
Sludge: Solids accumulated in bowl in narrow Abbreviations and units

sense. Mixture of solids, water and oil discharged
from bowl in wide sense. L: Liter: Unit of volume.
h: Hour(s): Unit of time.
-1
Interface: Boundary surface between heavy and min : Number of revolutions per minute.
light liquids in bowl. Hz: Number of frequency.
(cycles per second)
Purifier operation (purifying operation): φ: Unit of diameter in mm.
2
Operation of separating into 3 phases or liquid, mm /S: unit of kinetic viscosity of oil.
liquid and solid or, here, into oil, water and solids. ISO: Standards established by International
(See "Purifier operation".) Standardization Organization.

1-6
2 Disassembly and reassembly
2.1 Disassembly
Points to remember when disassembling
! WARNING
Check to ensure that the machine is in the completely stopped state.

Check the fan of the motor to determine whether the machine is stationary.
If the Multi-Monitor MM2, MM3 (standard equipment for automatic specification GSH-1 version) is
provided, the LED will flash during rotation, and will light when the machine stops, thus enabling
you to know that the machine has stopped.
Turn off the power supply of the starter to eliminate the possibility of sudden rotation of the
SELFJECTOR.
Close the valves of feed liquid inlet and light liquid outlet.
When a steam type oil heater is provided, close the steam supply pipe.
The piping and main body (the bowl in particular) are heated to a high temperature by the
treatment liquid. To prevent burns, take proper steps such as wearing protective gloves.
Do not attempt any further scope of disassembly than covered in this manual.
Make sure that the SELFJECTOR is always operated with the main body fully assembled. Never
operate the machine with the bowl exposed by removing the cover, as accidents could result.
NOTE
All the screws used in the SELFJECTOR are “threaded clockwise”.

2-1
A list of required tools
817
Jack(10)
801 808
Dismantling stand Cap nut spanner
818
Hook spanner
809
Jack(3)
819
Push bolt_
810
802
Main sealing cutter
Bowl nut handle
820
811 Hexagon socket
803 bolt×２
Jack(1) heat bolt x 2
812
Protective plate
804
Disc nut handle 813
Jack(5)
821
Jack(4)
805
Light liquid chamber handle 814
Jack(6)
822
Jack(9)
(SJ50G～SJ150G)
807 815
Jack(7)
Disc clamp plate
823
handle（１）
816
Jack(8)

2-2
2.1.1 Cover 408
325
Remove the plug mounted in the lateral direction of the
bracket to remove the oil from inside the piping.
(Automatic specification machine) bracket 324

Loosen the cap nuts at the top and bottom of the sealing
water tube (408) and remove the top of the sealing water
tube. (Fig. 2-1) 326 plug
(Manual specification machine) Fig. 2-1

Remove the measuring hopper together with the globe
valve. 317
Remove the cap nuts of the connecting pipes (2) (324) and
connecting tube (2) with the hook spanner (818). Loosen the
union nuts (326) at the bottom of the connection pipes and
tube with the hook spanner (818) and direct them sideways
to make sure that when the cover is removed, they do not get
in the way. (Fig. 2-1)
Use care to prevent loss of the flow rate regulating orifice
Fig. 2-2
inserted in the portion indicated by the arrow. (Fig. 2-2)
320
Remove the cover nut (317) with a spanner. (Fig. 2-2)
Using a spanner, remove the nut (320) tightening the inlet

pipe.
(Fig. 2-3)
Fig. 2-3
Loosen the socket set screw (313) (M6). Use care to prevent
313
loss.
(Fig. 2-4)
Fig. 2-4

2-3
Lightly strike the top of the inlet pipe with a wooden hammer
to detach the tightly held taper portion. (Fig. 2-5)
Fig. 2-5
Remove the socket cap screws (302) (in four places) locking 302
the frame and sludge cover. Use care to prevent loss of the
socket cap screws. (Fig. 2-6)
Fig. 2-6
Thread the jack (6) (814) into the threaded portion of the
upper hood and mount the handle (823). (Fig. 2-7)
814
Install the wire on the handle of the jack (6) and withdraw the
sludge cover (trap) (301) in the vertical direction through use
of the chain block. (Fig. 2-8) 823
! CAUTION Fig. 2-7
When it is withdrawn by the chain block, use care to

make sure that the wire does not get out of the handle.
301
! CAUTION
Don't install the wire on the grip of the sludge cover (301)
to withdraw the sludge cover {Models SJ10G ～ 30G }.
Damage to the sludge cover may result.
Fig. 2-8

2-4
2.1.2 Bowl
804
Refer to the Bowl Assembly Drawing
(Fig. 2-32)
2.1.2.1 Removing gravity disc

Mount the disc nut handle (804) on the disc nut (122) and
hold it down by hand to make sure that it does not go up, and
strike it with a hammer counter-clockwise to remove it. (Fig.
2-9)
Fig. 2-9
134
321
Remove the heavy liquid chamber (134), impeller (2) (321), 133
packing (133) and gravity disc (121). (Fig. 2-10)
121
The gravity disc can be replaced after disassembly up to this 116

step.
120
323
322
319
Fig. 2-10
Mount the light liquid chamber handle (805) to the light liquid
chamber (120), hold it down by hand to make sure that it
does not go up, and strike it with a hammer to remove it. (Fig. 805
2-11)
Fig. 2-11

2-5
Pull and remove the impeller (1) (322) and inlet pipe (319) by 319
hand. (Fig. 2-12)
322
Fig. 2-12
2.1.2.2 Withdrawing bowl
Secure the dismantling stand (801) on the dismantling site

801
through use of the drilled holes in four places. (Fig. 2-13)
Remove the cap nut (124) tightening the bowl on the vertical
shaft, using the cap nut spanner (808). (Fig. 2-14)
※ How to use cap nut spanner Fig. 2-13

Insert the cap nut spanner in the bowl, set the spanner on the
cap nut, and thread the threaded rod of the spanner into the
threaded hole at the head of the cap nut (a), turn the handle
of the spanner (b), and draw it up. The bowl can then be
removed with the cap nut (124) mounted.
(a) 808
808
(b)
124
Fig. 2-14

2-6
821
Mount the jack (4) (821) by threading it into the threaded
portion of the distributor (108). (Fig. 2-15)
Fig. 2-15
Turn down the handle of the jack (4) (821) until the bowl is
slightly raised. (Fig. 2-16)
NOTE
When the push bolt is brought into contact with the end
of the vertical shaft by rotation of the handle, the
resistance of the handle will increase. The bowl is held
tightly against the vertical shaft by the taper portion. To
loosen the bowl, further rotate the handle by striking
with a hammer, and turn it down until the bowl is slightly
Fig. 2-16
raised.
Mount the shackle to the handle of the jack (4) (821) and
slowly draw up the bowl in the vertical direction by use of the
chain block. (Fig. 2-17)
! CAUTION
If the bowl held tightly against the vertical shaft by the

taper portion is directly lifted, the vertical shaft will also
be drawn up, and damage to parts may result.
NOTE
The bowl might be withdrawn with the bow bush
attached.
Fig. 2-17

2-7
Place the lifted bowl on the dismantling stand (801). In this 821
case, make sure that the four pins of the dismantling stand fit
in the holes at the bottom of the bowl.
Remove the jack (4) (821). (Fig. 2-18)
! CAUTION
When the bowl is placed on the dismantling stand, use 801

care to make sure that your hands are not caught.
Fig. 2-18
807
2.1.2.3 Detaching bowl nut and withdrawing disc (1)
Thread the disc clamp plate (807) into the distributor (108)
and tighten it with the nut. (Fig. 2-19) (Turn down the nut
firmly by striking with a hammer.)
Before tightening the nut, check to ensure that the disc clamp
plate bolt has been threaded all the way into distributor.
The bowl nut can be removed easily compressing the disc (1).
Fig. 2-19
! CAUTION
Do not remove the bowl nut without using the disc clamp
plate. Bowl parts and tools could be damaged by undue
force exerted on them.

2-8
After securing the bowl nut handle (802) on the bowl nut
(119) with the nut, rotate it by striking with a hammer to 802
remove the bowl nut. (Fig. 2-20)
NOTE
If the bowl nut handle is not secured with the nut, when
it is struck with a hammer, it may lift and cause damage
to the pins.
! CAUTION Fig. 2-20
When the bowl nut does not rotate even if lightly struck
with a hammer, it means that the disc (1) shown in Fig.
2-19 has not be fully tightened. Do not attempt to
remove the bowl nut by forcibly striking with a hammer.
Damage to the bowl parts and tools may result.
Loosen the nut to remove the disc clamp plate (807). Place
the protective plate (812) on the top of the distributor. (Fig. 812
2-21)
Fig. 2-21
Place the jack (1) (803) on the bowl hood. (Fig. 2-22) 803
Fig. 2-22

2-9
Secure it with the disc nut (122). (Fig. 2-23)
push bolt
122
Fig. 2-23
819
Turn the push bolt (819) to raise the bowl hood. (Fig. 2-24)
Fig. 2-24
Install the wire and remove the bowl hood with a chain
block.(Fig. 2-25)
(If the top disc (113) comes out with the hood, remove it by
lightly striking with a wooden hammer.)
NOTE
The main seal ring (108) is provided under the bowl
hood. When the bowl hood is removed, use care to
prevent damage to the seal surface. 113
NOTE
Withdraw the bowl hood vertically. If it is removed with
an undue force in a tilted state, the fitting portion might
be damaged, making reassembly difficult.
Fig. 2-25

2-10
※Main seal ring removal procedures
810
Turn the bowl hood (115) over, and cut the main seal ring with
the main seal ring cutter (810), using a hammer.
Cut the main seal ring in two places 1 to 2cm apart and remove
the cut piece. Then lift the ring with a screwdriver. By so doing,
the main seal ring can be removed relatively easily. (Fig. 2-26)
115
! CAUTION
Care should be taken not to damage the main seal ring 810
groove (its side surfaces in particular) on the bowl hood
side. Liquid leakage may result.
main seal ring
Fig. 2-26
Mount the jack (4) (821) in the distributor and lift it. Then the
821
disc (1) (111), upper discs (112) and top disc (113) will come
out in the condition that they were mounted in the distributor.
(Fig. 2-27)
113
The uppermost portion of the disc (1) accommodates three
upper discs (112) which do not have any fringe in their
circumferential portions.
111
Fig. 2-27

2-11
2.1.2.4 Removing main cylinder
812
! CAUTION
Use care to prevent damage to the sheet surface and
sliding portions.
NOTE
inside the main cylinder
To remove the main cylinder, mount the jack (1) and
then strike the jack evenly all around with a
protective rod or something else in between to lower
the main cylinder all the way. Then draw up the main
cylinder by use of the tool.
Spray a penetrating lubricant against the inside and
outside circumferential sliding portions of the main
cylinder beforehand. An effective auxiliary means is
to put cubes of ice inside the main cylinder 803
( indicated by the arrow ) and remove them 2 or 3

minutes later.
Fig. 2-28
After installing the protective plate (812) in the cap nut

installing portion of the bowl body, secure the jack (1)(803)
on the main cylinder with the socket cap screw. (Fig. 2-28)
Turn down the jack with the push bolt (819) and handle(1)
(823) to remove it. (Fig. 2-29)
819
NOTE
There is only a slight clearance between the main
cylinder and bowl body. When the main cylinder is
removed, if it is only slightly inclined, it can no longer be 823
withdrawn.
When the handle resists, do not blindly continue to rotate 803
the handle. Each time the handle resists, strike the top of
the push bolt with a hammer, or temporarily back it off.
By so doing, withdraw the main cylinder little by little.
(Hammering will correct the inclination of the main
cylinder and will also eliminate the eccentricity of the
tool.)
Fig. 2-29

2-12
2.1.2.5 Withdrawing pilot valve
Using a hexagon rod spanner, remove the valve nut (132).
(Fig. 2-30)
132
NOTE
Be sure to insert the hexagon rod spanner securely in
the hexagon hole of the valve nut. Otherwise damage to
the hexagon hole might result.
Hold the jack (3) (809) against the pilot valve portion, thread
the dismantling bolt into the pilot valve (128), and then turn
down the nut to remove it. Withdraw the other one by the
same procedures. (Fig. 2-31)
Remove the jack (3) and withdraw the pilot valve (128) and 809
valve sheet (130) from the valve guide (125). Dismantling

bolt
128
Fig. 2-30
809
Dismantling
128
bolt
Fig. 2-31

2-13
122
112
134
321
133
111
121
116
120 117
323 108
322
110
319 109
107
119
105
106
124
102
115 103
101
118
123 128
114
104 125
131
129
113 126
127
130
132
Fig. 2-32 Bowl Assembly Drawing

2-14
Bowl Parts List Table 2-1
101 Bowl body 1 120 Light liquid chamber 1
102 O ring 1 121 Gravity disc 1set
103 Knock pin 1 122 Disc nut 1
104 Drain nozzle 2 123 Bowl bush 1
105 Main cylinder 1 124 Cap nut 1
106 Spring pin 1 125 Valve guide 2
107 O ring 1 126 O ring 4
108 Distributor 1 127 O ring 4
109 Pin 1 128 Pilot valve 2
110 Key 1 129 O ring 2
111 Disc (1) 1set 130 Valve sheet 2
112 Upper disc（＊1） 1set 131 O ring 2
113 Top disc 1 132 Valve nut 2
114 O ring 1 133 Packing 1
115 Bowl hood 1 134 Heavy liquid chamber 1
116 O ring 1 319 Inlet pipe 1
117 O ring 1 321 Impeller (2) 1
118 Main seal ring 1 322 Impeller (1) 1
119 Bowl nut 1 323 O ring 1
(*1) Comments : Number of upper disc

SJ10G/20G/30G/50G/70G/100G : 3 sheets
SJ60G/120G/150G :7 sheets
When ordering parts, let us know the parts Nos. and names shown in the finished drawing
manual, not the numbers in the above list.

2-15
2.1.3 Horizontal shaft
! WARNING
Re-check that the power supply of the starter has been
turned off.
Drain
Plug
Refer to the Horizontal Shaft Assembly Drawing (Fig.
2-46), and Gear Pump Assembly Drawing (Fig. 2-63).
Remove the drain plug to remove the lubricant from inside the Fig. 2-33
gear case. (Fig. 2-33)
Disconnect the motor, lift and support it by the chain block,

and then remove the bolts and withdraw the motor. (Fig.
2-34) Friction block
(In this case, pay heed to the friction block which might
come off and fall down.)
! CAUTION
When the motor is to be lifted, mount the chain block
just above the eyebolt for the sake of safety.
Fig. 2-34
619
Remove the friction block (621) inserted in the friction boss

(619) mounted in the motor. (Fig. 2-35)
621
Fig. 2-35

2-16
If the proximity switch of the Discharge Detector (standard
equipment for automatic specification GSH-1 version) is
provided on the pump housing, disconnect its connector.
NOTE
Handle the proximity switch with great care, as it is a
precision machine.
Especially, do not give a shock to the proximity switch at Fig. 2-36
the tip. It could be damaged.
NOTE
Before removing the gear pump, remove the oil collected
before and behind the gear pump piping (by use of the
drain cock, etc.). In addition, place a tray under the pump
to receive the oil.
Remove the cap nuts of the connecting tubes (1)

Fig. 2-37
(connecting tube(2)) at the gear pump. (Fig. 2-36)
(Place an oil receiving container under the pump Push bolt
beforehand.) tap
Remove the bolts tightening the gear pump with the

hexagon rod spanner (M10), and remove the gear
pump from the main body. (Fig. 2-37)
Remove the gear cover and remove the socket cap

screws (M8) (626) securing the bearing retainer (611) 608
611
to the bearing housing (3) (608). (Fig. 2-38)
626
Fig. 2-38
Remove the bolts (612) tightening the bearing
housing (3) (608) and use them as push bolts to
remove the bearing housing (3). (Fig. 2-39)
Fig. 2-39

2-17
Remove the lock nut (604) and lock washer (605) securing
the friction pulley (618) on the horizontal shaft. (Fig. 2-40)
604
618 605
Fig. 2-40
Using the jack (5), bolt (811) , push bolt (819) and handle
811
(823), withdraw the friction pulley. (Fig. 2-41)
813
NOTE
Check to ensure that the brakes are free.
823
819
Fig. 2-41
Withdraw the horizontal shaft toward the pump side. (Fig.

2-42)
If the horizontal shaft is hard to withdraw, hold a copper rod
or wooden board against the friction pulley side of the
horizontal shaft and lightly strike it, while using care to make
sure that the oil seal (625), etc. are not damaged by the
threaded portion of the horizontal shaft and the keys (603) of
the friction pulley. (When the horizontal shaft is withdrawn,
there is danger of damage to the spiral gear (616). Therefore,
616
it is desirable that the horizontal shaft be supported by
another person when it is struck.) Fig. 2-42
Remove the bolt securing the spiral gear on the gear boss to
remove the spiral gear.

2-18
Remove the socket set screw (607) securing the safety joint 628
to remove the safety joint. Then remove the retaining ring (C)
(606)
Loosen the socket set screw (628) securing the collar (2)
(627). (Fig. 2-43) 607
606
Using the jack (5) (813), jack (8) (816), bolt (811), push bolt
(819) and handle (823), remove the pump side bearing (602)
Socket set screw (628)
together with the collar (2) (627). (Fig. 2-44)
(606)
! CAUTION
Do not re-use the removed bearing.
Do not remove the bearing except when it has to be
replaced (627)
Fig. 2-43
NOTE
Set the protective plate (812) between the end of the 816
horizontal shaft and the bolt (819) to prevent damage to
813
the end of the horizontal shaft.
Remove the pulley side key (602).

Support the gear boss with a pipe or something else and 811
812
strike it with a copper hammer from the friction pulley side of
the horizontal shaft to remove the friction pulley side bearing 819
(602), collar (1) (617) and gear boss (613) from the horizontal Fig. 2-44
shaft. (Fig. 2-45)
603 602
613
Fig. 2-45

2-19
602
622
624
625
617
618
605
620 604
623
619
607
603 601
621
612
628
614
615
616
613
606
609
627
608
602 610
611
626
Fig. 2-46 Horizontal Shaft Assembly Drawing

2-20
Horizontal Shaft Parts List Table 2-2
601 Horizontal Shaft 1 616 Spiral gear 1
602 Ball bearing (1) 2 617 Collar (1) 1
603 Key 2 618 Friction pulley 1
604 Lock nut 1 619 Friction boss 1
605 Lock washer 1 620 Socket set screw 1
606 Retaining ring (C) 1 621 Friction block 50Hz 4
607 Socket cap screw 1 Friction block 60Hz 3
608 Bearing housing (3) 1 622 Bearing housing (4) 1
609 Oil seal 1 623 Bolt 4
610 O ring 1 624 O ring 1
611 Bearing retainer 1 625 Oil seal 1
612 Bolt 4 626 Bolt 2
613 Gear boss 1 627 Collar (2) 1
614 Bolt 3 628 Socket set screw 1
615 Spring washer 3

2-21
2.1.4 Water supplying device
823
Refer to the Water Supplying Device Assembly Drawing
(Fig. 2-53) 819
Remove the bowl bush mounted in the tapered portion of the
813
upper part of the vertical shaft, using the jack (5) (813), push
bolt (819), handle (823), bolt (811) and jack (10) (817). (Fig.
811
2-47)
817
Fig. 2-47
Loosen the socket set screw (710) with the hexagon rod
spanner (M6). (Fig. 2-48) 710
Fig. 2-48
Loosen the cap nut to remove the operating water tube Teflon tube
(Teflon tube) mounted on the operating water disc (701). (Fig.
2-49)
Fig. 2-49
Remove the socket cap screws (702) located in three places

of the operating water disc, using the hexagon rod spanner
(M8). (Fig. 2-50)
702
Fig. 2-50

2-22
823
Place the jack (5) on the head of the vertical shaft, and set up
the push bolt (819), handle (823) and bolt (811). Then thread 819
the end of the bolt (811) into the chamber cover (709) and
813
turn down the handle. The whole of the water supplying
device will then go up and get out of the vertical shaft. (Fig.
811
2-51, Fig. 2-52)
709
Remove the bolts (706) located in four places of the

operating water chamber (705), using a spanner. Using a Fig. 2-51
hexagon rod spanner, remove the socket cap screw (704)
located under the water supplying device. Remove the
operating water nozzle (703) from the operating water
chamber (705). Use care to prevent loss of small parts like
bolts, washers, etc.
Fig. 2-52

2-23
706
707
710
709
703
Water Supplying Device Parts List Table 2-3

701 Operating water disc 1
702 Socket cap screw 3
703 Operating water nozzle 1
708
704 Socket cap screw 3
705 Operating water chamber 1
706 Bolt 4
705 707 Tongued washer 4
708 O ring 2
709 Chamber cover 1
710 Socket set screw 1
711 Packing 1
When ordering parts, let us know the parts Nos.

708 and names shown in the finished drawing
711 702
701
704
Fig. 2-53 Water Supplying Device Assembly Drawing

2-24
2.1.5 Vertical shaft
Refer to the Vertical Shaft Assembly Drawing (Fig. 2-58).
(Now, already withdraw the water supplying device and bowl
514
bush.) Withdraw the mist cover (522).
Using a T-shaped wrench, remove the three bolts (514) of
the bearing cover (1) (513), and take out the bearing cover
513
(1) together with the bearing cap (1) (Fig. 2-54). When they
are taken out, the O ring (505) might come out together. Use
care to prevent loss of the O ring. Take out the bearing cap
(2) (518), flat spring (520) and spacer (1) (521) as well.
Withdraw the bearing housing (1). Fig. 2-54
<When the upper spring is to be replaced>

Remove the spring retainer (1) (506), and withdraw the upper
spring (508), spring case (507) and bearing sleeve (509).
NOTE 822
Before the vertical shaft is lifted, check to ensure
that the spiral gear or the whole of the horizontal
shaft has been removed.
When the vertical shaft alone is to be withdrawn
without disassembly of the horizontal shaft, remove
the spiral gear from the gear boss.
Remove the gear cover. Using a spanner, remove the three

bolts (614) tightening the spiral gear (616).
Using a wooden hammer, remove the spiral gear from the

gear boss (613). (The spiral gear will come off from the motor
side toward the bearing housing (3). ) Shift the position of the
501
spiral gear toward the bearing housing (3) to make sure that
it does not interfere when the vertical shaft is lifted.
Hold the top thread of the vertical shaft and Pull out the
vertical shaft above. The vertical shaft will come out with the
bearing and bearing case attached.(SJ10G～30G)
Mount the jack (7) (822) on the top thread of the vertical shaft,
and slowly withdraw the vertical shaft in the vertical direction
by the chain block. The vertical shaft will come out with the
bearing and bearing case attached. (Fig. 2-55) (SJ50G～ Fig. 2-55
150G)
SJ50G～150G

2-25
Take out the bearing case (1) (510) by striking with a copper
or lead hammer to prevent damage.
Take out the steel ball (536), spring seat (536) and lower
spring (539) from inside the bearing housing (2) (523).
NOTE 531
When the vertical shaft was disassembled, be sure to Hexagon socket heat bolt
carefully check the bearing.
Thread two Hexagon socket heat bolt (5) equally into the
bearing case (3) (531) to withdraw the bearing case (3).
Remove the spacer (2) (534). (Fig. 2-56)
534
Assemble the jack (7) (815), jack (5) (813), bolt (811), push
bolt (819) and handle (823), and withdraw the bearing case
(2) (528), bearing cover (2) (537), collar (538), bearing (2)
(529) and ball bearing (3) (532) together. (Fig. 2-57)
Fig. 2-56
Remove the lock nut located at the top, using the hook
spanner (818). Remove the ball bearing (1) located at the top
by striking the inner race through use of a chisel to prevent
823 813 528
damage to the vertical shaft.
! CAUTION
Do not re-use the removed bearing.
Do not remove the bearing except when it has to be
replaced.
819 811 815
Fig. 2-57

2-26
522
517
514 511
515 516
513
519
518 501
520
521
537
510
529
512
530 528
509
538
505 532
534
531 533
504 536
535
539
505
527
507 525
503
508
506 526
502 523
524
Fig. 2-58 Vertical Shaft Assembly Drawing

2-27
Vertical Shaft Parts List Table 2-4
501 Vertical shaft 1 521 Spacer (1) 1
502 Lock washer 1 522 Mist cover 1
503 Lock nut 1 523 Bearing housing (2) 1
504 Bearing housing (1) 1 524 O ring 1
505 O ring 2 525 Bolt 4
506 Spring retainer (1) 6 526 Spring washer 4
507 Spring case 6 527 Washer 1
508 Upper spring 6 528 Bearing case (2) 1
509 Bearing sleeve 1 529 Bearing (2) 1
510 Bearing case (1) 1 530 Key 1
511 Ball bearing (1) 1 531 Bearing case (3) 1
512 Key 1 532 Ball bearing (3) 1
513 Bearing cover (1) 1 533 Spring pin 2
514 Bolt 3 534 Spacer (2) 1
515 Spring washer 3 535 Spring seat 1
516 Bearing cap (1) 1 536 Steel ball 1
517 O ring 1 537 Bearing cover (2) 1
518 Bearing cap (2) 1 538 Collar 1
519 O ring 1 539 Lower spring 1
520 Flat spring 1

2-28
2.1.6 Gear pump
Refer to the Gear Pump Assembly Drawing
(Fig. 2-63).
Remove the socket cap screws (G13) located in four places G12
to remove the valve case (G12). (Fig. 2-59)
Fig. 2-59
Lightly strike the safety joint side of the drive gear with a
copper hammer to withdraw the valve case side bush (G11)
and driven gear (G10) together with the drive gear.
(Fig. 2-60) G11 valve case side
Withdraw the safety joint side bush (G11). (Fig. 2-60)

G10
safety joint side

G11
Normally, the valve stem need not be removed. When it is

disassembled, however, measure the dimension A with the
lock nut removed. When it is reassembled, be sure to turn
down the adjusting screw until the dimension A is reached.
(Fig. 2-61)
Fig. 2-60
Fig. 2-61

2-29
※ Replacement of safety joint Socket set screw
When the safety joint only is to be replaced, the gear
pump need not be removed from the bearing housing
(3). After removing the socket set screw with a hexagon
rod spanner, push the safety joint toward the horizontal Horizontal
shaft, and directly pull it sideways to remove it and shaft
replace it with a new one.
Safety joint
Fig. 2-62

2-30
Pump Parts List Table 2-5
G01 Pump housing 1 G13 Socket cap screw 4
G02 O ring 1 G14 Spring washer 4
G03 Oil seal 1 G15 O ring 1
G04 Retaining ring (C) 1 G16 Valve stem 1
G05 Socket cap screw 4 G17 Adjusting screw 1
G06 Gasket 2 G18 Nut 1
G07 Cover 1 G19 Valve spring 1
G08 Set screw (3) 2 G20 Cap nut 1
G09 Drive gear 1 G21 O ring 1
G10 Driven gear 1 G22 Safety joint 1
G11 Bush 4 G25 Nipple 2
G12 Valve case 1 G26 Holding disc 1
G22 G04 G26 G08 G07 G25

G03 G05 G06
G11
G06
G10
G25
G11
G02
G14
G01 G13
G09
G12
G15
G16
G19
G17
G18
G21
G20
Fig. 2-63 Gear Pump Assembly Drawing

2-31
2.2 Reassembly
The reassembly sequence is reversal of the disassembly sequence. The points to note at
reassembly are described below.
Prior to reassembly, thoroughly remove the dust and deposits from all the parts and
carefully check the parts. If there are defective parts, replace them.
For detailed information on the standard dimensions at reassembly, refer to the
maintenance inspection proce-dures.
Points to note at reassembly
! WARNING
Thoroughly perform all the steps required for reassembly.
The SELFJECTOR has many screw coupled parts. At the time of reassembly, check to
ensure that all these parts have been thoroughly tightened.
Remember that operation of the SELFJECTOR in a loosely tightened state could be very
dangerous.
Re-check that the following parts in particular have been thoroughly tightened.
(A) Bowl nut
(B) Disc nut
(C) Cap nut of vertical shaft
(D) Frame cover tightening bolt
→ Refer to P2-4 Fig. 2-6
(E) Inlet pipe tightening nut
→ Refer to P2-40 Fig. 2-79
Pay heed to corrosion and erosion

Check for damage caused by corrosion or erosion at regular intervals. If there are
questionable points, contact our company or service agency.
Never interchange bowl parts (except the disc (1) ) even if the models are same.

2-32
Confirmation of tally marks
On the bowl and other parts which have tally marks, be
sure to check that the tally marks are in alignment. Tally mark
When the bowl nut has been tightened, if the tally marks points
are out of alignment, please notify our company or
service agency. The following parts have tally marks.
Check the parts for confirmation.
＜Bowl＞ (Refer to Fig. 2-64)
① Bowl body
② Bowl nut
③ Light liquid chamber
④ Heavy liquid chamber
＜Cover＞
⑤ Nut (320)
! CAUTION
When the bowl nut has been tightened by threading it into
the bowl body, if the tally mark has gone more than 20mm
Fig. 2-64
ahead in the turning direction, notify our company or
service agency. (Fig. 2-65)
More than 20mm

out of alignment
Fig. 2-65

2-33
2.2.1 Bowl
(１) Make sure that when all of the O rings are mounted, they
are not twisted. Upper disc
To install O ring evenly in the valve guide, apply a coat of
machine oil to it and the groove.
(２) Be sure to check the tapered portion of the bowl body. If
there are scratches, correct them by an oil stone or
something else.
(３) To install the pilot valve, apply a machine oil to its outer
circumferential portion, and slowly press the pilot valve in Disc
by hand. If it is installed by striking with a hammer or
something else, damage to the O ring will result.
NOTE
Note that if the pilot valve is installed in a tilted state by
applying an undue pressure, its sliding surface will be
damaged. Fig. 2-66
When installing the pilot valve assembly, do not use
MOLYCOAT.
(４) Main seal ring installation procedures
① Press the main seal ring in the main seal ring groove of
the bowl hood by hand. Flat plate
② The main seal ring will be placed in a state of being
lifted from the groove. Put a flat plate (50 to 100mm
Main seal ring
wide) over across the main seal ring and evenly
hammer it down into place approximately 0.5～1.0mm
Bowl hood
off the bottom.
! CAUTION
If the sheet plane of the main seal ring is wavy, oil leakage
Fig. 2-67
will result. Install the main seal ring in such a way that the
sheet plane will be flat.
③ Before starting automatic operation, feed operating
water for closing bowl (SV2) manually for 20 seconds,
then feed operating water for opening bowl (SV1) for 2
seconds to effect discharge operation. Repeat this
operation for 3 or 4 times.
! CAUTION
It takes several tons of bowl opening water to close the
main cylinder. Repeating the cycles of water feed
described above, therefore, puts the main seal ring into
place. The main seal ring out of place could prevent sludge
from being properly discharged.

2-34
④ Put the bowl into a closed state with bowl closing
Approx.
water as described in ③, and manually operate the 3 to 5 mm
solenoid valve (SV3) to feed sealing water. Then, feed
bowl opening water (SV1) for 2 seconds to effect
discharge operation. At this point of time, check for the
Top disc
sound of sludge discharge. (For the durations of
sealing water feed required by different models, refer
to 3.6.5 in Operation Manual 2.) Upper discs,each
⑤ If no sound of sludge discharge is heard, the main without a fringe
seal ring may be out of place. Open the bowl, check

the installed condition of main seal ring and redo the
steps from ②. Discs, each Distrbutor
⑥ If there is the sound of sludge discharge, enter into with a fringe
automatic operation.
Fig. 2-68
(５) To install the main cylinder in the bowl body, apply a
lubricant to the sliding surfaces of the main cylinder. Line
up the positions of the knock pins and install the main
cylinder, while using care to make sure that it is not tilted.
(６) Make sure that the threaded portion of each of the parts
is coated with the MOLYCOAT.
(７) Make sure that all of the knock pins and keys are
completely lined up.
(８) When the disc (1) is installed, the upper discs which do
not have a fringe should be installed in the Comments :
uppermost position. Install the other disc by pressing Number of upper disc
one at a time in the order that they were installed SJ10G/20G/30G/50G/70G/100G :3 sheets
whenever possible. (Fig. 2-68) SJ60G/120G/150G :7 sheets
(９) The discs tend to produce some looseness because of
their seating phenomenon. In such a case, add an
appropriate number of spare discs according to Fig.
2-68 (to such an extent that the top of the distributor
protrudes 3 to 5 mm from the discs).
! WARNING
If the machine is operated with the discs in a loose state,
large vibration could occur.

2-35
(10) Bowl nut tightening procedures
807
(a) Securely tighten the bowl hood with the disc clamp plate
(807).(Fig. 2-69)
(b) Tighten the nut of the disc clamp plate (807) so that the
bowl nut can be turned smoothly by hand until the
distance between the tally marks of the bowl nut and
bowl body reaches 10 to 15mm. (Fig. 2-70)
(c) Tighten the bowl nut with the bowl nut handle by
use of a hammer until the tally marks are in
alignment. Fig. 2-69
(Fig. 2-71)
(11) When the bowl is to be installed in the main body of the

machine, apply a lubricant to the operating water
chamber of the water supplying device to prevent the O
ring of the operating water chamber from being caught.
Do not apply MOLYCOAT to the tapered portions of
the bowl body and vertical shaft.
(12) After the bowl has been installed in the main body,
tighten the cap nut firmly through use of the cap nut 10～15mm
spanner and hammer.
(13) When the light liquid chamber is to be threaded in, thread
it in by hand to prevent damage to the threaded portion.
As a final step, tighten it with the light liquid chamber Fig. 2-70
handle.
(14) When the heavy liquid chamber is installed, line up
its tally mark with the tally mark of the bowl body.
(15) Check the installed height of the bowl.
Tally mark
(Refer to Fig. 4-14 and Table 4-6.)
Fig. 2-71

2-36
Flat spring
(１) Install the vertical shaft in the main body before installing
the horizontal shaft.
(２) Install the flat spring and ball bearing (3) without Up
confusion of their up and down sides.
(Fig. 2-72, Fig. 2-73) Down
! CAUTION
Fig. 2-72
Install the vertical shaft correctly in the direction of the
ball bearing (3).
<Installation of bearing>
To install a new bearing, put it in a 80 to 90℃ oil for about
20 minutes before installing it onto the shaft.
NOTE
When the bearing is installed in the bearing case
If the bearing is forced in a tilted state by applying
an undue pressure, damage to the bearing might
result.
(Down)
After the bearing has been installed, if the inner
race can be turned by hand, replace the vertical Bearing No.
shaft. Fig. 2-73
Install the bearing in the bearing case by equally striking

the inner ring with a hammer. Before installing the O ring Vertical shaft
under the bearing housing (1), apply grease to several Flat spring
Spacer
places of the groove. By so doing, the O ring won't come A
off and fall.
Before installing the flat spring, install a spacer on the top

of the bearing housing (1). Two types of spacers (1)
0.5mm and 1.0mm thick will be supplied. Use a spacer (1)
of appropriate thickness to adjust the dimension A of O-ring Spring case
Fig. 2-74 to the value shown in Table 2-6. Measure the Bearing case (1)
dimension A with the O ring removed from under the Bearing housing (1)
bearing housing (1). Fig. 2-74
(３) Firmly tighten the spring retainer (1) on the bearing Table 2-6
housing (1). Model No SJ10G～SJ150G
(４) After installation in the main body, check to ensure 0.5～1.0
Dimension A
that the vertical shaft can be lightly turned by hand.

2-37
Socket set screw
2.2.3 Water supplying device

(１) When the O ring is installed on the operating water
chamber, use care to make sure that the O ring is not
twisted. Vertical
shaft
(２) After the water supplying device has been installed on
the vertical shaft, tighten the socket set screw of the
chamber cover and check to ensure that the water
supplying device rotates with the vertical shaft as a
single unit. (Fig. 2-75)
Fig. 2-75

(１) After the vertical shaft has been installed, install the
horizontal shaft.
(２) Before installing the bearing, install the bearing retainer
in such a way that it will be positioned between the spiral
gear and bearing.
(３) Make sure that the mounting surfaces of the spiral gear
and gear boss are in tight contact.
(４) When the horizontal shaft is installed in the main body,
use care to prevent damage to the lip surface of the oil
seal. Apply grease to the lips before inserting the
horizontal shaft.
(５) Evenly tighten the bearing retainer when installing it.
(６) If oils are deposited on the inside surface of the friction Drilled hole
pulley and the lining of the friction block, wipe them
away. Fig. 2-76
! WARNING
For cleaning, avoid using a highly volatile oil such as Socket Set screw
gas oil which could cause a fire. (Never install the collar with the
socket set screw on the opposite side.)
(７) The bearing housings (3) and (4) have a drilled hole.
Install the bearing housings so that the drilled holes will
be faced down. (Fig. 2-76)
(８) After the collar (2) on the bearing housing (3) side has
been installed on the horizontal shaft, be sure to tighten
the socket set screw. (Fig. 2-77)
! CAUTION
Avoid confusion of collars (1) and (2) when Gear pump side
installing them.
Make sure that the collars are installed with the
socket set screw side toward you. Fig. 2-77

2-38
(９) To install the oil seal, hold a protective plate against the end surface and lightly strike it
with a hammer to force the oil seal in little by little.
(１０) When the friction block installed in the friction boss is to be installed in the main body,
secure the friction block with a rubber ring or something else to prevent the fall of the
friction block intermediately during installation.
(１１) After the horizontal shaft has been installed, check to ensure that it can be turned
lightly by hand.

2-39
Socket set screw
2.2.5 Reassembly of trap
(１) To make sure that the trap does not hit the inlet pipe
when it is placed on the frame, check to ensure that
the socket set screw (313) on the top of the trap has
been loosened. (Fig. 2-78)
Fig. 2-78
(２) Turn down the nut with a spanner and tighten it with a Nut
hammer until the tally marks are in alignment.
(Fig. 2-79)
! CAUTION
The nut and cover nut are of double nut construction to
prevent looseness. Make sure that they are fully
tightened.
Fig. 2-79
NOTE
The tally mark of the nut (320) will tend to go ahead of Stamped
that of the upper hood because of the seating or wear of mark
the tapered portion of the impeller. Even if the tally IN
marks are slightly out of alignment, no problem will be
IN
caused. Therefore, turn down the nut all the way with a
hammer.
Tighten the nut to the following torque. Purifire Piping side
SJ10G～SJ30G ：700 kg・cm side
SJ50G～SJ150G：1,000 kg・cm
(GH type is the same value as G type.)
Fig. 2-80
If the tally marks are more than 180°out of alignment,
replace the impeller (1) with a new one.
Orifice
(３) When the inlet pipe is to be installed, do not forget to
install the orifice put in the arrow mark portion of Fig.
2-81 according to the installing direction shown in Fig.
2-80. (Unless the orifice is correctly installed, the flow
meter won't indicate a correct flow rate.)
Fig. 2-81

2-40
(４) The frame and sludge chute are provided with
inspection plugs.
(５) Fully tighten the plugs of the bracket.
! WARNING plug
Check to ensure that the plugs of the bracket have been Fig. 2-82
fully tightened. If the liquid is supplied with the plugs not
fully tightened, ejection of a high temperature treatment
liquid could cause burns. (Refer to Fig. 2-82)
2.2.6 Gear pump

(１) When the bush is to be installed in the pump
housing, face the internally grooved side inward
(toward the gear side). (Fig. 2-83)
(２) Before installation of the gears, apply grease or machine
oil to the gear tooth surfaces and bush. Bush
(３) When the drive gear is installed, use care to prevent
damage to the oil seal lips.
(４) Turn down the adjusting screw of the valve stem up to
Bush
the predetermined position. Measure the tightened
position at disassembly. Turn down the screw up to that
position.
(５) If the gear pump is provided with a proximity switch Slit
for the Discharge Monitor, install it to the bearing
housing (3) and check that the proximity
Fig. 2-83
switch-to-horizontal shaft clearance is correct
(normally 1±0.3mm).
After reassembly, turn the shaft by hand to check that it can

be lightly turned. Then install the gear pump in the
SELFJECTOR.

2-41
3 Maintenance inspection procedures
! WARNING
The SELFJECTOR is a high speed rotating machine. Always be careful of its
vibrating condition. Be careful of its operating sound, sludge discharge sound, etc.
as well. If any change occurs, stop the machine, locate the cause, and take
corrective action. If the cause cannot be located, do not operate the machine but ask
our company or service agency.
! WARNING
When parts are replaced, make sure that the genuine parts are used. If non-genuine
parts are used, the SELFJECTOR could be damaged and personal safety could be
jeopardized.
! CAUTION
For the sake of safety, be sure to perform routine checks and periodic disassembly,
cleaning and inspection.
Perform maintenance inspection according to the inspection table (Section 5 of this

manual) and parts inspection procedures (Section 4 of this manual), although the intervals
vary with the properties of treatment oil, operating environment, etc.
3.1 Routine checks

The routine check items are the items to check every day when patrolling at regular
intervals.
Table 3-1
Check Item Description
Feed rate Has it changed with respect to the set Feed rate?
Feed thermometer Has it changed with respect to the set temperature?
Pressure of light liquid outlet Does it coincide roughly with the set pressure of the Leakage
Frame vibration Hasn't vibration increased?
Operation noise Isn't a strange sound generated (from the bearing, gear pump, etc.)?
Current Isn't the rated current exceeded or changing?
Gear pump Isn't the oil quantity low?
Safety joint of Gear pump Isn't it deformed or broken?
Pipe joint Aren't there oil leaks?
Leakage Monitor (Multi-Monitor) Is the Adjust pressure LED (yellow) lit or flashing?
Discharge Monitor (Multi-Monitor) Is the Indicate revolution LED (green) flashing?

3-1
3.2 Lubricant replacement intervals
! CAUTION
If replacement of the oil is neglected, wear of the spiral gear and damage to the
bearing could result.
Replace the lubricant of the SELFJECTOR at regular intervals according to Table 3-2.
NOTE
To replace the lubricant, remove the gear cover, and thoroughly clean the inside of
the oil tank before installing a fresh oil.
Table 3-2
Number of times Replacement intervals Remarks
First time After two weeks of operation It takes about two weeks before
(After approx. 300 hours) seating of the contact surfaces
of gears.
Second time After a month of operation
(after approx. 600 hours)
Third and subsequent times Every three months
NOTE1) When the spiral gear has been replaced, replace the lubricant at intervals,
beginning with the first time.
NOTE2) If the oil is badly contaminated, replace it with a fresh one at shorter intervals than
shown in Table 3-2.
NOTE3) If water, sludge, etc. are contained in the oil tank, remove the oil, clean the inside
of the oil tank, and install a fresh oil.
NOTE4) Avoid mixed use of different types or brands of lubricants.
NOTE5) When the types of lubricants are to be changed, clean the inside of the frame and
the parts of the shafts before replacement.
NOTE6) When the machine has been overhauled, replace the lubricant.
For information on the lubricant replacement procedures, refer to the "Operation

Manual 2".

3-2
3.3 Instructions for Use of Synthesized Lubricant
! CAUTION
Before continuous use of a synthesized lubricant, make sure of its suitability after at
least 900 hours of "running-in" with MKK recommended mineral oil. (Refer to 3.4,
Operation Manual 2.)
If this is neglected, an early worn or damaged drive gear could result.
! CAUTION
The ISO viscosity index should be VG220 when for a synthesized lubricant is used.
Mandatory procedures to accomplish before continuous use of synthesized lubricant

Item Procedure ISO Viscosity
First time Supply MKK recommended mineral oil to VG150
When gear specified level.
changed (Refer to 3.4, Operational Manual 2.)
Operate the machine for 300 hours

Step1 with mineral oil. VG150
Replace mineral oil with fresh oil (mineral oil and

Step2 VG150
operate the machine for another 600 hours.
Check gear tooth surface (for width, length and
depth of contact) and record measurements.
Step3 Replace mineral oil with fresh oil (synthesized VG220

lubricant) and operate the machine for 12 to 24
hours. Check gear tooth surface (for width, length
and depth of contact) and record measurements.
Compare data with the condition of gear tooth at

Step 2. If wear is not advanced, proceed to Step
4. If wear is advanced, replace synthesized
lubricant with mineral oil immediately.
（VG150）
Step4 Operate the machine further for 150 hours, check VG220
gear tooth surface (for width, length and depth of
contact) and record measurements.

5. If wear is advanced, stop using synthesized
lubricant immediately and replace it with mineral
oil. （VG150）

3-3
Step5 Operate the machine further for 600 hours, check VG220
gear tooth surface (for width, length and depth of
contact) and record measurements.

6. If wear is advanced, replace synthesized
lubricant with mineral oil immediately.
(VG150)
Step6 Change oil every three months. VG220
NOTE
When MKK recommended mineral oil already in use for more than 900 hours of
operation is replaced with synthesized lubricant, begin the procedure from Step 3
after checking the condition of gear tooth surface and recording measurements.

3-4
3.4 Expendable parts replacement intervals
To prevent occurrence of troubles in the SELFJECTOR and operate it in normal condition
at all times, it is necessary to replace the expendable parts at regular intervals.
! CAUTION
The wear of parts varies with the properties of treatment oil, operating condition, etc.
Perform checks according to the inspection procedures described in Section 5. If
there is anything wrong, replace the parts for the sake of safety even before the
specified intervals.
※ The replacement intervals for the expendable parts in the following table are
shown for general guidance and are not intended to guarantee the replacement
intervals.
Name of part Replacement intervals Remarks

Bowl
Main seal ring 6 months
O ring and the like 6 months
Valve sheet 6 months
Frame, Cover
O ring and the like 12 months 24 months on those used to seal the upper and
lower frames
Gasket 12 months 24 months on gaskets for gear cover and oil
（for piping） gauge
Rubber plate 24 months
Sludge pipe 24 months
Vertical shaft, Water supplying device
O ring and the like 12 months 24 months on those used for bearing housing
(2)
Upper spring 12 months
Lower spring 24 months
Flat spring 24 months
Spring case 24 months
Gasket 12 months
Bearing 24 months
Spring seat 24 months
Steel ball 24 months

3-5
Name of part Replacement intervals Remarks
Horizontal shaft
Oil seal 12 months
Bearing 24 months
Friction block 12 months
Friction lining 24 months
Gear pump
Oil seal 12 months
Safety joint 12 months
Bush 24 months
Multi-Monitor
Pressure sensor(*1) 36 months Although the pressure sensor is not an
expendable part, it is advisable to replace the
pressure sensor at regular intervals to keep a
certain indication/detection function.
(*1) The pressure sensors are installed to the light-liquid line, the heavy-liquid line, and the
circulation line (G-HIDENS specification) and there are the functions of flux indication,
pressure indication / leakage detection, and water detection each.
1. It is advisable to replace the expendable parts of the bowl with new ones in
keeping with the bowl opening intervals.
2. On parts not supplied as spare parts, place orders with our company. For spare parts
to be furnished with SELFJECTOR, see the spare parts list submitted by us.

3-6
(Note1)
3.5 Bowl opening intervals (guidelines)
To operate the SELFJECTOR in normal condition at all times, it is necessary to open and clean
the bowl at regular intervals. Although the opening intervals vary with the properties of treatment
oil, operating condition, etc., the general opening intervals are shown below for general
guidance.
(Note 1) The rotor opening intervals which vary with the operating condition are shown for general guidance and
are not intended to guarantee the intervals.
◎ First time to open the bowl → A month after trial run

Since the inside contamination varies with the properties of oil, etc., open the bowl and check
the inside after the first month (whether unevenly deposited sludge exists or not, contaminated
discs, etc.), and determine whether the discharge intervals are appropriate or not.
◎ Second and subsequent times → Open, check and clean every 6 months (longest).
If the bowl opening intervals are too long, contamination might affect separation or even cause
vibration. Set the proper opening intervals suitable for the type of oil.
When the SELFJECTOR is used for cleaning the trunk piston engine lubricant, the bowl is
generally contaminated earlier. It is therefore advisable to set shorter intervals (2 to 3 months).
The opening intervals may be extended (longest interval is 1 year) by joint use of a
cleaning equipment. However, it is necessary to check the effectiveness of cleaning
before determining the opening intervals.
(Note2)
3.6 Overhaul (guidelines)
! CAUTION
When increased vibration is evident, check and maintenance the machine according to
the inspection procedures described in Section 5 even before the overhaul intervals for
the sake of safety. If there is anything wrong, replace the parts.
! CAUTION
Although the overhaul (Note 3) intervals vary with the operating condition, inspection and
maintenance according to the inspection procedures described in Section 5 at regular
intervals, overhaul the machine every 2 years (longest) at least.
(Note 2) Overhaul intervals which vary with the operating condition are shown for general guidance and are not
intended to guarantee the intervals.
(Note 3) Overhaul refers to disassembly of all of the parts of the bowl, vertical and horizontal shaft systems,
inspection and cleaning according to the inspection procedures described in Section 5, and replacement of
expendable and defective parts.

3-7
4 Maintenance inspection procedures for major parts
4.1 Bearing replacement intervals
! WARNING
For the vertical and horizontal shafts, use bearings that are up to specification. The upper
bearing of the vertical shaft in particular is important. If an out-of-specification bearing is
used, personal safety could be jeopardized because of reduced bearing life.
! CAUTION
For the sake of safety, replace the bearings of the vertical and horizontal shafts before the
elapse of 2 years regardless of whether they have been in service or not.
The bearings are expendable parts. Place separate orders for bearings other than supplied as
spare ones.
4.2 Bowl
4.2.1 Corrosion of bowl
The bowl parts except some are made of special stainless steel. Under stringent operating
condition, however, corrosion might occur in the form of pitting.
Since the bowl is exposed under a high stress, a very fine crack originating in the pitting could
occur. Be very careful when you check.
What to do to prevent corrosion

Corrosion readily occurs in the portions that are in
contact with sludge. Perform the following steps to
Bowl hood
prevent corrosion.
Sludge outlet
port Sealing surface
(1) Set proper discharge intervals.
(2) Clean those portions when the bowl is opened. Main cylinder
Perform checks with special stress on the following Bowl body

portions on which sludge is deposited.(Fig. 4-1)
(1) Seat portion of main cylinder.
(2) Sludge discharge port.
(3) Heavy liquid chamber
Fig. 4-1

4-1
Check procedures
(1) Thoroughly clean to remove deposits.
(2) Visual check.
(3) If anything wrong was found under (1) and (2), perform color check test.
4.2.2 Corrective steps for corrosion
! CAUTION
To prevent distortion of the base materials and alteration of their composition, never make
repairs by welding cracks, pinholes or corroded portions.
If there is pitting in a part, remove the corroded portion by a grinder. Perform visual check and
color check test for confirmation. If there is nothing wrong, continued use of the part is allowed.
The margin removable by a grinder should be limited to 0.5mm maximum (except the main
cylinder for FO). After grinding, do buffing (#250 or more).
When there is a line defect (crack),
When more than 0.5mm grinder finishing is necessary,
it is necessary to replace the parts with new ones and perform balance adjustments.
Contact our company or service agency.

4-2
4.2.3 Disc
! CAUTION
Do not make repairs by welding cracks, pinholes or
corroded portions.
Replace the disc with a new one

(1) When corrosion is evident
(2) When distance piece is out of place
(3) When a crack is evident
(3)
Distance
Addition of disc piece
Over a long period of service, the seating of the disc will
create a gap between the disc and top disc. Add a disc, Fig. 4-2
while referring to the Fig. 2-68
Points to note when handling disc
! CAUTION
When handling the cleaning agent, observe the following points
Never put the cleaning agent in your mouth.
Wear protective glasses or protective gloves, etc. to prevent eye or skin contact.
If the cleaning agent was deposited on your skin, immediately wash away in water.
Since the cleaning agent contains an organic solvent, make sure that the room is
ventilated well.
Store the cleaning agent in a cool, dark place.
Remove the sludge deposited on the disc by use of a cleaning oil and a waste cloth or a soft
copper wire brush. Avoid using a scraper or any other thing that damages the surface.
Immerse the disc in our company's cleaning solution at 50 to 70℃ for about 3 hours before
cleaning. The deposits will be easier to remove.

4-3
4.2.4 Bowl body
(5) (8)
（1） Clean the O ring groove. If the groove is rough,
repair it with a fine emery cloth (#320). (6) (4) (1)
（2） If the operating water passage hole or any of the (7)
water pressure chambers is clogged with scale, do
thorough cleaning.
（3） When the bowl body was subjected to an abnormal
shock by allowing it to fall, or by the fall of a heavy
object, let our company or service agency check it. (2)
（4） Check the fitted portions of the bowl body and bowl
bush and check the condition of contact with the Fig. 4-3
vertical shaft. Check to ensure that the contact
area of the contact surface is more than 2/3 of the
whole.
Check for scratches caused by slipping. If there are
scratches, remove the scratches with an emery cloth
(#320) and apply finishes with polishing paper (#600).
! CAUTION
If the bowl body and bowl bush are in poor contact, vibration could occur. If the contact
area of the contact surface is less than two thirds of the whole, replace the bowl bush with
a new one.
（5） Check the threaded portion for the bowl nut. If scoring is evident, make repairs with set
files.
（6） Check the sludge discharge port for wear. If the wear is less than 0.5mm, continued use of
the port is allowed. If the wear is more than that, let our company or service agency check
it.
（7） Check the main cylinder sliding surface for scratches. If there are scratches, repair them
with an emery cloth (#320) and then apply finishes with polishing paper (#600).
（8） Check the knock pin for deformation. If deformation is evident, replace the knock pin with a
new one.

4-4
(4) (3)
4.2.5 Bowl hood
Check the following portions of the bowl hood for
scratches.
（1） Bowl nut fitting portion (1)
（2） Bowl body fitting portion (5)(6)
(2)
（3） Threaded portion
（4） Light liquid chamber fitting portion
（5） O ring groove (when the O ring was Fig. 4-4
removed)
（6） Knock pin groove
If there are scratches on the above-mentioned
portions, make repairs by use of set files,
grinding stone, emery cloth (#320), etc.
4.2.6 Main seal ring
NOTE
When the main seal ring is removed, use care not to damage its bowl hood side groove
(especially the side surface). Damaged groove may cause a leakage.
With the main seal ring mounted on the bowl hood,

clean and carefully check the seal surface. Normally,
the main seal ring is deformed as shown in Fig. 4-5. In
the following cases, replace the main seal ring with a
new one. Bowl hood
（1）When dimension A is 0.5mm or more
Main seal ring
（2）When the seal surface is galled by metallic power
more than 60% of its length B. A
Fig. 4-5

4-5
4.2.7 Distributor (2)
(1)
（1）If the top end of the key is deformed, correct or replace.
（2）Check the threaded portion for scratches.
（3）Check the knock pin which might have been deformed.
4.2.8 Various types of O rings of bowl

Recommendation is to replace the O rings in keeping with the
bowl opening intervals. Before installing an O ring, be sure to
clean the O ring groove.
(3)
Fig. 4-6

4-6
4.2.9 Main cylinder
（1） Check the seal surface (that (1)
surface which makes contact
with the main seal ring) for (2)
scratches. If there are scratches, (2),(3)
damage to the main seal ring
and leakage of sealing water will
result, making normal operation
Fig. 4-7
impossible. Scratches are often
made on the surface at the time
of disassembly. Therefore, be careful when handling it.
In the case of the main cylinder for lubrication oil, repair small scratches by use of an oil
stone or something else. In the case of the main cylinder for fuel oil (C heavy oil), contact
our company or service agency, as the seal surface has a special coating.
（2） Check the bowl body sliding surface for scratches. If there are scratches, the O ring will
wear down earlier. Repair the scratches with an emery cloth (#320) and then apply finishes
with polishing paper (#600).
（3）Clean the O ring groove. If the groove is rough, make repairs with an emery cloth.
4.2.10 Pilot valve assembly

（1） Check the valve guide and bowl body sliding (2),(3) (1)
surfaces for scratches. If there are small scratches,
make repairs with an oil stone or something else.
When the pilot valve assembly is disassembled and
reassembled, use care to prevent damage to the O
ring.
(Apply a lubricant to the sliding surfaces for easier
reassembly.)
（2） Check the seal surface (that surface which makes
contact with the valve sheet) for scratches. If there
are small scratches, make repairs with an oil stone
or something else.
（3） Take out the valve sheet from the valve guide, and
Fig. 4-8
clean and carefully check the seal surface.
If the valve sheet has caught a foreign substance or
is deformed (0.3mm or more), replace it with a new
one.
（4） After cleaning and before installing in the bowl,
complete the pilot valve assembly and check to
ensure that pilot valve is moved smoothly by hand.

4-7
4.3 Vertical shaft system (6) (2)
(1) Carefully check the portion above the upper bearing fitting portion, as
there is a high likelihood of corrosion. If the dimension A shown in Fig.
A
4-9 is more than 1mm smaller in diameter than the value shown in
Table 4-1, replace the vertical shaft with a new one. (3)
Table 4-1
(1)
Model No. SJ10G/GH SJ50G/GH SJ100G/GH (4)
～SJ30G/GH ～SJ70G/GH ～SJ150G/GH
(6)
Dimension A 34 44 59
. (mm)
(2) If there are partial scratches in the bowl bush fitting portion, make (5)
repairs with set files or an emery cloth (#320). If there is a ring-like
continuous groove flaw, replace the vertical shaft with a new one.
(3) If there is a localized flaw like a pounding in the threaded portion,
make repairs to smooth it out, using set files, emery cloth (#320), etc.
(4) In regard to the secular wear of the bearing fitting portion, if the (6)
inner race of the bearing slips, replace the vertical shaft with a (4)
new one.
Fig. 4-9
(5) If the pinion tooth surface is rough and is lightly worn, make repairs
with set files, emery cloth (#320), oil stone, etc.
(6) Measure the deflection of the shaft center in three places, the straight
portion at the end of the shaft, the middle portion of the shaft, and bearing fitting portion, with
the upper and lower bearing fitting portions supported by the measuring jigs. The deflection
should be limited to 5/100mm maximum. If the deflection is larger than that, replace the
vertical shaft with a new one.
4.3.2 Upper springs

（1） If there is even a broken or cracked upper spring, replace all of them
with new ones.
（2） Measure the free length of each of the upper springs. If any of them is
more than 1mm shorter than the dimension A, replace all of the
upper springs. Six upper springs equal in free length (dimension A)
are grouped as a set. (Refer to Table 4-2 ) A
Fig. 4-10
Table 4-2
Model No. SJ10G/GH SJ50G/GH SJ100G/GH
Dimension A 34 44 46
(mm)

4-8
4.3.3 Lower bearing block
If the dimension A shown in Fig. 4-11 with the lower spring
retainer, steel ball and bearing case (2) put together is more
A
than 1mm smaller than the value shown in Table 4-3,
re-check all of these parts, and replace a defective part with
a new one.（Refer to Fig. 4-11, Table 4-3）
Table 4-3
～SJ30G/GH ～SJ70G/GH ～SJ150G/GH Fig. 4-11
Dimension A 63.5 73.5 80.5
(mm)
4.3.4 Flat spring
A
（1）A broken or cracked flat spring should be replaced
with a new one.
（2）Measure the spring height as shown in Fig. 4-12. If it
is less than the A mm, replace the flat spring with a Fig. 4-12
new one.（Refer to Table 4-4）
Table 4-4
Dimension A 4.5 6.5 7.5
(mm)
4.3.5 Steel ball

A steel ball with a deep ring-like groove flaw in those portions which make
contact with the lower spring retainer, etc. or a deformed one should be
replaced with a new one.
4.3.6 Lower spring

（1）A broken or cracked lower spring should be replaced with a new
one.
（2）Measure the free length. If it is more than 1mm smaller than the A
dimension A, replace the lower spring. (Refer to Table 4-5）
Fig. 4-13
Table 4-5
Dimension A 32.5 55.5 60.5
(mm)

4-9
4.3.7 Height of vertical shaft
! WARNING
If the height of the vertical height is out of the standard
A
limits (Table 4-6), re-check the vertical shaft system to
B
locate the cause. If the cause cannot be located, do not
operate the machine but contact our company or service
agency.
Fig. 4-14
After installation of the vertical shaft, the standard height shown in Fig.
4-14 should be as shown in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6
Model No. SJ10G/GH SJ20G/GH SJ50G/GH SJ70G/GH SJ100G/GH SJ150G/GH
Dimension A 68±1.0 70±1.0 99±1.0 104±1.0 133.5±1.0 146.5±1.0
Dimension B 28.5±1.0 28.5±1.0 63±1.0 63±1.0 69±1.0 69±1.0
(mm)
4.3.8 Installed height of flat spring (adjustment of spacer)

When the parts like the lower spring retainer, bearing case, steel ball and flat spring have been
replaced, or when the installed height of the flat spring (dimension A of Fig. 4-15) is out of range
the dimension A of Table 4-7, change spacers (1) to adjust the compression force of the flat
spring.
Table 4-7 Vertical shaft

Model No. SJ10G～SJ150G Spacer Flat spring
Dimension A 0.5～1.0 A
Spring case
O ring
Bearing housing (1)

Bearing case (1)
Fig. 4-15

4-10
Worn
4.4 Horizontal shaft system
4.4.1 Spiral gear
（1） The service life of the spiral gear depends on
conditions under which it is operated. As a rule of
thumb, the gear is serviceable until its tooth
thickness has been reduced to 1/3 of the normal
dimension if it is normally worn by even contact.
Replace the gear if its wear exceeds that extent.
Up to 1/3 of the
(See Fig. 4-16) normal dimension. １/３Ｗ
（2） During initial operation or when the spiral gear has
been replaced, a transient wearing of the new gear
can occur. It is a normal phenomenon known as
"breaking-in." which is stopped after a while when the Ｗ
contact of tooth surfaces has become smooth.
Fig. 4-16
If the wear is excessively accelerated, something
wrong is suspected in the other parts. Check the
other parts.
（3） If there are burrs or high spots on the tooth surface, remove them with set files or emery
cloth (#320).
（4） Spalling (metal broken off in splinters) or pitting (marked with pits) on the tooth surface is
an indication that the gear oil has been deteriorated and should be changed.

(1) (2) (2)
（1）If there is a localized flaw like a pounding on the (3) (3)
threaded portion, make repairs to smooth it out, using
set files, emery cloth (#320), etc.
（2）In regard to the secular wear of the bearing fitting
portion, if the inner race slips, replace the Collar(1) Collar(2)
horizontal shaft with a new one.
（3）If the key-way is wider because of wear, replace the
Fig. 4-17
horizontal shaft with a new one.
4.4.3 Collar
If the diameter of the oil seal and collar sliding surface is more than 0.5mm worn than the
specified dimension, replace the collar with a new one.（Refer to Table 4-8）
Table 4-8
Motor side (1) 45 50 55
Gear pump side (2) 45 50 55
(mm)

4-11
4.4.4 Friction block
6
The life of the friction block cannot be sweepingly
3
determined, as it depends on the frequency of starts and
stops. If any of the linings 6mm thick is worn to 3mm,
replace all of the blocks. Fig. 4-18
（Fig. 4-18）
4.4.5 Friction pulley
1mm
Check the inside surface of the friction pulley for wear. If it is worn
more than 1mm, replace it with a new one.（Fig. 4-19）
The inside surface of the friction pulley allows machining up to
1mm deep to eliminate roughness.
4.5 Gear pump

4.5.1 Safety joint
Check the gear pump visually for distortion, wear, damage, etc.
Fig. 4-19
without being removed, and replace if necessary.
4.5.2 Drive gear, driven gear and bush

If the shaft is producing abnormal sound, disassemble the gear pump, and check whether the
gears are in good contact, the spacing between the shaft and bush, wear or foreign
substances which might have been caught. If there are small scratches, repair the tooth
surfaces with an oil stone. If repairs cannot be made, replace.
4.5.3 Valve stem

When the capacity is insufficient or the suction is impossible, it is
often due to foreign substances caught by the valve stem.
Disassemble and thoroughly clean. In this case, it is necessary
that the position of the adjusting screw (dimension A of Fig. 4-20)
is confirmed beforehand (adjusting pressure 0.4MPa {4.0kg/cm2}). A
If the screw is over-tightened, the pressure will become
needlessly high, and overload could result. If it is under-tightened,
Fig. 4-20
a poor suction will result.

4-12
4.6 Lubricant
OI
For information on the lubricant replacement
L
intervals, refer to Section 3.2.
For information on the lubricant replacement
procedures, refer to Section 3.4 in Operation
Oil gauge
Manual 1.
Fig. 4-21
4.7 Brake equipment

The life of brake lining cannot be sweepingly determined, as it
varies widely, depending on the number of times it has been
used. It is therefore necessary to check the brake lining at
regular intervals. If the brake lining 10mm thick is worn to 5mm,
replace the brake lining with a new one.
5
4.8 Water supplying device
The water supplying device is designed to supply operating 10
water to the bowl opening and closing mechanism which
Fig. 4-22
automatically discharges the sludge accumulated in the bowl.
If it is clogged by scale or the gasket or O ring is damaged, a
low water pressure or a low water flow rate will result, and the
mechanism might fail to open or close the bowl.
When the bowl is disassembled, be sure to check and clean the
water supplying device.

4-13
4.9 Inspection of Multi-Monitor for Function
Check to ensure that a detector alarm is properly output.
4.9.1 Leakage Monitor (LM)

The Leakage Monitor essentially determines that the outflow is abnormal as it detects the fall of
the pressure at the outlet side of the SELFJECTOR. Create this state by simulation.
(1) Check that the SELFJECTOR is in automatic operation and that the liquid is being fed.
(2) Open the pressure control valve at the light liquid outlet to reduce the pressure to a level the
resultant pressure drop (Δp) lower than preset.
(3) Check to ensure that an alarm is output after the elapse of the set time of the Hold timer.
4.9.2 Discharge Detector (DD)
! CAUTION
When alarm check is performed by the following procedures, the machine will come to a
stop without discharging the oil from inside the bowl. When the machine is restarted and
the sludge is discharged, the oil will flow out. Therefore, perform operations with due
consideration to safety.
(1) Check to ensure that the SELFJECTOR is in automatic operation and that the liquid is being
fed.
(2) Close the source valve of the operating water solenoid valve unit to stop the supply of all
operating water.
(3) Press the "DISCHARGE TEST" button of the control panel.
(4) Check to ensure that an alarm is output after the elapse of the discharge process time.
4.9.3 Water Detector (WD)

The Water Detector incorporated in the G-HIDENS type SELFJECTOR works in such a way that,
as separated water is collected to a predetermined level in the bowl, it detects an ensuing
pressure drop in the circulation line and issues a command signal to discharge separated water.
Inspect the Water Detector for function simulating this state of working.
(1) Check that the SELFJECTOR is in automatic operation and that the liquid is being fed.
(2) Open the back pressure valve in the circulation line to reduce the pressure to a level the
resultant pressure drop (ΔW) lower than preset.
(3) After the lapse of the time set on the hold timer, listen for the sound of discharge to check
that partial or total discharge of separated water from the bowl takes place.
Note that the Water Detector is a device provided in the GSH-1 automatic version only.

4-14
5 Periodic inspection chart
! CAUTION
For the sake of safety, perform periodic inspection according to the following chart,
repair or replace a defective parts. (Inspection service)
The chart describes the parts to check, the details to check for, and the check intervals (longest).
Check intervals
Parts to check Details to check for (months) Corrective Remarks Check
Every Every Every action mark
3 6 12
Frame, cover
Inside of frame Deposited sludge, ○
Contamination
Operating water Deposited sludge, ○
drain outlet Contamination
Oil gauge Contamination ○
Foundation bolt Looseness ○
Impeller Contamination,
Contact damage, ○
Deformation,
Corrosion
Inside of frame gear Contamination ○
case
Sludge pipe Deteriorated rubber ○
Upper hood & Damage, ○
Lower hood O ring Wear, Hardened
Rubber plate Sagging ○
Brake lining Wear ○
NOTE
Be sure to check the frame and cover not only at the intervals specified in the chart
but also when the bowl is opened.

5-1
Check intervals
3 6 12
Bowl
Whole of Deposited sludge, ○ Refer to
inside of bowl Corrosion 4.2.1,
4.2.2
Disc
Whole Deposited sludge, ○ Refer to
Corrosion, Cracks, 4.2.3
Deformation
Aperture piece Loss ○
No. of discs Height of discs ○
Bowl body
Sludge outlet port Corrosion, Wear ○ Refer to
O ring groove Damage ○ 4.2.4
Operating water Clogging ○
Passage
Bowl bush fitting Damage, Scoring, ○
Portion Fit, Wear
Main cylinder sliding Damage ○
Portion
Knock pin Deformation ○
Bowl nut
Threaded portion Damage, Coring ○ Refer to
Bowl fitting portion Damage ○ 4.2.4
Groove Contamination, ○
Clogging
Bowl hood
Bowl nut fitting Bowl body fitting ○ Refer to
Portion portion 4.2.5
Bowl body fitting Damage ○
portion
Threaded portion Scoring ○
Light liquid chamber Damage ○
fitting portion
O ring groove Damage, ○
Contamination
Knock pin groove Damage, ○
Deformation

5-2
Check intervals
Parts to check Details to check (months) Corrective Remarks Check
for action mark
Every Every Every
3 6 12
Bowl
Main seal ring
Seal surface Damage, ○ Refer to
Deterioration 4.2.6
Seal surface dimension Deformation ○
Distributor
Keyway Deformation ○ Refer to
Threaded portion Damage ○ 4.2.7
Knock pin Deformation ○
Various types of Deterioration, ○ Refer to
O rings of bowl Cracks, Wear 4.2.8
Main cylinder
Main seal ring seal Damage, Wear, ○ Refer to
surface Corrosion 4.2.9
Bowl body sliding portion Damage, Wear, ○
Peeled plating
O ring groove Contamination ○
Pilot valve
Bowl body sliding portion Damage ○ Refer to
Valve sheet seat surface Damage, ○ 4.2.10
Deformation,
Foreign
substances
caught
Light liquid Contamination, ○
chamber Worn threaded
portion,
Corrosion
Heavy liquid Contamination, ○
chamber Corrosion, Cracks
Gravity disc Contamination, ○
Corrosion, Cracks
Bowl bush Contact with bowl ○
Drain nozzle Clogging ○

5-3
Check intervals
3 6 12
Vertical Shaft
Vertical shaft
Upper portion Corrosion, Wear ○ Refer to
(above bearing (1)) 4.3.1
Bowl bushing fitting Damage, Corrosion, ○
portion Fit
Threaded portion Damage ○
Bearing fitting Wear ○
portion
Pinion tooth surface Wear ○
Whole of shaft Center runout ○ Overhaul
interval
Shaft height Assembled ○ Refer to
Dimension 4.3.7
Upper spring
Whole Broken, Cracks ○ Refer to
Dimension Free length ○ 4.3.2
Bearing cover Damage, ○
(1) Contamination,
Corrosion
Bearing case (1)
Whole Damage, Scoring, ○
Wear
Dimension Free length ○
Flat spring
Dimension Spring height ○ 4.3.4
Installed Assembled ○ Refer to
height of Dimension 4.3.8
flat spring
Bearing case (2)
Wear
Bearing case (3)
Wear
Steel ball Deformation, ○ Refer to
Grooved damage 4.3.5

5-4
Check intervals
3 6 12
Vertical Shaft
Lower spring
Dimension Spring height ○ 4.3.6
Spring seat Wear ○
Bearing block Assembled ○ Refer to
(2) dimension 4.3.3
Bearing Noise, sticking, ○
corrosion
Horizontal Shaft
Horizontal shaft
Threaded portion Damage ○ Refer to
Bearing fitting portion Wear ○ 4.4.2
Keyway Wear ○
Safety joint groove Wear, Deformation ○
Spiral gear Wear, Burr ○ Refer to
4.4.1
Collar Wear ○ Refer to
4.4.3
Friction block Wear ○ Refer to
4.4.4
Friction pulley Wear ○ Refer to
4.4.5
Oil seal Leakage ○
Bearing housing (3)
Bearing fitting portion Wear ○
Bearing housing (4)
Bearing fitting portion Wear ○
Bearing Noise, sticking, ○
corrosion

5-5
Check intervals
3 6 12
Water Supplying Device
Operating water Contamination, ○ Refer to
nozzle Clogged drilled 4.8
Operating water hole, Damage
chamber
O ring Damage, ○
Deterioration,
Deformation
Gear Pump
Safety joint Damage ○ Refer to
4.5.1
Bush Damage, Wear ○ Refer to
Gear tooth surface Damage, Wear ○ 4.5.2
Drive gear, Wear ○
Oil seal contact
surface
Valve stem Operating pressure ○ Refer to
4.5.3
Solenoid Valve
Diaphragm Deterioration, ○
Deformation,
Broken,
Contamination
Inside of valve Deposited scale, ○
Damage
Seal part Leakage ○
Reducing Valve
Diaphragm Deterioration, ○
Deformation, Broken
Inside of valve, Deposited scale, ○
Sheet surface Damage
Seal part Leakage ○
Pressure gauge Pressure indication ○
Strainer Contamination, ○
Clogging

5-6
Check intervals
3 6 12
Multi-Monitor
Function Alarm check ○ Refer to
4.9.1
4.9.2

5-7
6 Causes of troubles and corrective steps
! WARNING
Before performing opening checks, check to ensure that the SELFJECTOR has come to a
complete stop. Whether the SELFJECTOR has come to a stop can be checked by watching the
safety joint section at the horizontal shaft gear pump side or the fan of the motor.
If the Discharge Monitor is provided, the stop of the SELFJECTOR can be known as well from
the illumination of LED (green) on top of the Multi-Monitor.
! CAUTION
When an alarm occurs, perform checks and remove the cause of the alarm before re-starting the
machine.
6.1 Alarms
6.1.1 Types of alarms
Table 6-1
Automated type Manual
GBC-1A GSH-1 GAP-11 Multi-Monitor for function
GBC-2A
Oil leakage ○ ○ ○ ○ Leakage Monitor
(LM)
No opening △ ○ Discharge Detector
of bowl (DD)
Hidens ○ Water Detector
alarm (WD)
△：option
Oil leakage
When the SELFJECTOR fails to operation and causes either of the following phenomena, it
regards the phenomenon as "Oil leakage" and outputs an alarm.
(1) The treatment liquid (oil) flows out from the heavy liquid side.
(2) The treatment liquid (oil) flows out because of insufficient sealing of the sludge outlet of the bowl.
No opening of bowl
Despite the fact that the "discharge sludge" procedures were performed, no sludge has been
actually discharged. The SELFJECTOR regards it as a No opening of bowl and outputs an alarm.
Hidens alarm
The HIDENS (GSH-1 specification) version provided with circulation line and pressure sensor
produces a "WATER ABNORMALLY COLLECTED" signal in the case where a certain quantity of
separated water is frequently collected in the bowl with repeated issue of a discharge command.

6-1
6.1.2 Alarm indications
Check the LEDs on the

operational indication panel.
SET MAIN
ADDRESS DATA
ON MAI
N MON OPT
TIM
CNT
01
切入 MON OUT
OFF ON - +
MM機能スイッチ警報リセット自動運転制御電源 ALM M
SWITCH RUNNING SOURCE
入
MITUBISHI KAKOKI KAISHA,LTD. CLR ENT
切
OFF ON
非常停止排出テスト自動停止制御電源

EMERG. DISCHG. AUTO. CONT.
STOP TEST STOP SOURCE
ON Alarm number
(ALM No.)
ALM No. Types of aiarm

01 Oil leakage
(LEAK)
02 No opening bowl
(NO-DIS)
03 Hidens aiarm
(HI-AL)
GSH-1
Fig. 6-1

6-2
ＯＮ
電源電源
CONT. CONT.
SOURCE SOURCE
切切
入入
OF OF
ON ON
F F
GBC-1 GBC-2
Oil leakage (LEAK) No opening bowl (NO-DIS)
Fig. 6-2
GBC-1, GBC-2

6-3
Oil leakage
異常流出通液電源
OIL FEEDING SOURCE
LEAKAGE
切入
OFF ON
通液停止通液電源
STOP FEEDING SOURCE
FEEDING
切入
OFF ON
MM 機能警報
スイッチリセット
MM FUNCTION ALARM
SWITCH RESET
GAP-11
Fig. 6-3
6.1.3 Processing sequence after occurrence of alarm

The processing sequence after occurrence of an alarm is shown in Fig. 6-4 for the GSH-1, GBC-1,
GBC-2 and Fig. 6-5 for the GAP-11.
Oil leakage No opening of

Hidens alarm bowl
Oil leakage
Substitution
Discharge
Water solenoid valve → Closed

Feed valve → Circulation side Feed valve → Circulation side
Selfjector motor stopped Selfjector motor
continues operation.
Fig. 6-4
Fig. 6-5
GSH-1, GBC-1, GBC-2 GAP-11

6-4
6.1.4 Self-diagnostic fnction of detectors
Warning LED（red）
6.1.4.1 Leakage Monitor (LM)
When fed with an extraordinarily high voltage (0.45
MPa), the pressure sensor recognizes it as a detector
failure and issues an alarm (LM alarm) after the lapse Error indication
of time set on the hold timer, and the error LED (red) Error number
of the Multi-Monitor is illuminated (for approximately 2
seconds).
At the same time, an indication of the error appears in Multi-Monitor（MM）
the 7-segment display with corresponding error Error LED（red）
number.
The error indication cannot be cleared until power is
turned off. Reset by turning off power and then on.
Fig. 6-6
6.1.4.2 Discharge Detector (DD)

As a self-diagnostic function, the warning LED (red) on top of the Multi-Monitor is illuminated when:
① The SELFJECTOR speed output exceeds 2500 rpm
(where a circuit failure is suspected, for example)
② The proximity switch input signal is unstable
(where the switch may be out of position, for example).
Correct its position. This LED goes out as soon as its input signal has been stabilized.
Unlike the Leakage Monitor, no alarm signal is delivered when the LED lights.
(When adjusting and confirming the position of the proximity switch, refer to 5. Discharge Detector in
the Operation Manual 2. )
NOTE
When the SELFJECTOR is in the process of being started or stopped, the Trouble display LED
may temporarily come on, but this should not be taken to mean that the Multi-Monitor is out of
order.
6.1.4.3 Water/Heavy Liquid Detector (W/H)

Like the Leakage Monitor, when fed with an extraordinarily high voltage (0.45 MPa), the pressure
sensor recognizes it as a detector failure and produces an alarm (LM alarm) after the lapse of time set
on the hold timer, and the error LED (red) of the Multi-Monitor is illuminated (for approximately 2
seconds). At the same time, an indication of the error appears with corresponding error number in the
7-segment display. The error indication cannot be cleared until power is turned off. Reset by turning
power off and then on.

6-5
6.2 Occurrence of oil leakage
(The oil flows out from the sludge outlet or heavy liquid outlet.)
6.2.1 Check the flow rates of valve closing operating water and sealing water.
Remove the flange of the water The pressure to set for the water pressure reducing
valve is 0.03 MPa (0.3 kgf/cm2).
connecting tube and place the manual
Flow rate of bowl closing valve
handle of the solenoid valve in the SJ10G - 70G : 1.5 - 2 L/min
"OPENED" position and measure the SJ100G - 150G : 3.5 - 4 L/min
flow rate of valve closing operating When the water flow rate is low, clean the Y-type
strainer and piping line.
water. (Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)
Extend the time of the valve closing operating
water timer. (Set with interval timer)
Check the flow rate of sealing water For flow rate, see 3.6.5, OM2.
Flow velocity
(SV3): Automatic specification
SJ10G - 30G : Approx. 8 L/min.
Disconnect the sealing water tube, place SJ50G - 70G : Approx. 12 L/min.
the manual handle of the solenoid valve SJ100G, 120G : Approx. 16 L/min.
in the "OPENED" position, and measure SJ150G : Approx. 18 L/min.
When the flow rate is low, clean the piping line.
the flow rate of sealing water. (Fig. 6-7,
Adjust the sealing water timer in keeping with the
Fig. 6-8) flow rate of sealing water.
(Refer to OM2: "Sealing Water".)
* Dynamic pressure (A state where water is flowing)
OM1: Operation Manual 1 OM2: Operation Manual 2 MM1: Maintenance Manual
Fig. 6-7 Fig. 6-8
GBC-1, GBC-2 GSH-1

6-6
6.2.2 Checks to perform by disassembling bowl
Check for a flaw on the sheet surface of If the seal surface is galled by metallic powder more
the main seal ring. (Fig. 6-9－5) than 60% of its length, replace the main seal ring.
Check for a flaw on the O ring of the If there is a flaw, replace the O ring with a new one.
valve case. (Fig. 6-9－6)
Check for a flaw on the valve sheet. If there is a flaw, replace the valve sheet with a new
(Fig. 6-9－7) one.
Check the pilot valve for contamination Thoroughly clean the pilot valve. Set it in the valve
and operation. (Fig. 6-9－8) case and check whether it can be operated by hand.
Check the drain nozzle for clogging. Clean.
(Fig. 6-9－9)
Check for a flaw on the sheet surface of If there is a fine scratch, repair it with an oil stone.
the main cylinder. (Fig. 6-9－10) (Refer to MM1: "Main Cylinder".)
(The main cylinder for C heavy oil has a special
coating. If there is a flaw, replace the main cylinder
with a new one.)
Check all the O rings for a flaw or loss of Replace if defective.
elasticity.
(Particularly the O ring on the outside of
the main cylinder) (Fig. 6-9－11)
Check the diameter of the gravity disc. Use a gravity disc suitable the specific gravity of the
(Fig. 6-9－12) oil. Check whether the oil temperature and the oil
feeding rate are appropriate. (Refer to the OM2:
"Gravity Disc Selecting Procedures".)
6.2.3 Checks to perform by disassembling water supplying device

Check the drilled hole of the water Clean.
supplying device for clogging.
(Fig. 6-10－18)
Check the O ring for a flaw or loss of Replace if defective.
elasticity. (Fig. 6-10－19)
Check for water leakage from the Re-tighten the cap nut of the joint.
operating water Teflon tube. (Fig. 6-10－ Replace the Teflon tube with a new one.
20)
6.2.4 Other
Check for a flaw and loss of elasticity on Replace if defective.
the O ring of the upper and lower hood.

6-7
12
31 15
14
13
5
10
11
6
17
7
8
9 16
Fig. 6-9
18
18
19
Vertical 20
shaft
Fig. 6-10

6-8
6.3 Occurrence of abnormal vibration
6.3.1 Check for unbalance in the bowl.
Isn't there an unevenly accumulated sludge Clean the inside of the bowl.
in the bowl? (Fig. 6-9－13) Adjust the discharge intervals properly.
(Refer to the OM2: "Discharge Intervals".)
Check for low valve opening operating water
pressure. (0.3～0.5MPa {3.0～5.0kgf/cm2})
Aren't the discs insufficient because of the Add if insufficient.
seating phenomenon? (Refer to the MM1: "Maintenance Inspection".)
(Fig. 6-9－14)
Have you replaced the major parts of the Balance adjustment is necessary.
bowl (the bowl body, bowl hood, distributor, (Contact our company or service agency.)
main cylinder, heavy liquid chamber or light
liquid chamber)?
Aren't the tally marks of the bowl nut, light Reassemble them with their tally marks in
liquid chamber and heavy liquid chamber out alignment with the tally marks of the bowl body.
of alignment? (Fig. 6-9－15) (Refer to the MM1: "Reassembly".)
Is the bowl bush in good contact? If there is a fine scratch, repair or replace.
(Fig. 6-9－16) (Refer to the MM1: "Maintenance Inspection".)
6.3.2 Checking for defects in vertical shaft system

Check the upper spring, lower spring and flat Measure the dimensions. If they are out of the
spring for deformation. (Fig. 6-11－21) specified values, replace.
(Refer to the MM1: "Maintenance Inspection".)
Check the bearing for wear. (Fig. 6-11－22) Replace if defective.
Check the vertical shaft and bearing case Replace if defective.
fitting portions for wear. (Fig. 6-11－23)
Check the portions with which the steel balls Replace if defective.
of the ball bearing case make contact, the
spring seat and steel ball for wear and
deformation. (Fig. 6-11－24)
6.3.3 Checking for defects in horizontal shaft system

Check the bearing for wear. (Fig. 6-12－27) Replace if defective.
Check the friction block for uneven wear. Replace if defective.
(Fig. 6-12－28)
Are the quantity and position of friction blocks Correct if incorrect.
correct? (Fig. 6-12－28) (Refer to the MM1: "Friction Block".)

6-9
26
22 21
25
23
22 23
24 21
Fig. 6-11
28 27 29
Fig. 6-12

6-10
6.4 Does not discharge sludge even if discharge procedures are performed.
Check the solenoid valve (SV1) for operation. Replace defective parts.
(Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)
Check the solenoid valve for partial discharge
(SV9) for operation. (Fig. 6-8)
Check the O ring (inner side) on the sliding Replace if there is evidence of sludge having
contact part of the bowl's main cylinder for entered under the main cylinder at the lower water
defective sealing. pressure chamber below.
Check the main sealing for improper installed Replace if its surface protrudes more than 1 mm
position. from the groove. (Refer to 2.2.1)
Check the strainer of the operating water Clean.
piping for clogging. (Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)
Check the O ring of the water supplying Replace if defective.
device for defective sealing. (Fig. 6-10－19)
Check the pilot valve assembly for Clean.
contamination. (Fig. 6-9－17)
Check the O ring for defective sealing. Replace if defective.
Check for low operating water pressure. 0.3～0.5MPa {3.0～5.0kgf/cm2}。
6.5 Mixed flow of water toward light liquid outlet

Aren't the sealing water and substitution Measure the flow rates of sealing water and
water flow rates excessive? substitution water. If they are in excess of the
specified flow rates, adjust the timers.
(Refer to the MM1.)
Is the diameter of the gravity disc Use a gravity disc suitable for the properties of the
appropriate? (Fig. 6-9－12) oil. (Refer to the MM1.)
Check the solenoid valve (SV3) for defective Replace defective parts.
sealing. (Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)
Is the sludge discharged? Corrective steps in Section 6.4
Check the heavy liquid outlet of the bowl for Clean.
clogging.
6.6 Low feeding rate or not fed at all

Check the gear pump for reduced capability. Disassemble and check. Replace defective parts.
Isn't the suction capacity of the gear pump Suction pressure -4m.
exceeded?
Isn't the suction piping of the pump too thin? Use a piping diameter suitable for the flow rate.
Isn't the air absorbed at an intermediate point Check and re-tighten the joint.
of the suction piping?
Isn't the strainer at the inlet side clogged? Clean.
Isn't the safety joint broken? (Fig. 6-12－29) Replace.

6-11
6.7 Gear oil mixed with water
Isn't the operating water drain pipe clogged? Clean.
Isn't the operating water supplied when the Check the solenoid valve and replace defective
SELFJECTOR is in the stopped state? parts.
Note) Keep the source valve closed.
Check the O ring of the bearing housing (1) Replace if defective.
for defective sealing. (Fig. 6-11－25)
Check the O ring of the bearing cap for Replace if defective.
defective sealing. (Fig. 6-11－26)
6.8 Poor separation

Isn't the treatment temperature low? Adjust to the proper temperature.
(Refer to the MM1: "Treatment Temperature".)
Isn't the inside diameter of the gravity disc too Replace the gravity disc with an appropriate one.
small? (Fig. 6-9－12) (Refer to the MM1: "Gravity Disc Selecting
Procedures".)
Isn't the treatment quantity too large? Adjust the treatment quantity properly.
(Refer to the MM1: "Feeding Rate".)
Isn't the speed low? Check the power transmission system, including
the friction clutch.
Aren't the discs clogged with sludge? (Fig. Clean.
6-9―14)
6.9 Low speed

Check the friction block for wear. (Fig. 6-12－ Replace.
28)
Is the bowl valve closed? Disassemble and check the bowl.
Check the valve opening and closing operating
water system.
Motor out of order. Check and repair.
6.10 Sludge unevenly accumulated in bowl

Aren't the sludge discharge intervals too Shorten the discharge intervals.
long? (Refer to the MM1: "Discharge Intervals".)
Isn't the valve opening operating water Adjust the valve opening operating water pressure
pressure low? to more than 0.3MPa {3.0kgf/cm2}. Clean the
strainer.
Are both of the pilot valves performing well? Check and clean the pilot valves.
（Fig. 6-9－8）
Check the drain nozzle for clogging.（Fig. 6-9 Check and clean the drain nozzle.
－9）

6-12
6.11 Mixed flow of oil toward heavy liquid outlet
Isn't the inside diameter of the gravity disc too Replace the gravity disc with an appropriate one.
large? （Fig. 6-9－12） (Refer to the MM1: "Gravity Disc Selecting
Procedures".)
Isn't the flow rate of sealing water low? Clean the strainer. Measure the flow rate of
sealing water and adjust the timer.
Isn't there leakage from the O ring of the light Replace.
liquid chamber.（Fig. 6-9－31）
6.12 Accessories
6.12.1 Solenoid valve unit for the operating water
6.12.1.1 Low flow rate
Check the operating water piping for Flush the piping.
clogging.
Check the strainer for clogging. Clean.
(Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)
6.12.2 Solenoid valve for water

6.12.2.1 Leaky
Isn't the diaphragm broken? Replace if defective.
Check the valve sheet surface for a flaw or a Check and clean. Replace if defective.
foreign substance caught.
6.12.2.2 Does not operate. (Does not open the valve.)

Isn't there a defect in electric wiring? Check the wiring.
Isn't the coil damaged by heat? Replace if defective.
6.12.3 Feed valve

6.12.3.1 Valve does not switch over.
Isn't the supply of compressed air Check the three-way solenoid valve.
insufficient?
Isn't the air pressure low? Adjust the air pressure properly.
(0.5～0.9MPa {5.0～9.0kgf/cm2})
Isn't there air leakage? Check the O ring of the piston assembly.
Replace if defective.
6.12.3.2 Leaky
Check the valve sheet or disc for damage. Check. Replace defective parts.

6-13
6.12.4 Leakage Monitor function (LM) of Multi-Monitor
[Refer to the OM2: "Leakage Monitor (LM)".]
6.12.4.1 Incorrect alarm is generated.
Isn't the discharge pressure lower than the Adjust the discharge pressure to the set
alarm pressure? pressure.
Isn't the feeding timer too short? Adjust the feeding timer. (Normally 30～60 sec.)
Isn't the fluctuation timer too short? Adjust the fluctuation timer. (Normally 10～20
sec.)
Aren't there large fluctuations in discharge Adjust as follows.
pressure? Back pressure : ± 0.01MPa (±0.1kgf/cm2)
Oil temperature : ± 5 ℃
Flow rate : ± 5%
Isn't the trigger range (ΔP) too short? Adjust the range.
Is the minimum pressure optimal? Adjust the minimum pressure.
! CAUTION
When adjusting the light liquid outlet pressure beyond the leakage trigger level ( P), be sure to
follow the procedure below. Failure to follow could result in an erroneous alarm being issued.
The same applies when the light liquid outlet pressure varies due to improper flow rate
adjustment.
(1) Change the position of the MM function switch on the control panel from ON to OFF.
(2) Accomplish pressure and flow rate adjustments.
(3) Return the MM function switch on the control panel to the ON position. (In approximately 30
to 40 seconds, the flow LED on the Multi-Monitor is activated.)
Note) For manual versions, the above description reads "alarm panel" or "starter" for "control panel."
6.12.4.2 No alarm is output.

Isn't there a defect in the electrical wiring to Check the wiring.
the control panel?
Isn't the "Feeding" signal line open-circuited? Check the wiring.
Is the MM function switch in the right Set to ON.
position?
Is the LM alarm output switch in the right Set to ON.
position?
6.12.4.3 Alarm output during discharge process

Board out of order. Replace the Multi-monitor.
6.12.4.4 Error/recognition number is displayed on the Multi-Monitor.

Pressure sensor faulty Replace.

6-14
6.12.4.5 Does not operate when the power switch is set to ON.
Power to the control panel is off. Turn on power.
Fuse in the control panel blown. Check and replace fuse.
The power switch or circuit board faulty. Replace the Multi-Monitor.
Error indication
Error number
Multi-Monitor（MM）
Error LED（red）
Fig. 6-13

6-15
6.12.5 Discharge Detector function (DD) of Multi-Monitor
[Refer to the OM2: "Discharge Detector (DD)".]
Is the proximity switch mounted at the right Adjust the mounting position. (The normal
position? proximity switch-to-horizontal shaft clearance is
1.0 mm ±0.3mm.)
6.12.5.2 Trouble display LED "Trouble" lights.

Is the proximity switch mounted at the right Adjust the mounting position.
position? (Fig. 6-14)
The proximity switch or PC board faulty. Replace the proximity switch or the Multi-Monitor.
6.12.5.3 Alarm is output during discharge process.

The proximity switch or PC board faulty. Replace the proximity switch or the Multi-Monitor.
Power to the control panel is off. Turn on power.
Fuse in the control panel blown (Fig. 6-14) Check and replace the fuse.
6.12.5.5 Alarm is not output .

Is discharge signal received? Check wiring.
Is the DD alarm output switch in the right Set to ON.
position?
Error indication
Error number
Error LED（red）
Fig. 6-14

6-16
6.12.6 Water Detector function (WD) of Multi-Monitor
[Refer to the OM3: "Water Detector (WD)"]
6.12.6.1 Alarm is frequent.(GSH-1)
Is pressure in the circulation line is below the Apply a back pressure of 0.1MPa {1.0 kgf/cm2}.
alarm level?; isn't back pressure applied?

Isn't discharge pressure below the alarm Adjust the discharge side pressure to the preset
level? level.
Isn't setting on the delay timer too short? Adjust the timer (Normally 30 to 60 sec.).
Isn't setting on the hold timer too short? Adjust the timer (Normally 10 to 20 sec.).
Isn't the trigger range (ΔW) too short? Adjust the range. (Normally 0.04 to 0.06 MPa.).
Is the minimum pressure optimal? Adjust the minimum pressure. . (Normally 0.02 to
0.03 MPa.).
! CAUTION
When adjusting the circulation line pressure beyond the water trigger level, follow the procedure
below. Failure to follow could result an incorrect alarm being generated.
(1) Change the position of the MM function switch on the control panel from ON to OFF.
(2) Accomplish pressure adjustment.
(3) Return the MM function switch on the control panel to ON. (In approximately 20 to 30
seconds, the flow rate LED on the Multi-Monitor is activated.)
6.12.6.3 No alarm is output.

Isn't there any defect in the electrical wiring to Check the wiring.
the automatic control panel?
Isn't the Feeding signal line open-circuited? Check the wiring.
Is the MM function switch in the right Set to ON.

position?
Is the water detection switch in the right Set to ON.
position?
6.12.6.4 Alarm output during discharge process

PC board faulty. Replace the Multi-Monitor.
6.12.6.5 Error/recognition number is displayed on the Multi-Monitor.

Pressure sensor faulty Replace the sensor.

6-17
Power to the control panel is off. Switch on power.
Fuse in the control panel blown. Check and replace the fuse.
The power switch or circuit board faulty. Replace the Multi-Monitor.
OM1: Operation Manual 1

MM1: Maintenance Manual
Note
For "Cause of Troubles and Corrective Steps" on the automatic control panel, refer to the
Operation Manual 3A ～ 3C.
Error indication
Error number
Error LED（red）
Fig. 6-15

6-18

SJ-GENUIE-SERIES Compressed 2 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SJ-GENUIE-SERIES Compressed 2 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MITSUBISHI

MITSUBISHI KAKOKI KAISHA Ltd.

The manual is edited for treating mineral oils

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

The composition of instruction manual for SELFJECTOR is as follows.

Use each manual according to the particular purpose to sufficiently

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

Manual Description Reader

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

1 Precautions in safety ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

2 Configuration of oil purifying system............................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Gear pump ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2

3 STRUCTURE of SELFJRCTOR ........................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 General............................................................................................................................................ 3-1

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

4 Motor, starter and control panel ..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Motor ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1

5 Programmable logic controller（PLC） ......................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Programmable Controller ................................................................................................................ 5-1

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

6.1 Multi-Monitor.................................................................................................................................... 6-1

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

For correct use, carefully read the "Precautions in safety" beforehand.

1.1 Symbols related to safety

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

(A) Bowl nut

Immediately stop if vibration is excessive.

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

Make sure of complete stoppage before loosening each section.

Take care in handling the parts.

Beware of corrosion and erosion.

For ambiguous points in the instruction manual, contact our company or

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

Sludge: Solids accumulated in bowl in narrow

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1

MKK SUPPLY Note) Automatic GBC-1 and GBC-2

1 SELFJECTOR A Dirty oil inlet

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

2.2 Oil heater

2.3 3-way cylinder valve

2.4 Multi- Monitor (MM)

2.4.1 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)

2.4.2 Discharge Detector Function (DD)

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

2.6 Control panel

2.7 Alarm panel

2.8 Kinds (specifications) of oil purifying system

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

GBC-1 GBC-2 GSH-1 GAP-11 Manual

2.10 Feature of Automatic types

Automatic Feature Suffix of

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

3.2 Drive unit

Lower bearing parts

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

of friction pulley to perform braking.

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

Dirty oil inlet

Purified oil outlet

Top disc Bowl nut

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

Main cylinder ⅰ Purifying operation process

Monitor indication LED 切入